Home

MGC 7.5 User Guide vol. 2_Advanced Features - Support

1. Default Participant Properties Link Out Dial out ISDN 7087996 E Participant Properties Link In Participant Properties Link Out 5 16 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Shown below is the Star Cascading Conference as viewed in the MGC Manager Main window File Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help da Eee Als 2 Rae ra Blasi POEN PEM TS DELETE FILTER A l 3 ea e wee ay r gt APARAR MGC 258 Af Name staus Connection Startsat nd Time Prod Mgmt Normal tn MCU Configuration p conterence A Jan 26 2004 12 17 41 Jan 26 2004 14 17 41 H a On Going Conferences 3 Eadconference B Single Participant Jan 26 2004 12 24 00 Jan 26 2004 14 24 00 Conference A conference m Single Participant Jan 26 2004 12 25 26 Jan 26 2004 14 25 26 ukm knz EE conference 8 unkout AE conference c 8 Link Out 2 On Going Gateway Sessions 0 EB Participants Queue o EE Reservations 4 H ta Meeting Rooms 2 Name status Connection Network Phone iP Connection Type audio video Sync TxRate Rx Rate Retries Left Media Me Videc Link In D connected M996 996 P 99 99 Ab Dial in qj a OK 128 128 o Audio Video Link I 8 Link In 2 D gt connected M998 998 P 99 99 7b Dial in q OK 128 128 o Audio Video Link I Ea conterence ve 1 Con
2. amp DatabaseManager Version 7 5 0 6 fal x File Edit View Options Help as BB AccordoB Name Scheduler fe Defaults 9 Administrator W Labels Moderator phi Per missions Users Hii Groups Data Base Name AccordDB S 7 For each Permission the system shows the currently defined access rights to three main modules e Scheduler indicates whether the user has access to the Meeting Scheduler module This option is not relevant to MGC Manager users e Monitoring Conference indicates whether the user has access to the Meeting Director module This option is not relevant to MGC Manager users e Database Configuration indicates whether the user has access to the administrator tables of the database Sorting the Permissions List You can sort the Permissions in ascending or descending order alphabetically by clicking on the Name column heading Defining a New User The database includes the list of all the users that can access the database from the MGC Manager and their access rights The user definition is used in Ad Hoc conferencing when the WebCommander is used as the External database application for conference initiation and access validation For more information about Ad Hoc Conferencing see Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication 6 53 Chapter 6 Using a Database To define a new User 1 Inthe Browser area right click the Users
3. cceccesceeseesceeseeeeeeeseececneeereceeeneeneees 6 70 Database Templates 0 0 ccc ees 7 1 Templates Overview ccccccssccsssscsseessseeseseeeeseesseceeseeenseeeeeenseeenseesaeees 7 1 Logging into the User Tables of the Database oo eee eeeeseeteeeneeee 7 3 Reservation Templates cccsccescceseceseeseceeeeseceaceaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeens 7 8 Defining a Reservation Template in the Database eee 7 9 Defining a New a Reservation Template eee ceseeeeseeeneees 7 10 Conference Parameters ccccccesceseeeseceeceeeeeceaeeeeceaeeeaeees 7 11 Conference General Parameters ceccesceeseeeseeeeeeteeeeeees 7 12 Setting the Scheduler Parameters 2 0 0 ccceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeees 7 13 Defining the Settings Parameters 0 00 0 eeeeeseesenteeeneenees 7 14 Assigning Participants to the Conference s es 7 15 Setting Video Sources ceesccesseeeseeeeseeeeeeseeeesseeeneeensnees 7 18 Meet Me Per Conference oreinen 7 19 RECOGIDO lt cisscinstinscinsenssiate EEE 7 20 Starting a Conference from a Reservation Template 7 21 Listing the Participants in a Reservation Template 7 21 Defining an Operator Reservation Template ceeeeeeeeeee 7 26 Setting an Operator Reservation Template as the Default Attending Operator Conference 0 eee eseeseeeeeeseeeeseeeeeaes 7 31 Participant Templates 20 0 0 cccecceecceseeseesceceeeceneseeeeeeseneseneceeeneeeneees 7 33 A
4. MS Access Database Microsoft Access Driver mdb Visual FoxPro Database Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver Visual FoxPro Tables Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver a gt An ODBC User data source stores information about how to connect to the indicated data provider A User data source is only visible to you and can only be used on the current machine Cancel Apply Help Chapter 6 Using a Database 3 Click the System DSN tab ODBC Data Source Administrator Microsoft Access Driver mdb AccordUpdateDB Microsoft Access Driver mdb 4 Click the Add button The Create New Data Source dialog box opens Create New Data Source Driver da Microsoft para arquivos texto txt csv 4 Driver do Microsoft Access mdb 4 Driver do Microsoft dBase dbf 4 Driver do Microsoft Excel xls 4 Driver do Microsoft Paradox db 4 Microsoft dBase Driver dbf jicrnentt dR ace VER Nyi 1 dhe a 5 Select Microsoft Access Driver from the database type list and then click Finish MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box opens ODBC Microsoft Access Setup 2 xi Data Source Name Polycom Lo Description Conferenced Cancel r Database Database Hep cea Pear _Lonpsct Advanced m System Database None C Database System Database Options gt gt In the Data Source Name
5. link Conference A Slave r OOOO OOO ANU OSOS Participant f 1 m I i Conference A link __ Conference BL EA RA l l Slave Master f ze i ES Eta 1 i l l 1 i 1 E l l ES W i i l Conference B l y a H Master Wey IN PAS oe Niy ing E gt Participant i i l l l l Slave ER Hev e Figure 5 2 Multi Hierarchy MIH Cascading In the configuration above there are multiple Master Slave relationships since some conferences act like masters to certain conferences while slaves to others On the overall conference level there is only one Master 1 In addition there are conferences that act as both Master and Slave 2 and 3 These conferences 2 and 3 are Slaves to the conference Master 1 but they are Masters to the end slaves MIH Cascading conferences allow Full management of extremely large distributed conferences e Full Chair Control for all conferences and participants MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II When defining the properties of conferences taking part in a multi hierarchy cascading conference it is important to correctly define the hierarchy tree by selecting the appropriate cascading option either Master or Slave It is not recommended to select the Auto option as the automatic selection of Master and Slave by the computer may result in conflicts When the link between conferences is connected MI
6. the MGC internal format For a detailed description refer to the MGC Manager 5 Like audio files the video slides must be prepared in advance and converted into Administrator s Guide Audio and Video Conversion Tools 31 Click Next 2 43 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services The SilencelT dialog box opens xl IV Enable SilencelT MY SilencelT Menu falmute aca z Add Message File JZ Unmute and Return to Conference sinunmtr aca bai I Return to Conference Muted D p 7 Unmute Reminder Mm y I Adiust SilencelT Sensitivity andUnmute z Add Mess T Disable SilencelT and Unmute ey Reeinessace rie I Participant Detected as Noisy ea Add Message File Roll Call dependant option Add Message File age File lt Back Next gt Cancel The SilenceIT feature of the IVR Message Service is used to automatically mute the participant lines that were detected as noisy 32 Select the Enable SilenceIT check box to enable the SilenceIT feature The SilenceIT Menu and Unmute and Return to Conference check boxes become selected as these messages are mandatory for the Silencelt feature 33 Select audio files for the mandatory messages Select the check boxes of any optional messages you wish to enable and select the required audio files want to add new audio files click Add Message File to download the appropriate audio file to the MGC units memory For the downlo
7. 11 Click Next 2 57 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services SY 12 13 The Video Services dialog box opens LT x M Enable Video Services Add Slide Video Welcome Slide lt Back Cancel Help This dialog box enables you to define the Video Welcome Slide for the Entry Queue Service Video participants connecting to this Entry Queue will see the slide while hearing the audio welcome message To enable H 323 participants to view the Welcome slide define the system cfg flag in IP MEDIA FLAGS section ENABLE_IP_SLIDE YES SIP participants cannot view the Welcome slide Click Enable Video Services The Video Welcome Slide option is enabled In the Video Welcome Slide list select the video slide that will be displayed to participants connecting to the Entry Queue The slide list includes the video slides that were previously downloaded to the MCU memory If the list is empty you can download a new slide now by clicking the Add Slide button The nstall File dialog box opens The downloading process is similar to the downloading of audio files see step 8 on page 2 29 Alternatively select None if no video Welcome slide is to be displayed The required video slide must first be converted to the Polycom s internal format acv This process is described in the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 8 14 Click Finish to complete the Entry Queue Service definition 2 58
8. An IVR Service must be assigned to the On Going conference during the conference setup In attended conferences the operator controls the transition to the Attended or On Hold stages and from these stages to the Conferencing stage If the IVR Entry Queue Service is not set to attended mode On Hold for Operator Assistance the participant is automatically moved from the Entry Queue or the conference IVR queue Greeting stage to the conference Conferencing stage If an Entry Queue is used in conjunction with a conference to which an IVR Service is assigned the caller is automatically transferred from the Entry Queue to the conference IVR queue if this Entry Queue is set to the unattended mode If not set otherwise the participant is then automatically moved from the conference IVR queue to the conference Several operators can run IVR enabled conferences simultaneously Conference Access Dial in participants can access the conference directly via the IVR system or via an Entry Queue The following examples demonstrate the common connection methods to a conference Conference IVR Access Participants dial the conference dial in numbers and are connected to the conference IVR Service Using touch tone signals from their telephone or endpoint s remote control participants input the required information to menu driven scripts and voice prompts that are part of the IVR Service Once the correct information is entered the partic
9. New Reservation and Participant templates are created within the selected group and they are automatically assigned to that group Although the Participants table and the Reservation table are separate entities they are both organized by the same Group hierarchy Only users who have permission to configure the database can define the Groups hierarchy and the access rights of users to the various Groups in the database 6 64 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Defining a New Group To define a new group 1 Login to the MGC Database Manager and list the Database categories 2 Expand the Groups tree by clicking the p us icon next to the Groups icon g DatabaseManager lol x File Edit View Options Help E AccordDe Name d Defaults EE Root L User Defined Defaults LE Conference Defaults Participant Defaults 4 MGC Manager Defaults E Labels Permission Ya Default My Group f UserGroups ACCORD Es Administration Operator Es POLYCOM user user2 WebOffice Ready Data Base Name AccordDB Sys DSN C 1_ 3 Ifthe list already includes several groups expand the tree until the group to which you wish to add a sub group is displayed On first entry only the Root group is listed when expanding the Groups tree When upgrading from a previous version that did not support Groups when the Update Database process is performed by t
10. Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Remote The remote communication mode in H 221 format Communication Mode Table A 22 Event Fields for Event 9 Participant Errors Summary CE Participant Name The name of the participant Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU A 37 Appendix A CDR File Fields A 38 Table A 22 Event Fields for Event 9 Participant Errors Summary Continued ee Ch Resource Failure Indicates whether or not a resource failure occurred as follows 0 No resource failure occurred 1 A resource failed Number of H 221 The number of times the synchronization was lost by Sync Loss the MCU Value range 0 255 Duration of H221 The overall duration in seconds that the synchronization Sync Loss was lost by the MCU Number of H 221 The number of times the synchronization was lost by R Sync Loss the remote endpoint Value range 0 255 Duration of H 221 The overall duration in seconds that the synchronization R Sync Loss was lost by the remote endpoint Number of Remote The number of fast updates VCU Table A 23 Event Fields for Events 10 101 105 Reserved Participant Operator Add Participant Operator Update Participant EE Operator Name The login name of the operator Participant Name The name of the participant Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU
11. 7 Click the Settings tab to define the conference technical parameters The Conference Properties Settings dialog box opens Default Conference Properties xi Scheduler Setings Participants Video Sources 2 ate In Out a F ConferenceOnPot J Roll Call All the fields in the Settings dialog box display the default values defined in the MGC Database Manager Res Defaults You can change them as required 7 14 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Assigning Participants to the Conference Participants can be added to the Reservation template either by selecting the participants from the Participant database from a Participant Template file or by defining them directly during the Reservation template definition 8 Click the Participants tab to add participants to the Reservation template The Conference Properties Participants dialog box opens Default Conference Properties x General Scheduler Settings Participants Video Sources Meet Me Per Conf Recording Pre Defined Participants Conference Participants Name gt gt lt lt Del 4 H IV Allow Undefined Parties Min Patticipants B 4 Max Participants Auto Pre Defined Participants File ED ebbie MGC data Template and MCU files participants usr I Dial Out Manually Browse From database From directory At this point you can assign a participant to the conference from the Participant database f
12. Audio and Video Conversion Tools 4 1 Chapter 4 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences Greet and Guide Conferences 4 The Greet and Guide conference is a form of an attended conference with an assigned AV Message Service in which participants are moved from one stage to another during their connection to the conference There are two types of Attended conferences e Welcome No Wait e Attended Wait In the Welcome No Wait conference the participant is greeted by a video slide and an audio message when connecting to the conference After a pre defined period the participant automatically connects to the conference without the operator s assistance In an Attended Wait conference the participant is greeted by the video slide and the audio message and waits for operator assistance in the Participants Queue The Greet and Guide software module enables the operator to perform the following operations e Provide personal guidance to conference participants e Customize the video slide and audio message played when participants connect to the MCU and move through the various stages of the Greet and Guide conference e Monitor and assist all the participants currently waiting in the Participants Queue regardless of their conference association Greet and Guide conferences run on a standard audio card If your MCU includes an Audio card you can use the IVR Service to perform the same functions
13. H 239 People Content is available in cascaded conferences only in a Star Cascading topology with Video Switching conferences For more information about Star Cascading see Chapter 5 Star Cascading H 243 on page 5 2 H 239 and People Content are supported with the following features Highest Common H 264 4CIF Encryption FECC H 320 and H 323 H 239 People Content is not supported in Software CP and Quad View conferences H 320 Cascading conferences MIH Cascading conferences Simple Cascading conferences T 120 conferences Double Gateway sessions The H 239 People Content mode is not supported in Entry Queues H 239 is not supported in Gateway calls in version 6 x and earlier However you can set up a point to point call with H 239 in these versions by setting up a meeting room with H 239 enabled and both the minimum and maximum number of participants set to 2 To enable the H 239 standard at the MCU level The H 239 standard is enabled disabled in the system cfg file in the PEOPLE PLUS CONTENT section By default the H 239 flag is set to YES Set the H 239 flag to NO to disable H 239 When disabled the MCU supports only the People Content option When enabled you can set the H 239 People Content option at the conference level see To enable the H 329 Peoplet Content option at the conference level on page 1 4 To enable the H 239 and People Content option in Gateway Sessions set the
14. MGC WebCommander ES site MGC Manager Application Internet Server and LAN Database Server optional Figure 6 2 Data Flow Figure 6 2 describes the system structure for public databases that are used by all the users In this configuration several operator workstations running the MGC Manager application are connected to one or more MGC units The public databases are installed on a LAN server and they can be accessed by all the MGC Manager users on the network and by the WebCommander site via the Internet using the Web browser In addition operators can have a 6 3 Chapter 6 Using a Database 4 personal database installed on their computers Unless defined as shared the personal database cannot be accessed by other network users and can be used only from the specific operator workstation Access to the personal and public database is determined during the configuration stage This chapter describes the database configuration in the MGC Manager Important When both the MGC WebCommander and the MGC Manager applications use the same database the administrator tables defined in the MGC Web Server Manager apply to the MGC Database Manager and vice versa Therefore the various tables may include parameters that apply only to the WebCommander and others that apply only to the MGC Manager Users may access the database via the MGC Web Server Manager or the MGC Database Manager and perform changes in the administrator ta
15. Personal code Invalid personal code PINFAIL ACA failure Press any key Press any key to enter the ANYKEY ACA conference General The conference is now secured SECURED ACA Conference secured General The conference is now in an UNSECURE ACA Conference unsecured mode un secured General Wait for Please wait for the chairperson to LDRWAIT ACA chairperson join or start the conference General First to You are the first person to join the FIRST ACA join conference General Mute all All conference participants are now ALLMUTE ACA but me muted General Unmute All conference participants are now ALLUNMTE ACA all but me unmuted General The chairperson has left the CHAIRDRP ACA Chairperson conference dropped General End time The conference is about to end ENDALERT ACA alert General Change Press one to change conference PINCHANG ACA password menu password Press two to change chairperson password Press nine to exit the menu 2 66 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 2 15 Default IVR Messages Continued Message Type Message Text FileName General Enter Please enter the new conference NEWPIN ACA new conference password Press the pound key password when complete General Enter Please enter the new chairperson NEWCHAIR ACA new chairperson password Press the pound key password when complete General Re en
16. Recording Links g On Going Conferences 0 H p E The Entry Queue Messaqge Service General dialog box opens x Entry Queue Service Name Language for IVR ENGLISH is Extemal Server umber of User Input Retries Timeout for User Input DTMF Delimiter E Cancel Help This dialog box enables you to define the general parameters of the Entry Queue Service 5 Define the following parameters Table 3 2 Entry Queue Service Global Parameters STD eer Entry Queue Type the name of the Entry Queue Message service Service Name Language for Select the language in which the Audio Messages and IVR prompts will be heard The Languages are defined in the VR Properties dialog box 3 23 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication Table 3 2 Entry Queue Service Global Parameters Continued ee ee ey External Server Select Conference NID to verify the conference Numeric ID with an external database application Number of User Enter the number of times the user is able to respond Input Retries to each menu prompt before the participant is disconnected from the IVR system or waits for the Operator s assistance Timeout for User Enter the duration in seconds that the system waits for Input input from the participant before it is considered as an input error DTMF Delimiter The interaction between the caller and the system is done
17. Table A 41 Event Fields for Event 106 Operator Set End Time Fc New End Time The new conference end time set by the operator in GMT time Operator Name The login name of the operator who changed the conference end time Table A 42 Event Fields for Events 107 109 Operator Move Participant from Conference Operator Attend Participant a ee Operator Name The login name of the operator moving the participant Participant Name The name of the participant being moved by the operator MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 42 Event Fields for Events 107 109 Operator Move Participant from Conference Operator Attend Participant Continued ii aes fC ens Participant ID The identification number as assigned by the MCU of the participant being moved Destination The name of the conference to which the participant is Conference Name being moved Destination The identification number of the conference as assigned Conference ID by the MCU to which the participant is being moved Table A 43 Event Fields for Events 108 112 Operator Move Participant to Conference Attend Participant to Operator Conference as ns Operator Name The name of the operator moving the participant to the conference Source The name of the source conference Conference Name Source The identification number of the source conference as Conference ID assigned by the MCU Participant Name The name of the particip
18. The undefined type 0 Default 1 Undefined participant 2 Unreserved participant The node type as follows 0 MCU 1 Terminal The phone number for Bonding dial out calls Bonding is a communication protocol that aggregates from two up to thirty 64 Kbps B channels together to look like one large bandwidth channel Relevant only to H 323 participants The video rate in units of bits per second A value of 294967295 denotes auto and in this case the rate is computed by the MCU Relevant only for an H 323 participant The IP address of the H 323 participant An address of 4294967295 indicates that no IP address was specified for the participant and the gatekeeper is used for routing In all other cases the address overrides the gatekeeper Relevant only for an H 323 participant The signaling port A value of 65535 is ignored by MCU The alias type as follows 8 H 323 ID alias type 7 E 164 alias type 11 URL ID alias type 12 Transport ID alias type 13 Email ID alias type 14 Participant number alias type The H 323 participant alias The alias may contain up to 512 characters A 63 Appendix A CDR File Fields A 64 Table A 44 Event Fields for Event 2108 Operator Move Participant to Conference Continue 1 a Participant Name The name of the participant Participant Calling The telephone number used by the participant for dial in Number Participant ID The identificati
19. 2 Highlight the Participant Template File option and then click OK A new empty window appears on the desktop E PartyTemplatesFile1 5 oj x This window lists all the Participant templates that were added to the Participant Template file Since it is a new Participant Template file the window is empty The title of the window PartyTemplatesFileX represents the default file name Chapter 8 Templates Handling 3 On the Template menu click Save As Template DataBase Directory Optior New Ctrl N Open Ctrl O Close Sa Gtrl 5 Convert into Database Recent File The Save As dialog box opens 2x Save in My Documents ace Polycom My Music toc topics File name Participants 1 Save as type Participant Files usr x Cancel i Specify a file name and select the folder in which to save the new Participant Template file All Participant Template files are of Participants Files type and have a usr extension Click the Save button The Participant Template file is saved and the window s title bar displays the name of the Participant Template file At this point you can add Participant templates to the Participant Template file Adding Participants to a Participant Template File Participant templates can be added to a Participant Template file using the following methods Defining the participant parameters directly in the Participants Template file win
20. Database ODBC The window of the selected database opens 2 Ifthe list of Reservation or Participant templates is very long you can filter the list of templates For instructions see steps 6 to step 8 on page page 7 6 Deleting a Reservation Template from the Database If you no longer need a Reservation template you can remove it from the database to keep the database smaller To delete a Reservation template 1 Log in to the database and open the Reservations in Database window 2 Expand the Template Groups tree by clicking the plus icon next to the Group icons Continue this process until you locate the Template Group in which the Reservation template is stored 7 43 Chapter 7 Database Templates 3 Double click the Group icon in which the Reservation template is stored or click the plus icon alongside it to expand the list of Reservation templates within that Template Group 4 Right click the icon of the Reservation template to delete and then click Delete or press the lt Del gt key Eai Sales1 j Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Default Attending Print Template Cut Ctrrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctr Paste 4 Ctrl P lt a Properties A message appears prompting you to confirm the deletion MGC Manager xi A Delete Reservation HR Weekly Are You Sure mea e 5 Click Yes to confirm the deletion or No to Cancel the deletion
21. Double click the Data Sources ODBC option The ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box opens Shortcut Shortcut Shortcut Shortcut Shortcut Shortcut Shortcut Shortcut Shortcut See step 2 in the next procedure for the continuation of the registration procedure 6 21 Chapter 6 Using a Database To register the database from the MGC Manager application 1 Open the MGC Manager application 2 On the Database menu click Database ODBC and then click Add Remove connection to the ODBC DataBase Directory Options Window Help Save Database Refresh Database Filter Login Open D B Reservation Template Open D B Participant Template Logout amp Clear Login Record Load Defaults From DB Manage databases Database ODBC Refresh the database list Add Remove connection to ODBC ODBC Data Source Administrator 2 x User DSN System DSN File DSN Drivers Tracing Connection Pooling About User Data Sources Microsoft dBase Driver dbf dBase Files Word Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver Remove Excel Files Microsoft Excel Driver xls FoxPro Files Word Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver Configure MS Access Database Microsoft Access Driver mdb Visual FoxPro Database Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver Visual FoxPro Tables Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver EN An ODBC User data source stores information about how to connect to the indicated data provider A User data
22. General dialog box 6 13 Chapter 6 Using a Database 13 12 Click the Options tab to verify that the appropriate path of the SQL server is selected If it is incorrect type the correct path Restore database x General Options Prompt before restoring each backup J Force restore over existing database Restore database files as Read from media Logical file name _ Move to physical file name R amp DSOL_log C MSSQL DATAAccord_log Idf R amp DSGL_dat C MSSQL DATAAccord_log mdf Recovery completion state Leave database operational No additional transaction logs can be restored C Leave database nonoperational but able to restore additional transaction logs C Leave database read only and able to restore additional transaction logs Undo file C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSS OLSSOL2000 64 lel Cancel Help Click OK to confirm exit the Restore Database dialog box and launch the restore operation At the end of the restore operation the restored database appears in the list of databases In some installations an error message Microsoft SQL DMO ODBC SQLSTATE 42000 may be displayed when clicking OK MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To stop the installation error message from appearing a Stop the SQL Server by right clicking the SQL Server icon in the System Tray bottom right corner and then clicking Stop from the pop u
23. If there is no On Going conference with that numeric ID the MCU verifies the Numeric ID with the database application that compares it against its database If the database application finds a match the participant is granted the right to create a new conference If this Numeric ID is not registered in the database the conference cannot be started and this participant is disconnected from the Entry Queue The external database contains a list of participants users with their assigned parameters Once a participant is identified in the database his her parameters as defined in the database can be sent to the MCU These parameters are Conference Name Conference Billing code Conference Password Chairperson Password Conference Information such as the contact person name These fields correspond to the User Defined 1 2 and 3 fields in the Conference Properties dialog box Maximum number of participants allowed for the conference 3 7 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication Minimum number of participants for which resources should be saved Conference Owner These parameters may also be defined in the conference Profile and if they are not sent from the external database to the MCU they will be taken from the Profile 7 A new conference is started based on the Profile assigned to the Entry Queue The parameters sent from the database overwrite these para
24. MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Event Types The table below contains a brief description of each type of event that can be logged in the CDR file and indicates where to find details of the fields that are specific to that type of event Table A 3 CDR Event Types ar Conference Start CDR event code 1 Conference general and summary information For a description of the fields see Table A 4 Event Fields for Event 1 Conference Start on page A 17 Note There is one Conference Start event per conference It is always the first event in the file after the conference summary record It contains reservation details but not participant details Conference Start CDR event code 2001 Continue 1 Additional information about a Conference Start event For a description of the fields see Table A 5 Event Fields for Event 2001 Conference Start Continue 1 on page A 22 Conference Start CDR event code 3001 Continue 2 Additional information about a Conference Start event For a description of the fields see Table A 6 Event Fields for Event 3001 Conference Start Continue 2 on page A 25 Conference Start CDR event code 4001 Continue 3 Additional information about a Conference Start event For a description of the fields see Table A 7 Event Fields for Event 4001 Conference Start Continue 3 on page A 26 A 7 Appendix A CDR File Fields Table A 3 CDR Event Types Continued Conferenc
25. Polycom WebOffice a Program Files a rho_inst a wINDows O WUTemp m A On nrin M 4 The archived files can have two formats unformatted or formatted depending on the Retrieve option used To display the contents of a file double click its name in the Windows Explorer window If the file was saved using the Retrieve function cdr the data is displayed without any field listing or indication in the following manner j Product Management_c158 cdr Notepad 5 x File Edit Format Help 846 Product Management 3822 02 02 2004 09 43 14 02 00 00 02 02 2004 09 43 14 4 1 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 0 0 1 28 255 3 255 255 255 0 0 0 2001 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 7 5 150 3 0 255 1 1 61 1 994 1234 0 0 None 3 1 5 1 3001 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 1 2352 312327900 4001 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 weekly 5001 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 2557 i 1234 Polycom Sales Targets 10 02 02 2004 09 43 4 0 debbie 0 5 255 2 0 323 255 0 255 0 0 1 3 2010 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 2 0 355 5 0 1 4294967295 2887156742 1720 8 3010 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 05 110 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 Duke Knoop 1 0 255 2 0 323 255 0 255 0 0 1 3 2010 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 2 0 255 5 0 1 4294967295 2887157031 1720 8 3010 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 1 10 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 Lynne 2 0 255 2 0 323 255 0 255 0 0 1 3 2010 02 02 2004 09 43 i4 0 2 0 255 5 0 1 4294967295 288715691
26. Request Prompts the participant for the conference Numeric Conference ID ID or password depending on the Entry Queue mode Password as configured in the system cfg file Join Failure When the participant entered an incorrect conference Message Numeric ID or password requests the participant to type the Numeric ID or password again 2 56 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 8 Assign an audio file to each message type as follows a Click the table entry Name The message type appears at the bottom of the table and the drop down list displays the names of the audio files stored in the MGC unit s memory b Select the appropriate file from the Message File list If the files were not downloaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you want to add new audio files click Add Message File to download the appropriate audio file to the MGC unit s memory For the downloading procedure see step 8 on page 2 29 9 Click Next The Operator Assistance dialog box opens This dialog box is identical to the VR Operator Assistance dialog box Operator Assistance x IV Enable Operator Assistance Operator Assistance Indication Message JOPERHELP AC Add Message File Disconnection Message S00DBvE ACA v Add Message File IV Enable Operator Assistance on Failure eee 10 Define the appropriate parameters for the new Entry Queue Service as described in Table 2 8 on page 2 40
27. Terminate conference after the chairperson exits option is implemented all conferences will be terminated when there is no longer a chairperson connected to a conference Terminating a Cascading Conference The system will terminate a slave conference when it no longer has any live participants and will terminate the master conference when it no longer has any live participants itself and has no slave conferences with live participants 3 17 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication Defining Auto Cascading Entry Queues You must set up an Auto Cascading Entry Queue on each MCU on which Auto Cascading is implemented To define an Auto Cascading Entry Queue 1 Inthe Entry Queue Properties dialog box select the Cascade check box Entry Queue Properties Product Management x r Entry Queue Settings m Target Conferences I Audio Only I IP Only I Encryption C Video Switching Transcoding Continuous Presence Entry Queue Service Se I vTx 1000 r Target Conference Settings AudoAls fawo O VideoFomat fao Frame Rate Auto Video Protoco Auto a F Annex N TT Annex P Telennert Line Rate z I Restricted Dialin Number 1 Diakin Number 2 2 Enter a value in the Numeric ID field The Numeric ID must be identical Cancel in the Auto Cascading Entry Queues of all the MCUs 3 Leave the Ad Hoc check box cleared 4
28. To copy a participant from a Reservation Template 1 2 Open the Reservation Template file or Reservation database In the Reservation Template file double click the Conferences List icon or click the plus icon next to the Conferences List icon to list the Reservation templates In the Reservations in Database window expand the Groups tree to locate the group containing the source Reservation template Double click the Reservation Template icon from which the participant is to be copied or click the plus icon next to the Reservation template A list of participants appears below the Reservations Template Right click the icon of the participant you want to copy and then click Copy or Copy As to copy the participant under another name Delete Del Dial Out Ctri Line Rates gt Link participant Properties The participant s information is copied to the clipboard 8 41 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 5 Inthe MGC Manager s Main window right click the On Going Conference icon and then click Paste Participant or Paste Participant As to add the participant under a different name sa Sales_ To Monitor Monitor Filter New Participant F8 Terminate Del Cop on Paste Participant Paste Participant As Next Questioner Clear Q amp A Lock Conference Voting Print Reservation Data Video Force Drag amp Drop Properties The
29. s Guide Volume II using the H 263 video protocol improving the video quality For Annex definitions see Defining Advanced Media Settings in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 1 Chapter 4 e Polycom ViewStation FX endpoints can receive slides form the ViewStation PC but cannot broadcast slides to ViewStation PC endpoints e Inthe MGC Manager you define the properties of the video conference The properties of the contents transmission are defined internally and cannot be modified by the MGC Manager operator e Annexes N P and F are optional and are additions to the Video Format when Polycom Visual Concert FX The Visual Concert FX VCFX feature enables you to view simultaneous live video and content data presentations using high resolution graphics This feature is available with ViewStation FX endpoints VCFX transmits the video stream in H 263 format and in a high frame rate CIF 30 FPS The data video stream is transmitted at a higher resolution SXGA 1280 x 1024 pixels and at a lower frame rate CIF 15 FPS In a dual video conference with Visual Concert FX settings presentations can be viewed if a Polycom Visual Concert FX box is connected between the ViewStation broadcasting the presentation and the PC used for the data source When a single video monitor is used for the presentation the monitor displays the content and broadcasts the video When a ViewStation endpoint without SXGA capabilities enters the confer
30. vyle fe fag E Accord Official Manuals Backup word Captures_ 4 CJ ADOBEAPP Catalog Numbers Alpha 03 Comet Cl Alpha 17 L Config msi Audio_Bridge Corel J Captures_v3 0 Ci corelpraws Files of type x Cancel A b Select the appropriate audio file of type aca using the standard Windows conventions and then click the Open button The name of the selected file appears in the nstall field in the nstall File dialog box c Inthe Install File dialog box click Yes to download the file to the MCU memory The Done dialog box opens d Click OK to confirm and return to the Welcome Message dialog box The new audio file can now be selected from the list of audio messages In the Welcome Message dialog box click Next 2 29 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services The Conference Chairperson dialog box opens x IV Enable Chairperson Messages Chairperson Identifier Request ENTRYOPT AC Add Message File Request Chairperson Password LEDRPASS AC Add Message File Chairperson Password failure Message LEDRRTRY AC Add Message File Chairperson Identifier Key J Biling Code coct e 10 Select the Enable Chairperson Messages check box to enable a participant to connect to the conference as a chairperson and play the appropriate messages while participants wait in the conference IVR queue If this feature is disabled participants will not be a
31. 1 Terminal Bonding Phone The phone number for Bonding dial out calls Number Bonding is a communication protocol that aggregates from two up to thirty 64 Kbps B channels together to look like one large bandwidth channel Video Rate Relevant only to H 323 participants The video rate in units of bits per second A value of 294967295 denotes auto and in this case the rate is computed by the MCU IP Address Relevant only for an H 323 participant The IP address of the H 323 participant An address of 4294967295 indicates that no IP address was specified for the participant and the gatekeeper is used for routing In all other cases the address overrides the gatekeeper Call Signaling Port Relevant only for an H 323 participant The signaling port A value of 65535 is ignored by MCU MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 24 Event Fields for Events 2010 2101 2105 Reserved Participant Continue 1 Operator Add Participant Continue 1 Operator Update Participant Continue 1 Continued Fc ed E H 323 Participant The alias type as follows Alias Type 8 H 323 ID alias type 7 E164 alias type 11 URL ID alias type 12 Transport ID alias type 13 Email ID alias type 14 Participant number alias type H 323 Participant The H 323 participant alias Alias Name The alias may contain up to 512 characters Table A 25 Event Fields for Event 11 ATM Channel Connected ce ey Participant Name The name o
32. 1 The reservation was established from the web Only relevant for web reservations The user ID of the person making the reservation or 0 if the reservation was not established from the web Only relevant for web reservations The ID of the database from which the reservation was made or 0 if the reservation was not established from the web A 25 Appendix A CDR File Fields A 26 Table A 7 Event Fields for Event 4001 Conference Start Continue 3 ae ee Conf Remarks The remark that was entered in the conference general properties during the reservation stage Maximum 300 characters If no remark was entered this field will be empty Table A 8 Event Fields for Event 5001 Conference Start Continue 4 m ea The Numeric Conference ID Conference Entry The conference entry password Password Chairperson web The chairperson web password Password User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 Billing The contents of the User defined fields for the conference These fields enable operators to enter general information for the conference such as the company name and the contact person s name and telephone number The maximum length of each field is 80 characters The billing code MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 9 Resource Information Fields ne Audio Board ID The slot number of the Audio card handling the participant audio channel or 65535 if there is no audio resou
33. 1 Connect to an MCU and expand its tree 2 Right click the Meeting Rooms amp Entry Queues and SIP Factories icon and then click New Entry Queue Paste As Paste Entry Paste SIP Factory As 3 33 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication The Entry Queue Properties window opens Entry Queue Properties F3 Alpha 02 T Annex T Annex P To Annex F 3 Define the following parameters for Ad Hoc Conferencing Table 3 4 Entry Queue for Ad Hoc Conferencing using a Profile a SS ey Name Enter the name of the Entry Queue using up to 18 characters 3 34 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 3 4 Entry Queue for Ad Hoc Conferencing using a Profile Continued Cn CS eas Numeric ID It is recommended to let the MCU assign the Numeric ID The assignment is done once when the Entry Queue is saved on the MCU To define the Numeric ID manually enter the Numeric ID using the number of digits as configured in the system cfg the range is 0 16 digits The default number of digits is four If the Numeric ID is already in use in another Entry Queue or a conference an error message will be displayed Note e Ifthe MCU is configured to support only automatic assignment of Numeric Conference IDs then this field is disabled and the system automatically assigns a Numeric Conference ID a
34. 4 80 Kbps Select the Line Rate for the conference To achieve better video quality participant video rate is 384 Kbps set the conference Line Rate to T1 384 x 4 1536 Kbps 1 27 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings 10 Define the other Settings parameters as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Vol I Chapter 4 Defining the Settings Parameters Click the Participants tab to add participants to the conference or skip this step for dial in participants Click the Video Sources tab The Conference Properties Video Sources dialog box opens In the Video Layout area select the desired Video Layout in the Video Source dialog box Only two Video Layouts are available for selection 1x2 and 2x2 Conference Properties E xj General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Video Layout Background pa p I Layout Border i I Speaker Notation e E Audio Muted Participants Auto Select Auto Select Y eala Lecture Mode None vi Lecturer name I Timer Interval 15 Sec Auto Select Select Unforced Participants cue oec LS Lecture Mode is disabled in Software CP conferences 11 1 28 Complete the On Going Conference definition and click OK MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Monitoring Software CP Conference Participants The properties of IP participants in an On Going Software CP conference can be view in the
35. ATM alpha 1 weboffice_v2 Zo SE CP conf fail 2B Auto Transcoding z gt p G7221 alpha 21 ia 512kbps Auto Continuous Presence H 323 conf alpha 17 4Ei G7221 alpha 21 384kbps 24 G722 1 5ir Video Switching g H323 cnf alpha 22 SPH 323 conf alpha 17 128kbps 16 G728 5iren7 Video Switching P H323 Lecture Mode AH323 cnf alpha 22 384kbps 56 G722 G711 Video Switching Lecture Show alpha 1 eapHs23 Lecture Mode 384kbps Auto Continuous Presence The Reservation templates in the database are organized in Template Groups Users can only access the Template Groups to which they have the appropriate access rights The access rights are assigned to them by the administrator For more details about the organization of the Reservation templates in Template Groups in the databases and Permissions refer to Defining a New a Reservation Template on page 7 10 and Chapter 6 Assigning Groups to Users on page 6 60 Chapter 7 Database Templates Defining a New a Reservation Template Open the 1 Log in to the database and open the Reservations in Database window R onsi J Aa 2 Inthe left pane Groups Browser area expand the Groups tree double window click the icon of the Template Group to expand until you locate the Template Group to which you want to add the Reservation template Expand the Groups tree and locate the required Group X O T E gt Root ame Linerate Audioalg Video Session
36. Basic F Roll Gal Pro Motion Auto z I Ents Tone tRolCalannouacame aaa M End Time Alert Tone i 3 A v T Eatton a Video Format Auto Frame Rate auto Talk Hold Time 15 4Sec Quality Auto Audio Mix Depth EB 4 Sites Annea IE Annex P M Annex F The operator can manually extend the conference duration For more information see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Chapter 6 Extending a Conference Manually MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Cascading Conferences Cascading enables operators to run two or more conferences as one conference thereby allowing very large conferences The conferences that are part of a cascading conference may be run e On the same MCU to overcome the maximum number of participants per conference 30 participants when using the standard Audio card e On separate MCUs to utilize additional resources or to connect participants to their local MCU The MGC unit supports cascading conferences with the following capabilities e Simple Cascading ISDN Linking of two conferences using an ISDN connection Simple Cascading H 323 Linking of two conferences using an IP address for connection Enhanced Cascading H 323 Linking two conferences using an Alias for the IP connection H 243 and MIH Cascading modes are also available For H 243 Cascading Conferences see Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences Simple Cascading Modes I
37. Cascade and T 120 options are disabled unless you are defining an IP Only Video Switching conference If you use older PictureTel endpoints select People and Content VO in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box not H 239 People Content e In conferences where there are older and newer endpoints use People and Content VO for the conference and set the newer endpoints to use H 239 People Content People and Content VO People and Content V0 is a Polycom proprietary technology used for connecting older PictureTel endpoints and only in Video Switching conferences Select this option only when using older endpoints To select People and Content V0 in a Video Switching conference People and Content V0 is selected in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Gut r General Settings I Restricted r Line Rate 2B ba Msg Service Type None ba Msg Service Name M y eGnPot J Encyption T Silence T VTX 1000 AS T Cont Lock Chair Cortot None ERRE Cascade None z F OnHod Master Name None F Enable Invite T120 Rate None X T Auto Termination FECC LSD Rate None E Before First Join Min After Last Quit 1 Min r Media Settings Audio Alg 16 Siren G728 ba Dual Stream Mode People and Content V0 _ lt lt Basic F Rolcall Pro Motion Auto Visual Concer PE M E
38. Click Save on the Template menu when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation Template file or click Save Database on the Database menu when the Reservation template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar 8 55 Chapter 8 Templates Handling Deleting a Reservation Template If a Reservation template is no longer needed delete it to save disk space To delete a Reservation template from a Reservation Template file or Reservation database 1 Open the Reservation Template file or Reservation database 2 Inthe Reservation Template file window expand the Conferences List icon to list the Reservation templates In the Reservations in Database window expand the Groups tree to locate the desired Reservation template A list of Reservation templates appears below the Conference List or Reservations Group icon 3 Right click the Reservation template icon to delete and then click Delete fel weboffice_v1 i Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Default Attending Print Template Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl Paste Delete Properties A confirmation dialog box is displayed 4 Click Yes to confirm the deletion or No to cancel the operation If you clicked Yes the Reservation template is deleted The Reservation template icon and name are removed from the Reservations list 5 Click Sav
39. Continued a Num Type Relevant for dial out only The type of telephone number as follows 0 Unknown 1 International 2 National 3 Network specific 4 Subscriber 6 Abbreviated 255 Taken from Network Service default Net Sub Service Relevant for dial out only Name An empty string means that MCU selects the default sub service Number of The number of participant phone numbers Participant Phone In a dial in connection the participant phone number is Numbers the CLI Calling Line Identification as identified by the MCU In a dial out connection participant phone numbers are the phone numbers dialed by the MCU for each participant channel Number of MCU The number of MCU phone numbers Phone Numbers In a dial in connection the MCU phone number is the number dialed by the participant to connect to the MCU In a dial out connection the MCU phone number is the MCU CLI number as seen by the participant The MCU phone numbers are entered in the MCU Number field in the Network Service Participant and One or more fields one field for each participant and MCU Phone MCU phone number Numbers The participant phone numbers are listed first followed by the MCU phone numbers A 40 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 23 Event Fields for Events 10 101 105 Reserved Participant Operator Add Participant Operator Update Participant Continued Ee Sees Identification Relevant for dial
40. Disconnection Cause Information Fields Cause Structure Based on Q 931 on page A 33 Table A 27 Event Fields for Event 13 MPI Channel Connected EE Participant Name The name of the participant as in the reservation Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 27 Event Fields for Event 13 MPI Channel Connected Continued ee a Channel ID Connect Initiator Restrict Called Participant Information The channel identifier This is a number assigned to the channel by the system according to the order in which the systems connect The initial channel is always 1 Indicates who initiated the connection as follows 0 MCU 1 Remote participant Any other number Unknown Indicates whether or not the line is restricted as follows 0 Non restricted line 1 Restricted line The called participant information For a description of the fields see Table A 15 Called Participant Information Fields Based on Q 931 on page A 32 Table A 28 Event Fields for Event 14 MPI Channel Disconnected Fc a is Participant Name Participant ID Channel ID Disconnect Initiator The name of the participant as in the reservation The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU The channel identifier This is a number assigned to the channel by the system according to the order in w
41. External DB flags are displayed in the Item Value pane 4 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II In the tem Value pane click the ENABLE EXTERNAL DB_ACCESS item The item s value is placed in the Edit value text box SysConfig system cfg 172 22 188 40 Enki E m Section EXTERNAL DB T 80 EXTERNAL_DB_LOGIN POLYCOM EXTERNAL_DB_PASSWORD POLYCOM EXTERNAL_DB_DIRECTORY Edtvaue NO Make sysenc file In the Edit value text box enter the value YES Click the Set value button Repeat steps 4 to 6 to set the values of the following flags Table 3 1 System cfg values for accessing external database application Flag o Description and Value EXTERNAL_DB_IP The IP address of the external application server EXTERNAL_DB_ The port number used by the MCU to access the PORT external application server For the WebCommander application you must specify 5005 EXTERNAL_DB_ The user name defined in the external database LOGIN application for the MCU For the WebCommander application the default user name is POLYCOM EXTERNAL_DB_ The password associated with the user name PASSWORD defined for the MCU in the external database application For the WebCommander application the default password is POLYCOM 3 21 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication Table 3 1 System cfg values for accessing external database application Fig o Descr
42. External Server You can configure the Entry Queue to use an external database application to verify the participant s right to initiate a new conference This option is used for Ad Hoc conferencing authentication For a detailed description see Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication Select one of the following options to verify the conference Numeric ID and permission to start a new conference e None to disable this option Conference Numeric ID to verify the conference Numeric ID with an external database application 2 54 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 2 12 Entry Queue Global Parameters Continued cee acti Number of User Enter the number of times the participant is able to Input Retries respond to each menu prompt before the participant is disconnected from the IVR system or waits for the operator s assistance Timeout for User Enter the duration in seconds that the system waits for Input input from the participant before it is considered as an input error DTMF Delimiter The interaction between the caller and the system is done via touch tone signals DTMF codes Enter the key that will be used to indicate a DTMF command sent by the participant or the conference chairperson Possible keys are the pound key or star used for Ad Hoc conferencing For a detailed description refer to the MGC The external server configuration that is d
43. If you have selected Yes the Reservation template is removed from the Reservations in Database list Adding a Template Group to the Database 7 44 If you have the appropriate permission you can add groups to the Groups tree in the database directly from the Participants or Reservations template windows This operation is useful when you want to add the a group without accessing the Database Manager Groups option To add a Template Group to the Reservation or Participant database 1 Open the Reservation or Participant database 2 3 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Reservations or Participants in Database window opens IIT O icix D Root Office Reservation LQ Polycom Office Reservation WebOffice Polycom weboffice_v2 WebOffice pres ATM alpha 1 weboffice_v2 Fh FE FE FR EE G of fel Lecture Show alpha 1 abn ies CP conf pam alpha 1 2B Auto iat G7221 alpha 21 ioe conf 512kbps Auto JE H 323 conf alpha 17 jpo alpha 21 384kbps 24 G722 1 Sir Gap H323 cnf alpha 22 fEbr 223 conf alpha17 128kbps 16 G728 Siren7 H ria H323 Lecture Mode prz cnf alpha22 384kbps 56 G722 G711 J H323 Lecture Mode 384kbps Auto Transcoding Continuous Presence Video Switching Video Switching Video Switching Continuous Presence Right click the Group icon to which you want to add a sub group and then click New Group on the pop up menu gt E New Res Template New Res
44. Labels Moderator QW user2 D Permissions weboffice Administrator WebOffice Users gt Groups Data Base Name AccordDB Sys DSN C Progr 4 The system displays in a table format the User Name Permission Access Level Directory Name Entry Password and Chairperson Password as defined for each User Sorting the Users List You can sort the users according to the Name Permission Directory or Password by clicking on the appropriate column heading Assigning Groups to Users Groups are used to increase the system security by allowing users to view reservation and participant data only from groups to which they have access rights Once the Groups are created you can define the access rights of users to each of the existing groups in the Group hierarchy The definition can be done either per group or per user When defining the access rights per user you select the groups that the user will be able to access When defining the access rights per group you select the users who will be able to access a certain group For more details regarding the Groups table and the assignment of access rights to a group see Setting the Access Rights to a Group on page 6 66 6 60 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To assign groups to users l In the Browser area click the User icon to list the currently defined users Right click the icon of the user whose access right you wish to define and then click A
45. MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Operator Conferences 4 An Operator conference is a video conference that allows the operator and one participant to talk without disturbing the On Going Conference The participant taking part in an Operator conference is moved from the Participants Queue or the On Going Conference to the Operator conference Operator conferences may be used for Greet and Guide conferences and IVR enabled conferences For more information about IVR enabled conferences see Chapter 2 For more information about Operator conferences see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume l Chapter 8 Greet and Guide Stages Participants in a Greet and Guide conference can have one of the following statuses Greeting the participant connects to the MCU enters the Welcome queue and receives a video slide and an audio message e Attended the participant is in a video conference with the operator On Hold the participant is moved to the Participants Queue where the video slide is shown and a special audio message is played Usually this is the status of participants that were already attended to by the operator and are waiting to be connected to the conference e Conferencing the participant is connected to the conference In Greet and Guide conferences the operator controls the transition between attended stages You can define a conference in which the transition from the greeting stage to the confer
46. On Going or Template or anew participant the fields display the default values taken from the active Defaults set minimizing the need to define all the parameters and allowing the user to modify specific fields as needed The default sets are defined in the Database Manager module of the MGC Manager or in the WebCommander Server Manager application gi DatabaseManager Version 7 5 0 0 File Edit View Options Help a5 a EB AccordDB Ea Defaults g Conference Defaults U User Defined Defaults Q IMGC Manager Defaults LE Conference Defaults Participant Defaults 4 Participant Defaults U User Defined Defaults MGC Manager Defaults Labels D Permissions amp Users gt Groups There are four categories for which default sets may be defined User Defined Defaults a list of user defined field parameters for conferences and participants Conference Defaults a list of all the conference parameters Participant Defaults a list of all the participant parameters MGC Manager Defaults general system parameters that apply only to the MGC Manager These parameters determine the system behavior in specific events such as saving and linking participants to a conference and updating the start time of a conference 6 37 Chapter 6 Using a Database 6 38 Defining User Defined Defaults To define a user defined default 1 2 Log in to the Database Manager Click on t
47. Operation succeeded 1 Operation failed Failure Code The error code or 0 if no error occurred A 56 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 38 Event Fields for Event 28 SIP Private Extensions PO le Participant Name The name of the participant Participant ID The participant s identification number as assigned by the system Called Participant The called participant ID ID Asserted Identity The identity of the user sending a SIP message as it was verified by authentication Charging Vector A collection of charging information Preferred Identity The identity the user sending the SIP message wishes to be used for the P Asserted Header field that the trusted element will insert Table A 39 Event Fields for Event 100 Operator Terminate Conference ee ie ee Operator Name The login name of the operator who terminated the conference A 57 Appendix A CDR File Fields A 58 Table A 40 Event Fields for Events 102 103 104 Operator Delete Participant Operator Disconnect Participant Operator Reconnect Participant La Co Operator Name The login name of the operator who reconnected the participant to the conference or disconnected or deleted the participant from the conference Participant Name The name of the participant reconnected to the conference or disconnected or deleted from the conference Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU
48. Operator Template Print All Paste Ctrl Paste As Ctrl P The New Group dialog box opens Name Marketing us Note the group will be added immediatly when pressing OK and not when saving the database Cancel Type the group name and then click OK The new Template Group is added to the Groups tree under the selected group 7 45 Chapter 7 Database Templates Refreshing the Database 7 46 When the database is installed on a server and is used by several users or when the Database User Table is open for a long time it is recommended to refresh the database to update the current view It is recommended to save the database before refreshing the database To refresh the database view 1 On the Database menu click Refresh Database DataBase Directory Options Window Save Database Refresh Database F9 Filter Login Open D B Reservation Template Open D B Participant Template Logout amp Clear Login Record Load Defaults From DB Manage databases Database ODBC If the currently opened database window contains items that were not saved to the database a warning message will be displayed indicating that these items will be lost MGC Manager E x A 4ll your changes made to AccordDB1 will be lost Are you sure you want to refresh the database Cancel 2 Click OK to refresh the database unsaved items will be lost or Cancel to abort the op
49. Proceed to configure the Entry Queue as for any other Entry Queue For details see the MGC Manager s User s Guide Volume I Chapter 8 Defining a New Entry Queue MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Monitoring Auto Cascaded Conference Links The links between Auto Cascaded conferences can be monitored in both the MGC Manager and the MGC WebCommander The important links to monitor are the dial out link participants The monitoring is per MCU There is no GUI to display cascaded conferences across multiple MCUs as one conference Figure 3 1 shows an example of monitoring an Auto Cascaded conference in the MGC Manager Name i Status Connection Network Participant Numb Connection Type cascade Alpha 122 1D 31554 i 1 Connected Single Participant JtinkToslave_172 22 188 120_0_01 D gt connected ISDN 4114200 Bee viat out Slcascade Alpha 120 ID 9403 1 Connected Single Participant 1 LinkToMaster _01 Connected ISDN M 200 200 P 11 Bat Dial in Figure 3 1 Monitoring an Auto Cascade conference The Link Participant Names The dial out link participant name will be as follows LinkTo ConferenceType Master Slave _ Target MCU IP _ Primary or Secondary connection 0 1 Link Number 01 99 For example the master conference link to slave3 may be called LinkToSlave_11 11 11 11_0_03 Dial in link participants will have a visual name of the following format after they are mo
50. Summary CDR event code 5 The connection of a participant to the conference For a description of the fields see Table A 18 Event Fields for Event 5 Participant Connected on page A 34 CDR event code 7 The disconnection of a participant from the conference For a description of the fields see Table A 19 Event Fields for Event 7 Participant Disconnected on page A 35 CDR event code 2007 Additional information about a Participant Disconnection event For a description of the fields see Table A 20 Event Fields for Event 2007 Participant Disconnected Continue 1 on page A 36 CDR event code 8 Information about a change in the communication mode made by the participant during the conference For a description of the fields see Table A 21 Event Fields for Event 8 Remote Communication Mode on page A 37 CDR event code 9 A summary of any problems that occurred during the connection of the participant to the conference For a description of the fields see Table A 22 Event Fields for Event 9 Participant Errors Summary on page A 37 Appendix A CDR File Fields A 10 Table A 3 CDR Event Types Continued Reserved Participant Reserved Participant Continue 1 ATM Channel Connected ATM Channel Disconnected MPI Channel Connected MPI Channel Disconnected CDR event code 10 Information about a reserved participant For a description of the fields see Tab
51. The new Entry Queue Service is added to the VR Message Services list MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Connecting to a Conference from an Entry Queue The IVR Service is assigned to specific conferences A different IVR Service can be assigned to each conference or the same IVR Service can be used for all conferences If an IVR Service is assigned to the conference the caller must respond through the touch tone keypad to the voice prompts defined in the IVR Service in order to connect to the conference When the conference is accessed through an Entry Queue and an IVR Service is assigned to the conference the connection to the conference is done in two stages In the first stage the participants connect to the Entry Queue where they are routed to their destination conference according to the conference Numeric ID or password depending on the MCU configuration In the second stage the participant connection to the conference is done from the IVR queue where participants are requested to enter the conference password and the chairperson password when relevant To minimize the number of voice prompts to which the caller has to respond before connecting to the conference it is recommended to exclude from the IVR Service prompts that are part of the Entry Queue Service such as the general Welcome message 2 59 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Assigning an Entry Queue Service to an Entry Queue To enable the
52. Timeout for User Input DTMF Delimiter Demo IVR ENGLISH Z Never gt oma e Define the following parameters Table 2 3 IVR Properties Global IVR Service Name Language for IVR External Server Authentication Mandatory Enter the name of the IVR Message Service Select the language in which the Audio Messages and prompts will be heard Message languages are defined in the IVR Properties dialog box see To define the IVR Properties on page 2 17 You can configure the IVR service to use an external database application such as WebOffice or WebCommander to verify a participant s right to join the conference This option is used for Ad Hoc conferencing authentication Select one of the following options to determine if the system should request authentication from an external server e Never to disable this option The participant s right to join the conference will not be verified with an external database application 2 25 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Table 2 3 IVR Properties Global Continued External Server Always Any participant request to join the Authentication conference will be validated using an external cont database application Upon Request to verify the chairperson password with an external database application The validation process occurs only when the participant enters the chairperson identifier key pound or star All other
53. Volume II Table 2 15 Default IVR Messages Continued Message Type Message Text FileName Roll Call Name Press one to record your name RERECRD ACA recording again or remain on the line to enter confirmation the conference Roll Call has joined the conference JOINED ACA Participan s entry prompt Roll Call has left the conference LEFT ACA Participant s exit prompt Roll Call The conference participants are ROLLCALL ACA Introduction to the participant s list Roll Call End of This is the end of the participants LISTEND ACA Roll Call list list SilencelT Adjust To reduce the noise detection level SLNRDRT ACA SilencelT sensitivity and return to the conference press and unmute three SilencelT To disable noise detection and SLNDNDRT ACA Disable and return to the conference press four unmute SilencelT Your line is muted due to a noisy SLNMUTE ACA SilencelT menu line For available options press nine SilencelT To return to the conference muted SLNRTMUT ACA Return to the press two conference muted SilencelT To unmute and return to the SLNUNMTR ACA Unmute and return conference press one to the conference SilencelT To unmute your line at any time SLNUNMUT ACA Unmute reminder press pound six 2 71 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Table 2 15 Default IVR Messages Continued Message Type Message Text FileName Silenc
54. Yes Guest Relevant only if Operator Participant yes Indicates whether the operator is attending a regular conference as a guest as follows 0 No 1 Yes Table A 48 Event Fields for Event 113 Conference Remarks SSS A Conf Remarks A remark that was entered by the operator in the conference general properties while the conference was ongoing Maximum 300 characters The remark is preceded by the operator name followed by a colon A 65 Appendix A CDR File Fields A 66 Table A 49 Event Fields for Event 3010 User Defined Information a Cc ae User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 The contents of the User defined fields for a participant These fields enable operators to enter general information about the participant such as the participant s e mail address The maximum length of each field is 80 characters Indicates whether the participant is a VIP participant or a standard participant as follows 0 The participant is a standard participant 1 The participant is a VIP participant
55. a a ovo ee ono ie pada unt Gog ork orn cat fb Gio ellen i T Audio Only F vip I Audio Only F vip IV Save Participant Pe aR Help IV Save Participant Ge Help Participant Properties Link In Participant Properties Link Out Table 1 5 summarizes the participant definition options in the Master and Slave conferences based on Figure 1 10 on page page 1 53 Table 1 5 Participant Definition Options Summary Link 1 defined in In conference Slave1 define a dial out participant conference Slave1 Link 1 whose dial out alias is the prefix of the MCU and the master conference name the alias in the example above is 1719MasterConference Link 2 defined in In conference Slave2 define a dial out participant conference Slave2 Link 2 whose dial out alias is the prefix of the MCU and the master conference name the alias in the example above is 1719MasterConference 1 54 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 1 5 Participant Definition Options Summary Continued Link 3 defined in conference Slave3 Slave1 defined in conference MasterConference Slave2 defined in conference MasterConference Slave3 defined in conference MasterConference In conference Slave3 define a dial out participant Link 3 whose dial out alias is the prefix of the MCU and the master conference name the alias in the example above is 1719MasterConference In the Master conference define a dial in participant as th
56. access the Entry Queue where they enter the conference Numeric ID and subsequently they are routed to the appropriate conference Ifan IVR Service MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II is assigned to the conference the participants enter the IVR greeting stage where they have to enter additional information using DTMF codes If no IVR Service was assigned to the conference the participants connect directly to the conference Direct Access In Meet Me Per Conference and Meeting Room conferences Participants simply dial the conference dial in number In this case the participants are not required to enter the conference Numeric ID and or passwords Operator Conferences 4 An Operator conference allows the operator and one participant to talk without disturbing the On Going Conference The participant taking part in an Operator conference is moved out of the Entry Queue IVR queue Participant Queue or the On Going Conference to the Operator conference For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 8 An Operator conference must be active to enable the operator to perform various operations during an IVR enabled On Going Conference and move participants between the different IVR stages Operations Performed Using the IVR Service In IVR enabled conferences various operations can be performed by the operator or the conference chairperson These operations are available only when an IVR Service is assigned t
57. allowing the participants who connect to the conference to hear the messages in their preferred language The language settings are per Service and therefore are the same for a given conference that is all the participants in the same conference or in the same Entry Queue will hear audio messages and prompts in the selected language one language only The IVR Properties function enables you to define the list of languages that will be used in all services While setting the properties for the new service you select the language to be used from the list of languages defined in the Properties function Several IVR Messages can use the same language but only one language can be selected for an IVR Message Service or an Entry Queue Service The Properties function also enables you to select the audio file to be used for each message type for each language and download it to the MCU memory IVR Properties are defined for both IVR Services and Entry Queue Services they are downloaded to the MGC unit and defined for the IVR Message Service For a description of the conversion process refer to the MGC Manager Administrator s Guide Chapter 8 Audio and Video Conversion Tools e MGC Manager is shipped with a default IVR Service and a folder that includes all the voice messages that are required for the default IVR Service If you have installed the default IVR Service during the software installation procedure and do not want to define a
58. default 1 User verification succeeded 2 User verification failed 3 Network provided 255 Unknown Phone Number The telephone number used for dial in Table A 15 Called Participant Information Fields Based on Q 931 ces Number Type The type of number called as follows 0 Unknown default 1 International 2 National 4 Subscriber 6 Abbreviated Number Plan The called number plan as follows 0 Unknown 1 ISDN default 2 Telephony 3 Private Phone Number The telephone number used for dial out A 32 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 16 Event Fields for Event 4 Net Channel Disconnected ce cee Participant Name The participant name as in the reservation Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Channel ID The channel identifier This is a number assigned to the channel by the system according to the order in which the channels connect The initial channel is always 1 Disconnect Indicates who initiated the disconnection as follows Initiator 0 MCU 1 Remote participant Any other number Unknown Q 931 The disconnection cause structure Disconnection For a description of the fields see Table A 17 Cause Structure Disconnection Cause Information Fields Based on Q 931 on page A 33 Table A 17 Disconnection Cause Information Fields Based on Q 931 a er Coding Standard The disconnection cause code stand
59. disconnected from the MCU Enter the Contact Information for the conference This parameters overwrites the User Defined 1 field information in the Profile Participant Authentication PIN Code Participant Information Enter a personal code to be assigned to this user This PIN code is used to find the participant in the WebCommander database Users table in Ad Hoc conferencing when the IVR Service is configured to access the external database for conference entry password or chairperson password authentication Enter general information about the participant The information in this field replaces the information defined in the User Defined 1 field of the Participant properties when connecting to the conference Select whether this user will be set as VIP when connecting to the conference This field overwrites the VIP definition of the Participant properties for this user when connecting to the conference 6 59 Chapter 6 Using a Database 8 Click OK to confirm and add the User to the database Viewing the Users List 1 Inthe Browser area click the User icon The Users list is displayed in the Status area amp DatabaseManager Version 7 5 0 6 j 5 x File Edit View Options Help a AccordDB B Defaults Administrator ACCORD U User Defined Defaults i Administrator admini LE Conference Defaults Operator oper1 14 Participant Defaults Administrator POLYCOM MGC Manager Defaults ce Moderator user1
60. e When the FECC LSD option is enabled the T 120 Rate and Chair Control options are disabled e FECC is available only in H 320 Master Slave Cascading conferences but not with simple cascading e FECC is not available in Double Gateway sessions To enable FECC for a conference The FECC LSD parameters must be set during the reservation stage and cannot be modified once the conference has started 1 Inthe Conference Properties Settings dialog box if the General Settings pane shows only the Basic settings click the Advanced button to display the advanced settings options Default Conference Properties Product Management xl General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Conf Recording p General Settings I Restricted Line Rate 2B X Msg Service Type None z fideo ut N MsgSeviceNam On Pot I Encyption I SiencelT F VTX 1000 AT Chair Control None X Cascade None hd F GnHold Master Name None z e T Enable Invite 1120 Rate x IT Auto Termination FECCALSD Rate None X Before FistJon gt Min N k ae Ha After Last Qui f1 Min Ea Audio Alg 16 Siren7 G728 zl Dual Stream Mode None I lt lt Basic I Rofl Call Pro Mation Jauto o I Entry Tone Roll Call announcement Vien Pearl End TimeAlett Tone 5 Min I Exit Tone Rall Call announcement ceo es puto Frame Rate Auto Talk Hold
61. increasing the quality of the video display Select the Annexes for the Entry Queue if these annexes are used in target conferences Annexes N P and F are enabled only when defining a Video Switching Entry Queue and the Video Protocol is set to H 263 For more details on Annexes see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 1 Chapter 4 Defining Advanced Media Settings 3 39 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication Table 3 4 Entry Queue for Ad Hoc Conferencing using a Profile Continued eS aa Line Rate Select the maximum line rate at which the endpoint will connect to the Entry Queue and the target conference For a Video Switching Entry Queue select the highest line rate common to all participants For Transcoding and Continuous Presence Entry Queues set the line rate to the highest line rate that can be used by the participants in the conference If the target conference is Video Switching the Entry Queue line rate must be the line rate that is set for the target conference to enable the participant to move from the Entry Queue to the target conference Restricted Select this option to enable participants using Restricted lines the Line Rate for each channel is 56 Kbps instead of 64 Kbps to connect to the Entry Queue and be moved to a Video Switching conference set as Restricted lines Service Name Enter the name of the ISDN Network Service or the T1 CAS Network Service to be used by
62. the cascading status of a conference can be viewed in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box If the Master conference is terminated the slave conference is run as a standard conference In such a case the MCU number is changed to 1 and numbers of all the terminals connected to this MCU are updated accordingly MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II H 243 Chair Control Chair Control enables an endpoint to control the conference and other conference participants The endpoint that has control over the conference the chairperson can perform the following operations e Disconnect participants e Video Force select the endpoint to be seen by the other participants Only one participant can be selected This participant is displayed in the top left window In addition the chairperson or any conference participant can video force a certain participant in his her video layout Since the list of participants is displayed to the chairperson only this feature is usually linked to the chairperson The request from the Chair is accepted even if the entire conference is forced to see another party e Terminate the conference These operations are performed by the MCU subsequent to an appropriate request from the chairperson The control over the conference is granted to an endpoint by means of tokens An endpoint sends a chair request to the MCU If no other participant in the conference is holding the chair token the MCU a
63. 00 eececceesseeereeeeneees 6 38 Defining Conference Defaults 20 0 0 eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 40 Defining Participant Defaults 2 0 0 0 eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 6 42 Defining MGC Manager General Defaults 0 0 6 45 Managing the Defaults Sets 0 eeeeseeseceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 6 47 Defining Permissions ccsceessceesceesseeeseeesceeeeneeeneeeeeeenseeensees 6 50 Viewing the Permissions List cesceseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 53 Sorting the Permissions List esescceseeseceeeteeeeeeeeeenees 6 53 Defining a New User s c ci0c nkkediieaenniienninuawndus 6 53 Viewing the Users List ceceseeseeeseceseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeee 6 60 Sorting the Users List eccesesesseesseseceneceeceeeeaeceaeeeeeeenees 6 60 Assigning Groups to USers eceesseececececececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 6 60 CSPOUPS Sec seacendssatessootaceeseasesnadedisae auesdicaecuetecstdedgedtanstacauensaraseeaies 6 63 Defining a New Group cecsccccsssesseeesceeeeeeeteesneeeneeenseees 6 65 Setting the Access Rights to a Group eesceeseeeeeeseeeeeenees 6 66 Defining a New Label oe eceeceeseesceeeeeseeeseeceneeeeseneseeeeeeeeees 6 68 Viewing the Labels List cei eeeeeseesecenseneceeceeeeseeneeeneees 6 69 Sorting the Labels List c ccccccccesesseceeteestecsereeesteeeteeeenes 6 69 Table of Contents Refreshing the Database List 00 eeeeeeceeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeneeeneees 6 70 Refreshing the Database 0
64. 00 Default H Sales gt New Res Template 56 G72 Video S New Res Operator Template Print All Paste As New Group Delete Group The Reservation template is copied to the selected group in the Reservation database Alternatively use the shortcut keys to perform these operations The list of shortcut keys can be found in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 3 Commands Shortcut Keys Converting Participant Templates into the Participant Database Participant templates can be converted into the Participant database by using either of two methods Copying the Participant from the Participant Template file window to the Participants in Database window Dragging and dropping the Participant Template icon from the Participant Template file window to the Participants in Database window To copy a participant from the Participant Template file to the Participants in Database window 1 Open the Participant Template file from which you want to copy the Participant template Log in to the database and open the Participants in Database window In the Participant Template file window right click the icon of the participant to copy and click Copy 8 21 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 4 W Participant Template Filei usr lol x Name ParticipantNumb Network Connecti Channel Aggrega _ F Mosnie Dialin Ga New Participant F8 Dial in Ga Jc C
65. 27 A recording system playback or recording event occurred Note The event code 27 is only applicable to Conference Recorders 28 SIP Private Extensions 100 An operator terminated the conference 101 An operator added a participant to the conference 102 An operator deleted a participant from the conference 103 An operator disconnected a participant 104 An operator reconnected a participant 105 An operator updated the properties of a participant 106 An operator set a new end time 107 An operator moved a participant from the conference to another conference 108 An operator moved a participant to the conference from another conference 109 An operator moved a participant to the Operator conference Attended conference 110 An operator put a participant on hold Attended conference 111 An operator moved the participant back to the conference Attended conference 112 An operator moved an attended participant to the conference 113 An operator added a remark 116 Not used 2001 Conference Start Continue 1 additional information about a Conference Start event 2007 Participant Disconnected Continue 1 additional information about a Participant Disconnected event 2010 Reserved Participant Continue 1 additional information about a reserved participant who was added 2101 Operator Added Participant Continue 1 additional information about a Participant Added event
66. 3108 Operator Move Participant to Conference Continue 2 on page A 64 A 15 Appendix A CDR File Fields Table A 3 CDR Event Types Continued Operator Attend Participant Operator On hold Participant Operator Back to Conference Participant Operator Attend Participant to Conference Conference Remarks CDR event code 109 A participant was moved to an Operator conference For a description of the fields see Table A 42 Event Fields for Events 107 109 Operator Move Participant from Conference Operator Attend Participant on page A 58 CDR event code 110 An operator put a participant on hold during the conference For a description of the fields see Table A 46 Event Fields for Events 110 111 Operator On Hold Participant Operator Back to Conference Participant on page A 64 CDR event code 111 A participant was moved back from an Operator conference to the Home conference For a description of the fields see Table A 46 Event Fields for Events 110 111 Operator On Hold Participant Operator Back to Conference Participant on page A 64 CDR event code 112 A participant was moved to the conference by an operator For a description of the fields see Table A 43 Event Fields for Events 108 112 Operator Move Participant to Conference Attend Participant to Operator Conference on page A 59 CDR event code 113 A remark was added by an operator during the conferenc
67. 43 14 amp _ i p2 02 2004 OUTIL CANY 601 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 7 5 150 3 0 255 1 1 61 1 994 1234 0 0 None 3 1 5 1 3001 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 1 252 312327900 4001 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 week ly 5001 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 255 7 0123 1234 Polycom Sales Targets 10 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 Debbhi e 0 5 255 2 0 323 255 0 255 0 0 1 3 2010 02 02 2004 09 43 i4 ORA 255 5 0 1 4294967295 2887156742 1720 8 3010 02 02 2004 09 43 14 oho 10 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 Duke Knoop 1 0 255 2 0 323 255 0 255 0 0 1 3 2010 02 02 2004 09 43 ia O52 62555 56 0 1 4294967295 2887157031 1720 8 3010 02 02 2004 09 43 14 Oreli 10 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 Lynn 2010 02 02 2004 09 43 i4 LPA A 3010 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0s b0s 10 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 Nadihe 3 2010 02 02 2004 09 43 is 0 2 0 255 3010 02 02 2004 09 43 14 o bo 15 02 02 2004 09 43 16 0 Duke Knoop 16 02 02 2004 09 43 17 0 Lynne 2 1 19 0 fa 0 255 2 0 323 255 0 255 0 0 1 3 55 5 0 1 4294967295 2887156919 1720 8 255 2 0 323 255 0 255 0 0 1 3 3 0 55 5 0 1 4294967295 2887156848 1720 8 2 2 2 o 0 0 128000 TA 172 22 138 155 TA 172 22 Za 02 02 2004 d9 43 17 Lynne E 2007 02 02 2004 09 43 I7 0 0 0 0 17 02 02 2004 09 43 17 0 Duke no 16 02 02 2004 09 43 18 0 Nadin 3 7 02 02 2004 09 43 18 0 Nadine
68. 5 Min After Last Quit 1 Min r Media Settings Audio Alg 16 Siren G728 z Dual Stream Mode Nmn Yd lt lt Basic T Roll Call Pro Motion jw IV Entry Tone Roll Call announcement Video Protocol jo M End Time Alert Tone 5 Min i M Exit Tone Roll Call announcement ceo ome LD z Frame Rate Auto v Talk Hold Time 1 5 Sec Quality Auto 7 Audio Mix Depth B H Stes Aren MAn M Arnek The IVR Service is enabled for this conference 2 51 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services 2 From the Message Service Name list select the name of the IVR Service or leave this field blank if you wish to use a default IVR Service To assign an IVR Service to an Audio Only conference 1 When defining Audio Only conferences in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box in the General Settings pane click the Enable IVR Service check box 2 From the Message Service Name list select the name of the IVR Service or leave this field blank if you wish to use the default IVR Service Default Conference Properties Product Management in al AT m m m m m m m a M a lt l 2 52 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Defining a New Entry Queue Message Service An Entry Queue Message Service is a subset of an IVR Message Service that is used with Entry Queues It includes a set of voice prompts that are used to guide the caller to the appropriate co
69. Audio Rate The conference line rate as follows 0 1B 1 2B 2 3B 3 4B 4 5B 5 6B 6 384 kbps 13 128 kbps 14 192 kbps 15 256 kbps 16 320 kbps 23 512 kbps 24 768 kbps 26 1152 kbps 61 1472 kbps 11 1536 kbps 12 1920 kbps Indicates whether the conference was set to a restricted line rate 56 kbps or normal 64 kbps as follows 27 Restrict 28 Non restrict 255 Auto Indicates which audio algorithm was used to run the conference as follows 255 Auto 19 56 kbps G 711 When using restricted lines 56 kbps and 48 kbps are similar 21 48 kbps G 711 24 56 kbps G 722 If the endpoint does not support G 722 then the conference will use G 711 When using restricted lines 56 kbps and 48 kbps are similar 25 48 kbps G 722 If the endpoint does not support G 722 then the conference will use G 711 29 16 kbps MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 4 Event Fields for Event 1 Conference Start Continued ee ee eee Video Session Video Picture Format CIF Frame Rate QCIF Frame Rate The video session type as follows 1 Video Switching 2 Video Transcoding 3 Continuous Presence 4 Software Continuous Presence 5 Advanced Layouts Relevant only if the video session type is video switching The video picture format as follows 2 4CIF 3 16CIF 4 VGA 5 NTSC 6 SVGA 7 XGA 20 QCIF 21 CIF 255 Auto Relevant only if
70. Defining Participant Properties For a detailed description of the Advanced parameters for T1 CAS interface types see the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 2 Defining Participant Properties g To save the new participant to the database select the Save Participant check box The participant will be linked to the reservation and the parameters will be added to the Database when the new Reservation template is saved to the database The Participant template is automatically assigned to the same group as the Reservation template If the participant is not added to the database the participant will be an embedded participant h Click OK to complete the Participant properties definition The new participant is added to the Conference Participants list of the Reservation template Setting Video Sources 13 Click the Video Sources tab to select the Video Layout for the conference This option is applicable to Continuous Presence conferences and is used to enable the Lecture mode For more details on Lecture Mode MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 10 This dialog box is hidden when defining an Audio Only conference or when Audio Look amp Feel is selected 7 18 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Conference Properties Video Sources dialog box opens Default Conference Properties f Vi 6 Transcodir CC T Puo seea zi In Continuous Presence conferences the Vid
71. DiskShare Configuration DiskShare Configuration SA Display Change the appearance of your desktop such as the b Folder Options Customize the display of files and Folders change file as fronts Add change and manage fonts on your computer Game Controllers Add remove and configure game controller hardware s HP internet Options Configure your Internet display and connection settings Slava Plug in Java Plug in Control Panel Sakeyboard Customize your keyboard settings such as the cursor b mail Microsoft Outlook Profiles B Mouse Customize your mouse settings such as the button conl network Connections Connects to other computers networks and the Intern S NYIDIA nYiew Desktop Manager Configure your NYIDIA nVview Desktop Manager settings e Phone and Modem Options Configure your telephone dialing rules and modem settir power Options Configure energy saving settings for your computer Printers and Faxes Shows installed printers and fax printers and helps you QuickTime Configures QuickTime software and hardware componer 3 Regional and Language Options Customize settings For the display of languages numbet s 6 5 Chapter 6 Using a Database 2 Inthe Control Panel window double click the Administrative Tools option The Administrative Tools window opens File Edit View Favorites Tools Help a Q O P seach gt Folders 5 5 gt KID Address
72. Entry Queue Services gy Optional Modify the DTMF codes assigned to the SilenceIT options in the IVR Message Service For a detailed description see Defining a New IVR Message Service on page 2 24 Select the SilenceIT enabled IVR Message Service in the Conference Properties Settings tab Select the SilenceIT option in the Conference Properties Settings tab For a description of new conference definition refer to the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 If you select an IVR service that is not SilencelT enabled while enabling the SilencelT option the conference will be rejected at the end of the definition process when it is saved on the MCU SilenceIT guidelines SilencelT is supported for Audio Only participants in IVR enabled Audio Only and Video conferences SilencelT is not supported when the participant is moved to the Operator conference Attended status SilencelT is not supported in recording ports SilencelT is not supported in cascading conferences DTMF Enabled Cascading Conferences 2 12 The MCU can send several DTMF codes during cascaded conferences enabling the chairperson to control all the participants in the cascaded conference During a cascaded conference the chairperson can perform the following tasks using DTMF codes Set the chairperson as the conference s exclusive speaker while muting all the other conference participants Terminate the conference Lock or unlock
73. Entry Queue and a Profile must be assigned to the Entry Queue In addition an Entry Queue Service supporting conference Numeric ID and External database authentication if applicable must be assigned to the Entry Queue External Database Application Optional The MCU can work with an external database application to validate the participant s right to start a new conference or to join an existing conference The external database must contain a list of participants with their assigned parameters The Numeric ID entered by the participant is compared against the database If the system finds a match the participant is granted the right to create a new conference In a similar way the conference Entry password or chairperson password is checked against the database and if a match is detected the participant is granted access to the conference MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To work with an external database application the Entry Queue Service and IVR Services must be configured to use the external database application for authentication For more information about configuring IVR Services see IVR Service with Access to the External Database Application on page 3 27 Ad Hoc Conferencing and Conference Access Authentication Scenarios There are several Ad Hoc conferencing and conference access authentication scenarios in which the MCU sends queries to an external database application for authentication In all these sce
74. Groups tree until the desired group is shown Define the user ability to view create or modify reservation and Participant templates Click the Read check box to enable the user to view the templates assigned to the group without modifying them or adding new templates to the group Click the Write check box to enable the user to view add remove and modify templates assigned to the group When checking this option the Read check box is automatically selected Leaving the Read and Write check boxes cleared means that the user will not be able to view modify or create new participant or Reservation templates In the View MCU Conferences list select one of the following options No The user will not be able to view the reservations Meeting Rooms and On Going Conferences assigned to other users of the same group Groups MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II even if the View All options are enabled in the Permissions assigned to this user Enter with Password The user will be able to view Reservations Meeting Rooms and On Going Conferences scheduled by other users assigned to this group if they enter the appropriate password Enter without Password The user will be able to view all Reservations Meeting Rooms and On Going Conferences scheduled by other users assigned to this group without any restrictions 5 Click OK The system returns to the lt User Name gt Group Assignment dialog box and adds the
75. Guide Chapter 3 Defining Network Services The value of the preferred exclusive field for B channel selection the PRF mode as follows 0 None 1 Preferred 2 Exclusive For more details refer to the Q 931 standard MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 13 Event Fields for Event 3 Net Channel Connected Continued ae aaa Calling Participant The calling participant information Information For a description of the fields see Table A 14 Calling Participant Information Fields Based on Q 931 on page A 31 Called Participant The called participant information Information For a description of the fields see Table A 15 Called Participant Information Fields Based on Q 931 on page A 32 Table A 14 Calling Participant Information Fields Based on Q 931 eee Number Type The type of calling number as follows 0 Unknown default 1 International 2 National 4 Subscriber 6 Abbreviated Number Plan The calling number plan as follows 0 Unknown 1 ISDN default 2 Telephony 3 Private Presentation The presentation indicator as follows Indication 0 Presentation allowed default 1 Presentation restricted 2 Number not available 255 Unknown A 31 Appendix A CDR File Fields Table A 14 Calling Participant Information Fields Based on Q 931 Continued LS ee Screening The screening indicator as follows Indication 0 User not screened
76. MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Click the Select Devices button The Choose Restore Devices dialog box opens Choose Restore Destination x Select the file name or backup device to use for the restore operation Backup devices can be created for files that you use frequently C web db tammy updated to V55 a Backup device l z Cancel In the File Name box enter the name and path of the SQL database file Accord SQLDB installed with the MGC Manager application to be restored in the SQL Server Manager The database file is found in the MGC Manager Database folder Alternatively click the Browse button B to select the database file from the file browser One SQL database may be used by both the MGC WebCommander application and the MGC Manager application providing the same database is selected for both applications If the MGC Manager is installed first select the database configured in the MGC Manager ODBC If the WebCommander Server Manager application is installed first select the database configured here as the database for the MGC Manager application In both cases the database may be installed on a network server other than the one used for the Web Server 10 Click OK to confirm 11 The system returns to the Choose Restore Device dialog box displaying the path and name of the database file to be restored Click OK to confirm The system returns to the Restore database
77. On Going Conference e The chairperson cannot connect a new participant e The chairperson cannot reconnect a disconnected participant e Lecture Mode cannot be accessed in Continuous Presence mode 5 25 Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences Withdrawing the Chair Token during a Conference 5 26 During an On Going Conference in which the Chair Control option is enabled the Conference Properties On Going State dialog box displays the name of the participant who currently holds the chair token and acts as the conference chairperson Slave 1 Properties Product Management xj General Scheduler Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Ongoing State Meet Me Per Conf Recording Conference Status r FECC LSD FECC LSD Token Holder I Empty ee J7 One Participant At Most SEW DRE M Not Full iy Bea I Resources Deficiency The name of the IE Down Speed Chair Control we Chair Token Holder participant or Recording fone MCU Name Product Management MCU holding Aude Sauce the Chair token Withdraw Chair Token Alan out 7 i Exclusive Speaker e Danel Content Tok ek Used to ontent Token Holder P Current Cascade Mode pme withdraw the Pe chair token from Withdraw Content Token the endpoint Reftesh Video currently holding it OK Cancel Apply Help The Chair Control box displays the name of the participant holding the chair token If the chair token is currently n
78. Participant s Queue Window H 243 Conferences The MGC unit supports conferences with the following capabilities 1 243 Cascading Enables operators to combine separate conferences into one large conference H 243 Chair Control Allows an endpoint to control the conference using the H 243 Chair Control as described in the standard The chairperson can disconnect participants video force Continuous Presence layouts and terminate the conference Multi Hierachy MIH MIH cascading allows for multiple levels of Master Slave relationships H 243 Cascading Conferences Cascading enables operators to run two or more conferences as one conference The conferences can be run on the same or different MCUs gS For Simple Cascading Conferences see Chapter 1 Simple Cascading Conferences on page 1 35 The Cascading mode enables running very large conferences with more than 30 participants when using the standard Audio card in order to overcome the maximum participant per conference limit The conferences that are part of a Cascading conference may be run On the same MCU to overcome the maximum number of participants per conference 30 participants On separate MCUs to utilize additional resources or connect participants to their local MCU The MGC supports Star H 243 and Multi Hierarchy MIH H 243 Cascading 5 1 Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences Star Cascading H 243 In Star Cascading one conference is connec
79. Participants in Database window expand the Group hierarchy to locate the group from which you want to copy the Participant template In the Participants in Database window click the icon of the Participant template you want to copy and drag it to the target Reservation template icon in the Reservation in Database window The participant is added to the Reservation template as a linked participant MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Adding Participants from another Reservation Template An additional method of adding participants to a Reservation template is to copy the participant information from another Reservation template defined in the same Reservation Template file or Reservation database or in a different Reservation Template file or Reservation database The template you are copying from is the source template The template to which you are copying is the target template To copy a participant from a Reservation Template l Open the Reservation Template file or the Reservation database containing the source Reservation template In the Reservation Template file window double click the Conferences List icon to list the Reservation templates In the Reservations in Database window expand the Groups tree and locate the desired Reservation template Double click the icon of the source Reservation template or click the plus icon next to the source Reservation template icon A list of participants defined in t
80. Reservation templates A Participant template contains all the information required to define a participant in a conference A Participant template is stored in the database or in a Participant Template file The database or a Participant Template file can contain several Participant templates Reservation and Participant Template files are proprietary tools to organize data Data cannot therefore be easily exchanged between external standard databases and the MGC Manager template files Using Microsoft Access or SQL databases to organize the conference and participant data enables the MGC Manager users to easily share data with external applications 7 1 Chapter 7 Database Templates Template files and Reservation and Participant databases can be installed on the LAN server or on the local computer running the MGC Manager Internet users Access the MGC WebCom mander site via Internet Browser MGC Manager Application MGC Manager Application Hosts the MGC Web Server MGC Web Server Manager application MGC WebCommander site MGC Manager Application Internet Server and LAN Database Server optional Figure 7 1 Data Flow Figure 7 1 Data Flow describes the system structure with public databases that are used by all the users In this configuration several operator workstations running the MGC Manager application are connected to one or more MGC units The public databases ar
81. Software CP combines four incoming QCIF streams with a fixed video bitrate from four different participants into one outgoing CIF stream z 4x QCIF 3 2 E o _ 3E se 1x CIF E g EE S5 0 S N e O e o 6c HF k gt o 2 7 NA In Software CP conferences only two types of Video Layout formats are available for selection 2x1 and 2x2 If the conference includes fewer than 5 participants one of the layout windows is disabled Software CP video characteristics are e Video Protocol is set to H 261 CIF frame rate is selected at the conference level Maximum CIF frame rate is 30 FPS the highest possible frame rate for QCIF e Video forcing can be performed in the same manner as in a standard Continuous Presence conference e Participant video muting is available conference enables separate conferences to merge into a single large conference This conference combination provides an added advantage by allowing a mix of IP participants in a Software CP conference and IP and ISDN participants in a CP conference When using this conference format identical Line Rates defined in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box are required for both conferences 5 Cascading between a Software CP conference and a Continuous Presence CP 1 25 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings Defining Software CP Conferences To define a new On Going Software CP conferenc
82. Template file to be converted and then click OK The selected file appears in the Template Name box 7 The Database Name field presents a list of all databases you are entitled to work with according to your database Login Name and Password If more than one database is defined in your system select the appropriate database from the drop down list By default the database to which you are currently connected is selected 8 Inthe Properties Label field select the label that will be assigned to all the templates that will be converted into the database 9 Inthe Properties Group field select the group to which all the templates that will be converted into the database will be assigned The system lists all the Groups to which you have access rights according to your Login Name and Password 10 Click OK The Template file is converted to the database At the end of the conversion process a confirmation message is displayed 11 Click OK to continue Templates are listed in the appropriate database window The new templates can be viewed in the appropriate group of the database refreshing the database Otherwise you will lose all the information e When converting a Reservation template containing participants the participants will be embedded in the Reservation template not linked to it e You must first save the converted templates in the database before Converting Individual Reservation Templates into the Rese
83. User s Guide Volume II 5 Select the destination folder where the conference data file will be stored and click OK The files are saved to the selected location The name of the file is taken from the conference name Files created using the Retrieve function have the extension cdr Files created using the Retrieve Formatted function have the extension cdf When the system has finished processing the file a confirmation message is displayed 6 Click OK 7 To refresh the conference list on the File menu select Refresh The conference icon in the conferences list changes from aie to go to indicate that the conference data was saved Off Line Formatting Unformatted CDR text files that were created using the Retrieve function can be formatted later to create formatted reports To format a retrieved file off line 1 Select Off Line Formatting from the File menu in the CDR window File Connection View Help Preferences Refresh FS Offline Formating 2 Exit A confirmation dialog box opens x A OnOfflineFormat 3 Click OK Chapter 9 Call Detail Record CDR Utility The Open dialog box opens Lookin E Dekt O l e e e My Documents p My Computer My Network Places MCMS Sim Accord domain aje NetApp Release 6 5 1R1P8 Accord Fs File name J Files of type cor Files cdr z Cancel J Open as read only Z A 4 Navigate to the folder containing the
84. User s Guide Volume II LSD4800 YES section CHAIR FECC and the FECC LSD field is set to Dynamic when an endpoint requests the data token at 4800 the FECC LSD rate of the entire conference is set to 4800 The LSD4800 flag is by default set to YES and must be added to the system cfg file before its value can be changed e The FECC LSD 4800 rate must be enabled in the system cfg file to enable encrypted participants to join an FECC enabled conference e If the FECC LSD field is set to 6 4 when an endpoint requests the data token at 4800 the request is rejected by the MCU e Ifthe FECC LSD 4800 rate is enabled in the system cfg flag In a Cascading conference only the FECC LSD 6 4 fixed rate option is available In this type of conference when a participant connected to the slave MCU invokes a request for the data token the slave MCU checks if another participant possesses the data token If yes the request is rejected If no the request is transferred to the master MCU which opens the FECC LSD channel of all the conference participants For more details on scheduling Cascading conferences see Cascading Conferences on page 1 43 or Chapter 5 H 243 Cascading Conferences on page 5 1 Viewing the FECC LSD Conference Properties Once the conference has started and it is set to FECC LSD 6 4 the FECC LSD channel automatically opens If the conference is set to Dynamic the FECC LSD channel opens
85. Video Linked participants are only available in the database and will not appear in the MGC Participant Template file and Reservation Template file Opening a Participant Template File To add modify or delete Participant templates from an existing Participant Template file the appropriate file must first be opened To open a Participant Template file l On the Template menu click Open or click the Open button B on the toolbar The Open dialog box is displayed Use the standard Windows techniques to navigate to the folder containing the Participant Template file 8 7 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 3 Select Participants Files from the Files of Type drop down list The available Participant Template files are displayed in the Open window C rx Look in My Templates aa la Participants 1 a PartyTemplatesFile3 la PartyTemplatesFileS ES PartyTemplatesFile6 la UserTemplatesFile1 mm Files of type Participant Files usr Reservation Files tlt Participant Files usr 4 Select the required Participant Template file and then click the Open button The Participant Template file window opens displaying the list of Participant templates currently defined in the Participant Template file m Participants a TT Name __ Participant Numbers IP Address SIP Address Network Connection Type Channels Aggregati SIP Dial out Banany 122 22 132 116 H323 Dial in
86. and music input from an external device background music You can create a new IVR Message Service when you want to customize audio messages and video slides or when you want to modify the IVR system behavior For example a special IVR Message Service can be set for each supported language or for different conference behaviors Different messages can be created for weekdays and holidays or special announcements Up to 30 IVR Services can be defined for a single MGC unit Defining a New IVR Message Service and video files are prepared and converted into aca format files otherwise you Before you define a new IVR Message Service ensure that the required audio will not be able to list or select them during the definition process To define a new IVR Message Service 1 Connect to the MGC unit MCU 2 Expand the MCU tree and then expand the MCU Configuration tree 3 Right click the VR Msg Services icon and then click New IVR Service gE MCUs Network H yuo Product Management Minor Ba MCU Configuration H ie Cards aa Connections Messages Status Properties Shy mer H wi ATM Operators H Ez Gateway Configuration H T Profiles og Recording Links 2 24 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Global dialog box opens where you can define the general parameters of the IVR Service IVR Service Name Language for IVR External Server Authentication Number of User Input Retries
87. announcing the name of the participant that has left the conference Roll Call can be activated during different conference statuses Conference On Hold A participant who accesses a conference that was placed on hold has to follow the usual connection process and must record their name However when the participant enters the conference on hold their name is not played to the conference Only when the conference is reinstated and the on hold state is revoked the chairperson can request a roll call The list of played names will then include the participants who connected to the conference while it was on hold Admittance During a Roll Call When participants join or leave the conference during an on going Roll Call the corresponding announcement is played immediately thereby interrupting the on going Roll Call When the Roll Call is resumed the name of the participant who left the conference is skipped not played No Other Participants Indication When the chairperson asks for a Roll Call and there are no other MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II participants in the conference at that time the chairperson will hear only his or her name Enabling Roll Call The Roll Call option is available to all conferences to which a Roll Call enabled IVR Service is assigned Roll Call has to be enabled or disabled at the conference level However if the Roll Call option is not enabled in the IVR Message Service it cannot be activated
88. as conference as the chairperson by using only the Conference Password chairperson password instead of two passwords the Conference Entry password and the Chairperson password Note When this option is enabled the chairperson password must be different from the conference entry password Billing Code Select this option to enable the chairperson to enter a code for billing purposes 12 Click Next The Conference Password dialog box opens x IV Enable Password Messages Dialln Request Password Request Password confpass aca v Add Message File C Request Digit CN z Coe R Retry Password confttry aca v Add Message File Dial Out C Request Password Request Digit Request Digit anykey aca v Add Message File None lt Back Next gt Cancel Help 2 31 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services 2 32 13 14 Select the Enable Password Message check box to request the conference password before moving the participant from the conference IVR queue to the conference Select the Dial In and Dial out options You can configure different IVR Service behavior for password requests for dial in and dial out participants When dial in participants connect to the conference via an Entry Queue they are requested to enter the conference Numeric ID or password depending on the MCU configuration so that the system can route them to the destination conference Once moved fro
89. as converting database an error message is displayed 8 23 Chapter 8 Templates Handling Managing MGC and Database Templates The following operations may be performed with templates stored in the database or in template files 8 24 Lg List the participants in a Reservation template Add participants to an existing Reservation template Copy a participant from a Reservation template to an On Going conference Modify a participant s Line Rate Modify a participant s Dial In Dial Out definition Delete a participant from a Reservation template Copy Reservation templates from one file to another or from one database to another Base a Reservation template on another Reservation template Move Reservation templates from one file to another or from one database to another Copy an On Going Conference or a Reservation to a Reservation Template file or the Reservation Database Modify a Reservation template Delete a Reservation template Print the Reservation template information Add a participant from an On Going conference or a Reservation to a Participant Template file or to the Participant database Modify a participant s definition in a Participant Template file or in the Participant database Modify a participant in a Reservation template from linked to embedded and vice versa Delete participants from a Participant Template file In all the above operations multi selection of Participant and or Reservation
90. as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Conference General Parameters 7 27 Chapter 7 Database Templates 7 28 6 Click the Scheduler tab The Conference Properties Scheduler dialog box opens Default Conference Properties RE October 200 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri 25 26 28 2 3 5 10 12 16 17 19 23 24 26 2 7 Define the parameters as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 9 Defining a New Reservation MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 8 Click the Settings tab The Conference Properties Settings dialog box opens Default Conference Properties F GhHold Te Enable Inv J Roll Call 9 Define the parameters as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Conference Settings 7 29 Chapter 7 Database Templates 7 30 10 Click the Participants tab The Conference Properties Participants dialog box opens Default Conference Properties x General Scheduler Settings Participants Pre Defined Participants Conference Participants gt l 2l Search New F Allow Undefined Parties Min Participants E Max Participants fi Pre Defined Participants File ED ebbie MGC data T emplate and MCU files participants usr J Dial Out Manually Browse From database From directory In an Operator Conference only one participant is defined the
91. at the MCU s rear panel It is used to play back music or recorded messages from an external device such as a tape or CD player If both extensions Music and Messages are installed in the MCU background music can be played from the external device while an audio message is played from the Messages Extension When no message is played the system plays the music audio from the external device When the audio massage is played the volume of the background music audio is automatically decreased and then increased again at the end of the audio message Only one music card per MCU can be installed MUX the video slides are downloaded and stored in the MUX memory Up to four slides may be stored in the MUX memory one per Message Service To run Greet and Guide conferences all MUX modules must be compatible with each other LS For more information see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 8 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Greet and Guide Tools The MGC Manager includes tools that allow you to convert the audio and video files into a format recognized by the MCU and send the converted files to the MCU for storage in the memory of the appropriate card For details see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 8 Greet and Guide Settings Workflow Greet and Guide conferences can be set only if the following procedures are completed beforehand During installation the Message extension and the Music card optional are inst
92. box enter a name that will identify the database file in the MGC Manager Database Enter the description of the database optional Click the Select button The Select Database dialog box opens i x Database Name Directories OK imdb c database Cancel Help V Read Only g J Exclusive Accord ccess mdb E c E Program Files AGCM 5 List Files of Type Access Databases rm z cr c Network Select the database file supplied with the MGC Web Server Manager AccordAccess mdb located in the MGC Manager DataBase folder and then click OK Chapter 6 Using a Database application and the MGC Manager application provided the same database is selected for both applications If the MGC Manager is installed first select the database configured in the MGC Manager ODBC If the WebCommander Server Manager application is installed first select the database configured in the MGC WebServer application In both cases the database may be installed on a network server other than the one used for the Web Server In both cases the database must be installed on a disk defined as Shared or on one of the network disks that can be accessed by all MGC Manager and MGC WebCommander users 5 One Access database may be used by both the MGC WebCommander The system returns to the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box displaying the name and path of the selected database file 10 Click OK to retu
93. box enabling the user to save the participant properties to the database When disabled participants defined during conference definition are embedded participants only For more details regarding linked and embedded participants see Chapter 7 Adding Participants to a Reservation Template on page 7 33 Linked Party Message When enabled the system displays a warning message when closing the Properties dialog box of a linked participant without saving the parameters to the database Show Time in DB Conference Templates When enabled the system displays the Schedule tab in the Properties dialog box of a Reservation template defined in the database This enables the user to add the time that the conference should start This option can later be used to filter conferences that start on a specific day Note that the date and time are not used to automatically start the conference from the database template on the scheduled date Show Past Time As Current Time When enabled the system automatically updates the start date and time of an existing conference template to the current date even if the original start date and time are in the past Note that when filtering conferences according to the start date and time the conference retains the past date and time unless it is updated 6 Click OK to confirm the new set 6 46 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Managing the Defaults Sets The MGC Manager applica
94. cfg The system checks the participants resources status again 5 minutes before the end of conference and if a participant is still connected and if resources are available the system adds another 6 minutes to the conference new duration is set to 2 12 1 39 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings This extension procedure is repeated until the maximum allowed duration 2 30 is reached after which the system automatically ends the conference When no participant is connected or when no resources are available to run this On Going conference they are reserved for other conferences the system automatically terminates the conference Setting Auto Extend at the MCU Level 1 40 When you enable the Auto Extend option and define the Auto Extend parameters at the MCU level these settings apply to all the conferences that are run on this MCU To enable the Auto Extend option 1 Connect to the MCU 2 Right click the MCU icon select MCU Utils and the click Edit confer cfg The confer cfg window opens SysConfig confer cfg 172 22 131 11 o x one m Section AUTO_EXTENSION Item Value ENABLE_AUTO_EXTENSION NO MAX_EXTENSION_TIME 30 EXTENSION_TIME_INTERVAL 5 m REMOVE gt Edit value Make sysenc file 3 Inthe Section pane click AUTO _EXTENSION 4 Inthe tem Value pane define the values of the following flags ENABLE AUTO EX
95. conference For example if the conference line rate is set to 6B the participant can be connected at a line rate between 2B to 6B Bonding or H 221 according to the endpoint capability This option is advantageous when the participant s endpoint capabilities are unknown at the time of the conference setup especially when defining a Transcoding or a Continuous Presence conference The Auto Rate Detect option is applicable to defined participants in standard conferences LS This option is not applicable to IP ATM and MPI participants When the Auto Rate Detect feature is enabled MGC Manager automatically identifies the following parameters for incoming calls e H 221 aggregation from 2B to 6B restricted and non restricted using the same CLI number for all channels e Video Protocol H 261 H 263 and H 264 e Bonding from 128 Kbps to 384 Kbps restricted and non restricted Voice Only e CIF QCIF Frame Rate Setting up of automatic line rate detection is done on the participant level for each endpoint during the participant properties setup For a detailed description of the participant definition see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties 1 59 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings To enable Auto Rate Detect During the definition of the participant parameters in the Participant Properties Advanced dialog box select the Auto Detect option Duke ISDN P
96. configuration example in Figure 1 7 on page page 1 49 Link Out IP Properties Identification Advanced Identification Advanced Name Link In IP Link Out IP onnection Type Interface Type efmection Type Interface Type Dialin 7 H323 bd Dial out z H323 hal Participant IP Signaling Port Participant IP Signaling Port 1720 172 22 140 201 1720 Alias Name Alias Type Atie K Alias Type H323 1D fal H323 1D z User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 Loo Oooo E Oooo Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Volume 5 Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Volume 5 fo O Heo T fA ol oe oa oO Too e oo 8 oy itty gine ace rem of T Audio Only F vip T Audio Only F vip OK Cancel Apply Participant Properties Link In Participant Properties Link Out Conference A Conference B If the IP card in the default IP Network Service is full and another IP Network Service is used perform the following steps Define the dial out participant in the second conference manual dial out and complete the conference definition e Check the Participant Properties Advanced to find out the name of the IP Network Service being used Then find out the IP address of the card as defined in the IP Network Service e Define the first conference and the dial in participant Enter the IP address of the card used by
97. defined in the MCU The new conference will be created using the parameters defined in the Profile Automatic Select this check box to immediately accept the Connection conference creator endpoint to the conference If the check box is cleared the endpoint will be redirected to the conference and then connected 4 Click OK The new SIP Factory is added to the list Connecting to the SIP Factory The conference initiator dials the SIP Factory URI and connects to an Ad hoc conference The conference initiator uses REFER to join other participants to the conference 3 42 4 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences This chapter describes the following Greet and Guide features and terms e Operations that can be performed in the Greet and Guide mode e Greet and Guide Statuses describes various participant statuses during a Greet and Guide conference e Greet and Guide Setting workflow describes briefly the steps required to setup and manage Greet and Guide conferences e Step by step instructions for setting up Message Services and Attended conferences e Monitoring Greet and Guide conferences describes the various options for monitoring Greet and Guide conferences e Operations that can be performed during On Going Conferences Greet and Guide tools that are used to prepare audio messages and video slides for the Greet and Guide conferences are described in the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 8
98. flag GW_EPC_H239 YES default Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings To enable the H 329 People Content option at the conference level The H 239 standard is enabled in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box e Inthe Media Settings pane in the Dual Stream Mode list select H 239 People Content Default Conference Properties Product Management E x General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Cont Recording r General Settings I Restricted F Line Rate 2B Bd Msg Service Type None X Vide Gut Msg Service Name Gor e On Port I Encryption I SilencelT F vTx 1000 lt lt Basic T Cont Lock Chair Control None X de Cascade None X Master Name None z 7120 Rate None X JT Auto Termination FECC LSD Rate None Before First Join 5 Min AfterLast Quit T Min m Media Settings Audio Alg 16 Siren G728 z Dual Stream Mode None lt lt Basic F Roll Call ple and Co Pro Motion Auto x Visual Concert PC I Enty Tone Ro Kaa Fap Video Protocol Auto X F End Time Alert Torie Jr E gt M Exit Tone Roll Call announcement idee Tomat E ue im Frame Rate Auto Talk Hold Time 15 4Sec Quality Auto z Audio Mix Depth bo 4 Sites F Annex P AnnexP 7 Annex When selecting this option the Chair Control
99. from the conference after hearing the disconnection message 23 Select the various audio messages to be played when the participant requests or is waiting for operator s assistance or when the participant fails to enter the correct conference password If the files were not downloaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you want to add new audio files click Add Message File to download the appropriate audio file to the MGC unit s memory For the downloading procedure see step 8 on page 2 29 2 39 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Table 2 8 IVR Properties Operator Assistance Messages Operator Select the audio file to be played to the participant Assistance when Indication The participant requested help Message The participant entered an incorrect conference password The On Hold for Operator Assistance option is selected in the VR Welcome Message dialog box Disconnection If the Enable Operator Assistance on Password Failure Message option is disabled select the audio file to be played when the participant enters an incorrect password and is to be disconnected from the conference 24 Click Next The Roll Call dialog box opens Roll Call x IV Enable Roll Call Roll Call Record namercrd aca Roll Call Verity Record rerecrd aca Roll Call Confirm Record nameis aca Roll Call Enter to Conference joined aca Roll Call Exit from Conference left aca Roll Call Start Name
100. group to the list of groups to which the user has access rights 6 Add additional groups or click the Close button to complete the assignment procedure The User Tables Participants and Reservations Tables are organized in Groups The Groups increase the system security as they limit the access to conferences and participant data to authorized users only The Groups are part of the administrative tables Participants Table Participant Template 1 Group 1 Participant Template 2 Participant Template 3 Participant Template 4 Group 2 Participant Template 5 Participant Template 6 Participant Template 7 Participant Template 8 Root Group 3 Participant Template 9 Figure 6 3 Participants Table organized in Groups 6 63 Chapter 6 Using a Database Reservations Table Reservation Template 1 Reservation Template 2 Reservation Template 3 Reservation Template 4 Reservation Template 5 Reservation Template 6 Reservation Template 7 Root Group 3 Reservation Template 8 Reservation Template 9 Reservation Template 10 Figure 6 4 Reservations Table organized in Groups In the Groups table you define the various groups and their hierarchy Users are assigned access rights to specific groups and can add or modify Participant or Reservation templates only in their assigned groups One user may be assigned to many groups and one group may be assigned many users
101. has one participant who acts as a link to the Master conference When the participants connect to the conference the MCU assigns a terminal number to each of the participants The number is composed of the conference number and a sequential number between 1 and 199 Ina Cascading conference the Master conference is always numbered as 1 while the Slave conference is assigned a number greater than 1 For example in Star Cascading on page 5 2 the Conference B is assigned the number 1 and Conference A Conference C and Conference D are assigned a number between 2 and 4 according to the order in which the Slave conferences connect to Master conference The first participant who connects to the home conference is numbered as 1 the second as 2 etc The MCU assigns numbers to all the terminals even audio only terminals If the endpoint supports H 243 it can also be identified by a name The participant who acts as a link between the Master conference and a Slave conference is identified as the link and is always numbered as 0 5 3 Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences Multi Hierarchy MIH Cascading H 243 The H 243 Multi Hierarchy cascading is similar to H 243 Star Cascading However instead of being limited to two levels a Master and multiple Slaves MIH cascading allows for multiple levels of Master Slave relationships Below is an example of a multi hierarchy configuration Participant link Participant link
102. icon and click Add New User to DB pwm Add New User to dB The User Properties dialog box opens User Properties x Name I Password Confirm Password poo Permission Administrator Email Address WebDffice URL J Custom MCU Select MOUs MCUs per User Creation amp Authentication gt gt Corcel _ 2 Define the following parameters Table 6 5 User Properties Options ee Enter the name of the user Password Enter the password to be used by the user when accessing the MGC Manager Database Manager module 6 54 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 6 5 User Properties Options Continued e e Confirm Password Type the identical string entered in the Password field to confirm the password If a mistake is made typing the password string a Wrong Password confirmation error message will appear Permission Select the Permissions access rights type for the user from the drop down list The permission type is defined in the Permissions table It defines the modules the user can access and the functions s he can perform Email Address If the email option is enabled in the permissions selected for the user enter the user s email address This address will be used to notify a user when a reservation is scheduled This is for the WebCommander only WebOffice URL The web site or destination address of WebOffice MCU per User The system ad
103. in Q amp A ask your question queue announcement grant permission to ask General Recording The conference is being recorded RCRDCONF ACA indication General Recording The conference recording has RCRDFAIL ACA failure indication failed General The available touch tone keypad LDRHP1A ACA Chairperson Help actions are as follows Menu1 e To exit this menu press any key e To request private assistance press star zero To request operator s assistance for the conference press zero zero To mute your line press star six To unmute your line press pound six MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 2 15 Default IVR Messages Continued Message Type Message Text FileName General The available touch tone keypad LDRHP2 ACA Chairperson Help actions are as follows Menu2 To lock the conference to dial in continuation participants press star seven To unlock the conference press pound seven To increase your volume press star nine To decrease your volume press pound nine To mute all participants except yourself press star five General The available touch tone keypad PRTCHP ACA Participant Help actions are as follows Menu e To exit this menu press any key To request private assistance press star zero To mute your line press star six To unmute your line press pound six To increase your volume press star nine To decreas
104. in one of the following ways e Creating a new Reservation template directly in the Reservation Template file Copying a Reservation template from another Reservation Template file e Moving a Reservation template from another Reservation Template file To create a Reservation Template directly in a Reservation Template File The MGC Manager does not need to be connected to an MCU when you add a Reservation template to the Reservation Template file 1 Open the target Reservation Template file To open an existing Reservation Template file refer to Opening a Reservation Template File on page 8 16 2 Right click the Conferences List icon in the Reservation Template file window and then click New Res Template E ResTemplatesFile2 5 x New Res Template New Res Operator Template MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Conference Properties General dialog box opens Default Conference Properties F x General Settings Participants Video Sources Meet Me Per Cont Recording Name Conf Entry Password Duration 2 00 5 Web Chairperson Password Billing Numeric ID User Defined 1 J Entry Queue Access User Defined 2 V Meet Me Per Conf User Defined 3 Conference Type p Media r Supported Network p Video Session Standard C Audio wile Video Switching C Meeting Room Video Audio IP ISDN C Transcoding ATM MPI Operator
105. in only Method The identification method as follows 0 Password 1 Called phone number 2 Calling phone number Meet Me Method Relevant for dial in only The meet me per method as follows 1 Meet me per MCU Conference 3 Meet me per participant 4 Meet me per channel Table A 24 Event Fields for Events 2010 2101 2105 Reserved Participant Continue 1 Operator Add Participant Continue 1 Operator Update Participant Continue 1 eee i ae Interface Type The type of interface between the participant and the MCU as follows 0 ISDN 1 ATM 2 H 323 3 MPI H 243 Password The H 243 password or an empty string if there is no password Chair Not in use Always contains the value 0 Video Protocol The video protocol used by the participant as follows 1 H 261 only 2 H 263 3 H 26L 4 H 264 255 Auto A 41 Appendix A CDR File Fields A 42 Table A 24 Event Fields for Events 2010 2101 2105 Reserved Participant Continue 1 Operator Add Participant Continue 1 Operator Update Participant Continue 1 Continued ele Audio Volume The broadcasting volume assigned to the participant The value is between 1 lowest and 10 loudest The default value of the broadcasting volume upon participant connection is 5 Each unit movement increases or decreases the volume by 3 MHz Undefined Type Not supported The default value 0 is always returned Node Type The node type as follows 0 MCU
106. make your task easier you first define a Reservation template for one conference for example the sales managerial staff meetings Next you copy the Reservation template and make whatever modifications you need to for the second conference general meetings To create a Reservation Template similar to an existing Reservation Template 1 Open the Reservation Template file or Reservation database 2 Inthe Reservation Template file window expand the Conferences List icon to list the Reservation templates In the Reservations in Database window expand the Groups tree to locate the desired Reservation template 3 Right click the icon of the Reservation template you want to copy and then click Copy As jah weboffice_v1 Start Immediately Start New Participant Default Attending Print Template Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Paste As Ctrl P Delete Del Properties The Conference Properties dialog box opens 4 Click the General tab 8 49 Chapter 8 Templates Handling The Conference Properties General dialog box opens 5 Type the name of the new Reservation template Make any other changes that are required for the new Reservation template 6 When all the modifications have been made click OK in the Conference Properties dialog box The new Reservation template is added to the list of Reservation templates below the Conferences List or Reservation Group icon 7 Cl
107. on the system the participant is disconnected from the MCU Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication 3 10 If there is a match the participant is granted the right to join the conference In addition the external database application sends to the MCU the following parameters Participant name visual name Whether or not the participant is the conference chairperson Whether or not the participant state is VIP Participant Information such as the participant E mail These fields correspond to the User Defined 1 2 3 and 4 fields in the participant Properties dialog box If the IVR Service is configured to prompt for the chairperson identifier and password the participant is requested to enter the chairperson identifier If no identifier is entered the participant connects as a standard undefined participant If the chairperson identifier is entered the participant is requested to enter the chairperson password In this flow the chairperson password is not validated with the external database application only with the MCU If the correct chairperson password is entered the participant is connected to the conference as its chairperson If the wrong password is entered and the Operator s Assistance option is enabled the participant is moved to the Participants Queue for assistance If there is no active Operator conference running on the MCU the participant cannot be assisted and he she cann
108. on the MCU where LS it is stored To use the Profile parameters on a different MCU Copy and Paste the Profile into the desired MCU To modify the Profile Properties 1 Right click the Profile icon and then click Properties ily Polycom Sales Start Immediately Start At New Participant F8 Copy Profile aste Participant Gerit 5 rticipant 4s Gtri P Delete Del Print Profile 2 Properties l The Profile Conference Properties General dialog box opens 2 Modify the Profile parameters You may also add participants to the Profile 3 Click OK to save the changes and exit the Profile definition Adding a Recording Port to a Profile When defining a Profile that should be used to launch a conference with a recording port to record the conference audio channel using the Prairie system you must add an Audio Only participant whose Recording option is set to dial up For more details on how to define a recording port see the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 8 Defining a Recording Port Participant 3 32 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue To enable Ad Hoc conferencing configure the Entry Queue to support Ad Hoc conferencing and assign the appropriate Profile and Entry Queue Service to it The Profile and Entry Queue Service must be defined prior to the definition of the Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue conference To define an Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue
109. operator the operator cannot monitor participants but can terminate the conference Note The conference can be secured and unsecured by the chairperson via DTMF codes For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Chapter 6 Secure OFF Indicates that the conference status has reverted from a Secure conference to a normal conference This message is played to the conference when the chairperson cancels the Secure mode Requires Indicates that a chairperson is required to start the Chairperson conference This message is played when participants join the conference before the chairperson Note This message is played only when the Start Conference Requires Chairperson option is selected in the conference Properties Settings dialog box First to Join the Informs that the participant is the first person to join Conference the conference Conference Locked Indicates that the conference is locked This message is played to participants who attempt to join a locked conference informing them that they cannot join Mute All ON Indicates that all participants are muted This message is played to the conference to inform all participants that they are muted with the exception of the conference speaker Note This message is played only when the Mute All Except Me Exclusive Speaker option is activated 2 35 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services 2 36 Table 2 7 IVR Properties General Voice Messages
110. option to enable a conference specific Welcome Message message When cleared no message is played when the participant enters the conference If you have enabled the conference specific message select the message the participant will hear when connecting to the conference The list includes all the audio files that were downloaded to the MGC unit s memory for this Message type If you have not downloaded the audio files prior to the definition of the IVR Service click the Add Message File to download the audio file now For instructions see step 8 on page 2 29 On Hold for When you select this option participants are Operator automatically placed on hold when connecting and Assistance wait for the operator to move them to the destination conference While on hold participants hear background music if this feature is enabled and view the Welcome slide in video conferences only Note Selecting this option results in the Attended status where the operator s assistance is necessary to connect participants to conferences 2 28 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To download an audio file for an IVR message click Add Message File The Install File dialog box opens Install File Prod Mgmt 172 22 138 116 EN ay a bti Install fI Browse Proceed w a Click the Browse button to select the audio file aca to download The Select Source File dialog box opens Look in amp Local Disk C
111. participants to connect to the conference exactly as it is defined in the Network Services list the system is case sensitive Dial in number Enter the first dial in number to be assigned to the 1 Entry Queue This number must be part of the dial in numbers range defined for the selected ISDN Network Service or the T1 CAS Network Service For more details regarding the dial in numbers range see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 3 Note When connecting ISDN lines via a private PBX to the MCU the PBX may truncate the dialed numbers In that case the dial in numbers defined in the ISDN Network Service may include only part of the dialed string The operator must add the truncated digits to the dial in number conveyed to the participant Dial in number Enter the second dial in number to be assigned to the 2 Entry Queue This number is optional 3 40 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II SIP Factories The SIP Factory is a conferencing entity that enables SIP endpoints to create an arbitrary number of ad hoc conferences and automatically connect to the new conferences When a SIP endpoint calls the SIP Factory URI and the call is established successfully a new conference is automatically created and the endpoint joins the conference All other participants are invited to the conference using the SIP REFER method The conference automatically ends when the conference creator leaves the conference The SIP Factory UR
112. so that the cascaded conferences will have the same properties MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To use the Auto Cascade feature the system cfg flag QUICK_LOGIN_VIA_ENTRY_QUEUE must be set to NO on all MCUs that is the Conference Numeric ID routing mode must be used This flag is located in the GREET AND GUIDE IVR section of the system cfg file Implementation of Chairperson features The following chairperson actions are implemented across the MCUs Voting e Question and Answer e Replay Roll Call e Change Password e Operator Assistance The following chairperson DTMF actions are implemented across the MCUs e Mute all but me Terminate the conference e Place the conference on hold and release the conference from being placed on hold e Lock and unlock the conference Secure the conference and release a secured conference e Wait for the Chairperson Chairperson Conference Activation If chairperson activation is enabled in the Auto Cascade configuration in the MGC WebCommander Server Manager then the cascaded conference may implement the Start only when the chairperson connects and Terminate conference after the chairperson exits features provided these options are selected in the individual conferences If the Start only when the chairperson connects option is implemented participants in all conferences will be placed on hold until a chairperson joins one of the conferences If the
113. source is only visible to you and can only be used on the current machine Cancel Apply Help 6 22 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 3 Click the System DSN tab ODBC Data Source Administrator ccordUpdateDB Microsoft Access Driver mdb 4 Click the Add button The Create New Data Source dialog box opens Create New Data Source Microsoft FoxPro VFP Driver dbf Microsoft ODBC for Oracle Microsoft Paradox Driver db Microsoft Paradox Treiber db Microsoft Text Driver txt csv Microsoft Text Treiber txt csv Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver Microsoft Visual FoxPro Treiber Doen 6 23 Chapter 6 Using a Database 5 In the database type list Select SQL Server and then click Finish The Create a New Data Source to SOL Server window opens Create a New Data Source to SQL Server MGC WEB SERVER M 6 Inthe Name box enter a name that will identify the database file in the MGC Web Server Manager application 7 Inthe SQL Server drop down list select Local if the SQL Server is installed in the same computer as the MGC Web Manager application Otherwise select the server name from the drop down list 8 Click Next to continue Create a New Data Source to SQL Server Loain ID Password seak neeo J cee Hee _ 6 24 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 9 Keep the default settings as shown i
114. templates is available using the standard Windows techniques MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Il Listing the Participants in a Reservation Template It is possible to view the list of participants assigned to a Reservation template stored in a Reservation Template file or in the Reservation database To list the participants in a Reservations Template in a Reservation Template file 1 Open the Reservation Template file 2 Inthe Reservation Template file window double click the Conferences List icon or click the plus icon next to the Conferences List icon A list of Reservation templates appears below the Conferences List icon 3 Double click the icon of the Reservation template whose participants you want to list or click the plus icon next to the Reservation Template icon A list of the participants assigned to the Reservation template appears below its icon The participants are identified by their names Mi ResTemplates video audio and operator confs t loj x H Conferences List D ta i sip Polycom Audio Conference Ta Polycom Operator Conference ad 4 as i sE Polycom Video Conference 8 25 Chapter 8 Templates Handling To list the participants in a Reservation Template in the Reservation database 1 Open the Reservation database 2 Inthe Reservations in Database window expand the Groups tree until you locate the group in which the desired Reservation template is stored 3 Expa
115. the Audio card as configured in the system cfg file The number of audio files in each duration category that are currently stored on the Audio card I R Messages Status x Download Status Ok Message Type Message Name Status 32 Sec LDRHLP1A ACA Downloaded 32 Sec LDRHLP2 ACA Downloaded 32 Sec PRTCPHLP ACA Downloaded 32 Sec INVITHLP ACA Downloaded 32 Sec VOTEHLP ACA Downloaded 16 Sec PINCHANG ACA Downloaded 8 Sec OPERHELP ACA Downloaded 8 Sec CONFPASS ACA Downloaded 8 Sec ENTRYOPT ACA Downloaded 8 Sec LEDRPASS ACA Downloaded 8 Sec RERECRD ACA Downloaded 8 Sec BILLING ACA Downloaded 8 Sec NEWPIN ACA Downloaded 8 Sec NEWCHAIR ACA Downloaded 8 Sec NEWCNFRM ACA Downloaded x gt m Messages Occupancy 2 Sec 4Sec 4 Click the Close button to exit the dialog box 2 62 Maximum number of audio messages for each category Currently stored files MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Printing IVR DTMF Codes You can print the list of operations and their corresponding DTMF codes defined in the IVR Message Service Data can be sent to a printer saved to a file or copied to a clipboard The printed list includes the operation the keys that are required to activate the function and the type of permission for this operation chairperson only or everyone To print the list of DTMF codes 1 2 Expand the IVR Message Services list Right click
116. the Browse button to select the audio file aca to download The Select Source File dialog box opens LT zx Look in Local Disk C z e ec Ea Accord Official Manuals Backup word Q Captures_V4 ADOBEAPP Catalog Numbers Alpha 03 CU Comet C Alpha 17 C Config Msi Audio_Bridge C corel C Captures v3 0 Cicoreibraws x File name Files of type X Cancel 4 12 Select the appropriate audio file of type aca using the standard Windows conventions and then click the Open button The name of the selected file appears in the nstall field in the Install File dialog box 2 22 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Inthe nstall File dialog box click Yes to download the file to the MCU memory The system returns to the Add Message File dialog box Repeat steps 10 to 13 for each additional audio message to be downloaded to the MCU for the same message type Repeat steps 8 to 14 for each additional category and message type for which audio files are to be downloaded Once all the audio files are downloaded to the MCU close the Add Message File dialog box and return to the VR Properties dialog box In the VR Properties dialog box click OK 2 23 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Setting IVR Message Services The MGC system is shipped with a default IVR Service and audio files An IVR Message Service contains the audio message set for the menu driven scripts
117. the Participant database is displayed in the Pre Defined Participants File field The list of participants defined in the Participant Template file or in the current group of the Participant database is displayed in the Pre Defined Participants list 5 To add a participant from a different database or to select the database when the Participant Template file is active click the From Database button 8 32 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Open Parties in Database dialog box opens xi Database Name AccordDB 7 Filter Name M Labet None 7 Group gt a Ifmore than one database is configured in your system select the appropriate database from the Database Name list b Ifrequired filter the list of participants by clicking the Name and or Label check boxes and then entering the appropriate character string in the Name field and or selecting the appropriate label from the drop down list c The Template Group option is enabled by default displaying the highest Template group in the Groups hierarchy to which the logged in user has access rights You can select another group from the Template Groups hierarchy from the drop down list Only Template Groups to which you have access rights are listed in the Group drop down list d Click OK A list of all the participants in the filtered category is displayed in the Pre Defined Participants list and the name of the participant s group is displ
118. the SQL Database In this step the SQL database supplied with the MGC Manager application is restored and configured in the SQL Server application To restore and configure the SQL database l On the Start Programs menu click Microsoft SQL Server and then click Enterprise Manager a Windows Update KILL opersrvv4_5S Internet Explorer y Documents E Outlook Express E C Administrative Tools gt amp Settings gt k z erver G Enterprise Manager X Search gt 3 MGC Web Manager ver 7 0 gt MGC Manager ver 7 0 Help A MGC Manager ver 6 0 y M ows 2000 Server HK Wind e 3 The SOL Server Enterprise Manager window opens Click the plus icon next to the Microsoft SQL Server to expand the list Click the plus icon next to the SQL Server Group to expand the list Click the plus icon next to the lt PC Name gt to expand the list 6 11 Chapter 6 Using a Database 5 Right click the Database folder icon and then click All Tasks Restore Database from the pop up menu i SQL Server Enterprise Manager Console Root Microsoft SQL Servers SQL Server Group F3 WEB SER ER SQL2000 TARAA w hofman 5 hofman4 0 u SVTLoad2000 TalP 46 Backup number OF 6 Inthe Restore as database box enter a name to identify the database 7 Make sure that the From device radio button is selected 6 12 gy
119. the conference Secure a conference and release a secured conference Place the conference on hold MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II If the chairperson uses any other DTMF codes only the participants in the chairperson s local conference will be affected With DTMF enabled cascading MCUs can be networked together in two modes e MCU Cluster MCU Rollover For more information on these modes see Cascading Conferences on page 1 43 For a detailed description of H 243 Cascading conferences see Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences on page 5 1 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication gy The MCU can work with an external database application to validate the participant s right to start a new conference or to join an existing conference The external database contains a list of participants users with their assigned parameters The Numeric ID entered by the participant is compared against the database If the system finds a match the participant is granted the permission to start a new conference In a similar way the conference Entry password or chairperson password is checked against the database and if a match is found the participant access to the conference is granted To work with an external database application the Entry Queue and IVR Services must be configured to use the external database application for authentication For Ad Hoc conferencing the MCU has to be configured with the Nume
120. the icon of the IVR Message Service whose DTMF codes are to be printed and then click Print IVR Data aa IVR Msg Services v Set As Default Delete Del Co The Print dialog box opens i xi Name Of Operator Report To File Printer ClipBoard Cancel In the Name Of Operator field enter the name of the operator who initiated the report optional From the Report To options select the destination to which the codes data is to be sent File To save the list of DTMF codes to a text file Printer To print the list of DTMF codes to the default printer Clipboard To copy the list of DTMF codes to the clipboard for use by other applications 2 63 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services 5 Click OK If you select the Report To File option a browser dialog box opens 6 Enter the file name select the destination directory and then click Save In the sample text file of DTMF codes the first column lists the function to be performed the DTMF name the second column lists the DTMF string to be used and the third column lists the required permission Wj IYR60 I R txt Notepad F 0 x File Edit Format Help DTMF string Permission Request private assistance Everyone Request assistance for conference Chairperson Mute my line Everyone unmute my i Everyone Lock conference Chairperson Unlock conference Chairperson Secure Conference Chairperson Unsecure Conference Chairperson Incr
121. the list This option is useful if you want to define a new Message Service and you have exceeded the four allowed Message Services or if you want to replace an existing Message Service To delete a Message Service from the AV Message Service list 1 View the AV Message Services as described in Listing the AV Message Services on page 4 10 2 Right click the icon of the AV Message Service and then click Delete a Polycom Set As Default Properties A confirmation message appears 3 Click Yes to confirm or No to cancel the operation 4 13 Chapter 4 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences Defining an Attended Wait or Welcome No Wait Conference There are two types of Greet and Guide conferences Attended Wait and Welcome No Wait 4 14 In an Attended Wait conference upon connection to the MCU the participant enters the Greeting stage In this stage the participants are transferred to the Participants Queue where they view the video slide and hear the audio message The welcome video slide and audio message are defined in the AV Message Service assigned to the conference The participants stay in the Participants Queue until the operator transfers them to the Operator conference for assistance From the Operator conference the participant may be transferred directly to the conference or put on hold until all other participants in the conference have been assisted In a Welco
122. the participant will be added as a linked participant In all other cases the participant will be added as an embedded participant 8 Click Save from the Template menu when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation Template file or click Save Database from the Database menu when the Reservation template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar 8 38 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Adding a Participant from an On Going Conference or a Reservation to a Reservation Template An additional method of adding participants to a Reservation template is by copying the participant information from an On Going Conference or a Reservation to the Reservation template l In the MGC Manager Main window in the Browser area expand the On Going Conferences or Reservations tree to list the On Going Conferences or Reservations Double click the On Going Conference icon or the Reservation icon or click the plus icon next the respective icon to list its assigned participants Right click the icon of the participant to copy and then click Copy Participant 2 mm Disconnect Participant Ctrl T Move Participan Copy Participant Ctrl C cul 5 Delete Del Exclusive Speaker Q amp A Management d Mute Audio Ctrl M Mute video Block Audio Turn OFF AGC Properties The Participant Properties are copied to the clipboard Open the Rese
123. to Database Templates 8 18 If you are upgrading an existing installation you may have several Reservation and Participant Template files in your system Convert these files to the new database structure to be able to share templates with the WebCommander application You can convert Participant or Reservation Template files or individual templates to the new database structure To convert an existing Template file to the new database format l 2 Log in to the User Tables database Open the required table either Participant or Reservation For more details see Chapter 7 Logging into the User Tables of the Database on page 7 3 Open the appropriate Template file either Participant or Reservation according to the table opened in step 2 On the Template menu click Convert Into Database The Convert Template into Database dialog box opens Convert Template into Database E xj Template Name Browse Database Name AccordDB X Properties Label None Group Root X Cancel In the Template Name field enter the name of the Template file and path if needed to be converted or click the Browse button to select the Template file If you click the Browse button the Open dialog box appears MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II By default the File Type is set tlt Reservation template files If required select usr to open the list of Participant Template files 6 Select the
124. via touch tone signals DTMF codes Enter the key that will be used to indicate a DTMF command sent by the participant or the conference chairperson Possible keys are the pound key or star 6 Click Next The Welcome Message dialog box opens Welcome Message 3 x IV Enable Welcome Messages General Welcome Message NWELCMPNS ACE 7 Add Message File IV On hold for Operator Assistance lt Back Cancel Help To set the Entry Queue to Attended mode select the On Hold for Operator Assistance check box All participants connecting to this Entry Queue will be automatically placed in the participants Queue where they wait for the operator to connect them to the conference 3 24 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II This dialog box contains a limited set of options that are identical to those defined in the VR Welcome Message dialog box If the Entry Queue Service will be used in conjunction with an IVR Service and the conference is set to Entry Queue Access forcing participants to go through both queues when connecting to the conference the participant will hear the Welcome message twice once in the Entry Queue and the second time in the IVR queue In such a case you may select the Welcome Message in the Entry Queue Service and disable it in the IVR Service 7 Define the appropriate parameters For a detailed description of the parameters see Table 2 4 on page 2 28 8 Click Next The Co
125. which the participant is to be added is not open open it now 5 Inthe Reservation Template file window double click the Conferences List icon or click the plus icon next to the Conferences List icon to display the Reservation templates list In the Reservations in Database window expand the Groups icon until the desired group is located 8 35 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 8 36 6 Right click the icon of the Reservation template icon to add the participant and then click Paste Ja weboffice_v1 zi Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Default Attending Print Template Cut Ctrl x Properties The participant is added to the Reservation template The participant icon appears in the Reservation template s participants list On the Template menu click Save when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation Template file or on the Database menu click Save Database when the Reservation template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar To copy a participant from a Participant database to a Reservation Template in a Reservation database using drag and drop 1 Open the Participants in Database window and the Reservations in Database window In the Reservation in Database window expand the Group hierarchy to locate the Reservation template to which you want to copy the Participant template In the
126. you can clear the check marks of databases you do not want to update Click the Apply button to update the selected databases A warning message recommending backup of the database before upgrading appears Warning it is strongly recommended to Backup your db befor updating Do you want to continue with update Ce e MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 5 Click Yes to continue the update process or No to cancel the operation so you can back up the database first The updating time will depend on the size of the database At the end of the process the Update Database Results dialog box listing the fields that were updated is displayed 6 Click OK to return to the Update Database dialog box 7 Click Close to close the Update Database dialog box and exit the update process have not yet updated the database you can do it at a later time using the Add When you open the MGC Manager for the first time after an upgrade if you Ls Remove Connection to the ODBC from the Database menu 6 33 Chapter 6 Using a Database Displaying the Database Tables 6 34 Once you are logged into the system you can display the various database tables Users defined as Operator Moderator or User can only view and modify private sets of defaults User Defined Conference Participant and MGC Manager Users defined as Administrators can view and modify private as well as global default sets sets that apply and can be used by a
127. 0 cceceseeseeseeeteeteeeteeaeees 9 6 Retrieving and Archiving Conference Records ceseeeeeeees 9 6 Off Line Formatting cccccccecccesecesseeeeneeeeeeeneeeeseeenseesseeenseeeees 9 9 Viewing the Archived Files and Generating Reports c0 c08 9 11 CDR File SUCINE maneirista eE NE AA 9 13 Appendix A CDR File Fields 200e ee eeee A 1 CDR Files and Records ecceccessesecsseceeceeeceecececeeeceeecseceneceeeeeeeeseeees A 1 The Conference Summary Record ccccecseesseeeteeeeseeeseeeeseeesseeensees A 2 Event Records sscsseseesesstsonsesnscsterstesetscceseteesdenstevssecboeeseesdeesneres A 4 Standard Event Record Fields cecceseeseesecneceseeeeeeseeeeeaeeneees A 4 Event LY POs esas dhe cnts ieee dibeecdieseiviendsew dies edie Ei A 7 Event Specific Fields srsti niesi dota R A 17 Advanced Conference Settings In addition to the basic conference settings you can accommodate special requests by defining advanced parameters The advanced settings include Dual Stream modes Allows the deployment of two video streams in a conference LSD Low Speed Data FECC Far End Camera Control the MCU supports the participant s control of a far end camera during an On Going Conference 4CIF Resolution Allows the selection of High quality 4CIF video resolution in Continuous Presence conferences running at line rates of 512 Kbps or higher Software Continuous Presence Allows Continu
128. 1234 a ij s Conference p 9 Numeric ID H x Enters the S5 i i conference 75 H as standard lt 5 H participant Enters the conference a 9251222 gt z a 1234 one YES as Chairperson with this 10 4 1300 y Enters th if YY Entry Queue io V pr paktofile New Conference arame Numeric ID 1300 Figure 3 4 Conference Access Chairperson Password validation with external database application To enable this workflow the same components as for the Entry Queue level Conference initiation Numeric ID validation with an External Database application flow must be defined in the system with the following additions e The external database must hold the Chairperson Password or the participant s CLI number or Alias e The IVR Service assigned to the destination conference defined in the Profile used for the Ad Hoc Conferencing must be configured to check the external database for the Chairperson password only when the participant enters the chairperson identifier key either pound or star e The IVR Service must be configured to prompt for the chairperson identifier key and password 3 13 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication Initiating and Connecting to Ad Hoc Conferences 3 14 gy A participant can start and connect to Ad Hoc conferences from the following types of endpoints e Telephone Video ISDN endpoint e Telephone Video H 323 Video SI
129. 2 Highlight the Reservation Template File option and then click OK A new window appears on the desktop The new Reservation Template file window contains one item named Conferences List ResTemplatesFile2 5 x 8 Conferences List 3 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Click Save As on the Template menu Template DataBase Directory Optior New Ctrl N Open Ctrl O Close Giles Convert into Database Recent File The Save As dialog box appears Tn lx Save in O My Templates e ex EE Friendly blend of tmpltes tlt E ResTemplatesFile2 tlt ResTemplatesFile24 tlt lec ResTemplatesFile3 tlt lec ResTemplatesFiles tlt fe ResTemplatesFileS tlt Standard New Reservation Templat File name ResT emplatesFile2 Save as type Reservation Files tlt aa Cancel Use the standard Windows techniques to specify the file name and the destination folder where the new Reservation Template file will be stored All Reservation template files are of Reservation File file type and have the tlt extension Click the Save button The Reservation Template file is saved in the selected folder The window s title bar contains the name of the new Reservation Template file 8 11 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 8 12 Adding a Reservation Template to a Reservation Template File A Reservation template can be added to a Reservation Template file
130. 3 4 1 3 0 65 p 1 1 93 j Polycom_c150 cdf Notepad ee ol x File Edit Format Help dle version 546 a conf name Polycom conf ID 3802 reserved start time 01 02 2004 11 03 1 reserved duration 02 00 00 actua start time 01 02 2004 11 03 11 actual duratjon 00 13 26 Terminate by Operator GMT offset 2 File retrieved OL 02 2004 70 stand by NO auto terminate No conf transfer rate 2B non restrict audio rate 16kbps video switch picture format auto CIF frame rate auto QCIF frame rate auto LSD rate NONE HSD rate NONE T120 rate none CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 1 01 02 2004 11 03 11 4 WZ Formatted CDR files contain multiple sections Unformatted CDR files contain multiple records The first section or record in each file contains 9 13 Chapter 9 Call Detail Record CDR Utility 9 14 general conference data The remaining sections or records contain event data one section or record for each event The general conference section or record contains the following information conference name ID scheduled starting date and time and actual starting date and time scheduled conference duration and actual duration whether the conference is On Going or how the conference was terminated and whether the conference was previously retrieved to a CDR file The event sections or records contain an event type or event type code followed by event data For example an event type may be that a particip
131. 3 participants The video rate in units of bits per second A value of 294967295 denotes auto and in this case the rate is computed by the MCU IP Address Relevant only for an H 323 participant The IP address of the H 323 participant An address of 4294967295 indicates that no IP address was specified for the participant and the gatekeeper is used for routing In all other cases the address overrides the gatekeeper A 52 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 32 Event Fields for Event 18 New Undefined Participant Continued a i E Relevant only for an H 323 participant The signaling port A value of 65535 is ignored by MCU Call Signaling Port H 323 Participant Alias Type H 323 Participant Alias Name The alias type as follows 8 H 323 ID alias type 7 E 164 alias type 11 URL ID alias type 12 Transport ID alias type 13 Email ID alias type 14 Participant number alias type The H 323 participant alias The alias may contain up to 512 characters Table A 33 Event Fields for Event 20 Participant Add Billing Code face ce Participant Name The name of the participant who added the billing code Participant ID The identification number as assigned by the MCU of the participant who added the billing code Billing Data The numeric billing code that was added 32 characters A 53 Appendix A CDR File Fields Table A 34 Event Fields for Event 21 Set Participant Visu
132. 4 Administrative Tools B z SE Name e l Te component Services 2KB Shortcut F ida 2KB Shortcut 9 Data Sources ODBC 2KB Shortcut fr Event Viewer 2KB Shortcut EA Local Security Policy 2KB Shortcut Eg Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Configuration 1KB Shortcut Eg Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Wizards 2KB Shortcut Hf Performance 2KB Shortcut Ba Services 2KB Shortcut 4 3 Double click the Data Sources ODBC option The ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box opens See step 2 in the next procedure for the continuation of the registration procedure MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To register the database from the MGC Manager application 1 Open the MGC Manager application 2 On the Database menu click Database ODBC and then click Add Remove connection to the ODBC DataBase Directory Options Window Saye Database Refresh Database Fg Filter Login Open D B Reservation Template gt Open D B Participant Template Logout amp Clear Login Record Load Defaults From DB gt Manage databases ODBC Data Source Administrator 2 x User DSN System DSN File DSN Drivers Tracing Connection Pooling About User Data Sources Name Driver S Oo oa JAS es Microsoft dBase Driver dbf dBase Files Word Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver Remove Excel Files Microsoft Excel Driver xls FoxPro Files Word Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver Configure
133. 43 Event Fields for Events 108 112 Operator Move Participant to Conference Attend Participant to Operator Conference Continued i ar Identification Relevant for dial in only Method The identification method as follows 0 Password 1 Called phone number 2 Calling phone number Meet Me Method Relevant for dial in only The meet me per method as follows 1 Meet me per MCU Conference 3 Meet me per participant 4 Meet me per channel Net Interface Type The type of interface between the participant and the MCU as follows 0 ISDN 1 ATM 2 H 323 3 MPI H243 Password The H 243 password or an empty string if there is no password Chair Not in use Always contains the value 0 Video Protocol The video protocol used by the participant as follows 1 H 261 only 2 H 263 3 H 26L 255 Auto Audio Volume The broadcasting volume assigned to the participant The value is between 1 lowest and 10 loudest The default value of the broadcasting volume upon participant connection is 5 Each unit movement increases or decreases the volume by 3 MHz MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 43 Event Fields for Events 108 112 Operator Move Participant to Conference Attend Participant to Operator Conference Continued i a ee Undefined Type Node Type Bonding Phone Number Video Rate IP Address Call Signaling Port H 323 Participant Alias Type H 323 Participant Alias Name
134. 9 1720 8 5 3010 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0554305 10 02 02 2004 09 43 4 0 Nadine 3 0 255 2 0 323 255 0 255 0 0 1 3 2010 02 02 2004 09 43 i4 0 2 0 255 5 0 1 54294967295 2887156848 1720 8 3 3010 02 02 2004 09 43 14 0 0 115 02 02 2004 09 43 16 0 Duke Knoop 1 0 0 128000 TA 172 22 138 155 TA 172 22 09 43 17 0 117 02 02 2004 09 43 17 0 Duke Knoop 1 1 276 16 0 8 116 02 02 2004 09 43 18 0 Nadine 3 1 Fs 02 02 2004 09 43 18 b Nadine 3 193 0 Figure 9 1 Unformatted CDR Record 9 11 Chapter 9 Call Detail Record CDR Utility If the file was saved using the Retrieve Formatted function cdf the information will be displayed in the following manner fj Polycom _c150 cdf Notepad oj xj File Edit Format Help file version 546 actual start time 01 02 2004 11 03 11 actual duration 00 13 26 Terminate by Operator GmT offset 2 File retrieved CONFERENCE START conf transfer rate 2B non restrict picture format auto CIF frame rate auto QCIF frame rate auto LSD rate NONE HSD rate NONE T120 rate none t CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 1 01 02 2004 11 03 11 Figure 9 2 Formatted CDR Record 9 12 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II CDR File Structure The following figure describes how the same data is represented in the unformatted and formatted files fj Product Management_c158 cdr Notepad p a ol x File Edit Format Help 004 09
135. A 5 Appendix A CDR File Fields A 6 Table A 2 Event Record Standard Fields Continued ss CDR Event Type Code cont Time Stamp Structure Length 2105 Operator Updated the Participant Properties Continue 1 additional information about an event in which the operator updated the participant properties 2108 Operator Moved a Participant to the Conference from Another Conference Continue 1 additional information about an event in which the operator moved a participant to the conference from another conference 3001 Conference Start Continue 2 web reservation information for a Conference Start event 3010 Participant user defined information 3108 Operator Moved a Participant to the Conference from Another Conference Continue 2 additional information about an event in which the operator moved a participant to the conference from another conference 4001 Conference Start Continue 3 conference remarks for a Conference Start event 5001 Conference Start Continue 4 additional information for a Conference Start event Note An additional Conference Start Continue 4 event CDR event type code 50001 will be written to the CDR each time one of the following conference fields is modified e Chairperson Web Password e Billing Code e Used Defined 1 2 or 3 The event GMT time The length of the event record Required for compatibility purposes to avoid problems of old versions with new messages
136. C If these Databases are protected by a Name and Password a Login dialog box is displayed Since the MGC database is not password protected select Cancel in all the Login dialog boxes which are displayed by the system If you are registering the database from the ODBC Control Panel you have to refresh the database list manually in the MGC Manager application by selecting Refresh the Database List from the Database ODBC under the Database menu The system attempts to open all the databases registered in the ODBC If these Databases are protected by a Name and Password a Login dialog box is displayed Select Cancel in all the Login dialog boxes that are displayed by the system 6 27 Chapter 6 Using a Database Database Manager The MGC Database Manager is the application that enables the user to access the Administrative tables and modify their entries define new permissions add new Groups define users and define the user access rights to the various groups In addition the MGC Manager operators access the User tables via the Database Manager When both the MGC WebCommander to manage scheduling and monitoring of conferences via the Web and the MGC Manager applications use the same database the Administrative tables defined in the MGC Web Server Manager apply to both the MGC Web Server Manager and the MGC Database Manager Therefore the various tables may include parameters that apply only to the WebCommander and others
137. C WebCommander MGC Web Server Manager and MGC Database Manager You can define various permission types according to your needs creating a wide range of user types Once defined the permission is assigned to a user setting the user s access rights to various functions Permissions defined in the MGC Database Manager only include Permission Name Database Configuration Modify Defaults in Manager and Add Modify Public Filters options The rest of the system parameters are disabled and can only be used for reference purposes These Permissions are defined in the MGC WebServer Manager and cannot be modified in the MGC Database Manager By default there are five permission sets defined in the system Most of the access rights defined in the Permissions apply to the conferences run and controlled via the Web Only the Database control section applies to the MGC Manager application MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To define and modify Permissions refer to the MGC Web Server Manager User s Guide Chapter 5 Defining Permissions To define a set of permissions 1 Inthe Browser area right click the Permissions icon and then click Add New Permission to DB 2 The Permission Properties Settings1 dialog box opens Permission Properties 6 51 Chapter 6 Using a Database 3 Define the following options Table 6 4 Permission Properties Settings1 parameters ee Co ae Permission Name D
138. Conference oo Chairperson Mute My Line 6B Everyone Unmute My Line 6 Everyone Lock Conference 70 Chairperson Unlock Conference 70 Chairperson Secure Conference 71 Chairperson Unsecure Conference 71 Chairperson Increase My Broadcasting Volume g Everyone x lt Back Finish Cancel Help 2 46 35 36 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II This dialog box lists the default DTMF codes for the various functions that can be performed during the conference by all participants or by the chairperson A combination of digits activates a function for example 70 activates the Lock Conference feature For each function you can modify the DTMF code and the permission For the list of all actions and their respective default DTMF codes see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 6 Using DTMF Codes During Conference To print the DTMF codes data see Printing VR DTMF Codes on page 2 63 Optional To modify the DTMF code or permission a Inthe Name field click the required function The appropriate DTMF code appears in the box below the list b Inthe DTMF Code left field enter the new code In the Permission right field select whether this function can be used by all conference participants or only the chairperson Click Finish to complete the IVR Service definition The new IVR Message Service is added to the VR Services list 2 47 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services V
139. Connect to the MCU 2 Inthe Browser area expand the MCU tree to list its options 3 Expand the MCU Configuration tree to list its options A list of options appears below the MCU Configuration icon 4 Expand the Cards tree to display the cards installed in the MCU 5 Expand the list of units by selecting the slot containing the Standard Audio Card 1 57 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings 1 58 Product Management Normal Oe Connections aa IVR Msg Services E Network Services amp Operators de a Gateway Configuratio mi Profiles 6 Right click the Audio Bridge unit A and then click 1 30 Ef Slot 3 AUDIO Reset Unit Disable Unit Enable Unit Set 4s Primary Glock Source Set 4s Backup Glock Source 4 16 6 12 A bullet appears next to the chosen configuration This audio bridge unit is now reserved for large Video Switching conferences MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Automatic Line Rate Detection The MGC unit can automatically detect the communication mode for example the type of video protocol and the bandwidth of incoming and outgoing ISDN calls and connect the participant accordingly This capability does not require prior setting of the line rate during the conference setup A participant can be connected at any line rate up to the line rate that was set for the
140. Connection Type The connection type as follows 0 Dial out 5 Dial in 6 Direct MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 23 Event Fields for Events 10 101 105 Reserved Participant Operator Add Participant Operator Update Participant Continued a ere Bonding Mode 1 Indicates whether bonding is enabled or disabled Bonding is a communication protocol that aggregates from two up to thirty 64 Kbps B channels together to look like one large bandwidth channel Possible values are 0 Bonding is disabled 1 Bonding is enabled 255 Auto Net Number Of The number of channels as follows Channels 255 Auto Otherwise in range of 1 30 Net Channel Width The band width of each channel This value is always 0 which represents a band width of 1B which is the only band width that is currently supported Net Service Name The Network Service as defined in the system An empty string indicates the default network service Restrict Indicates whether or not the line is restricted as follows 27 Restricted line 28 Non restricted line 255 Unknown or unimportant Voice Indicates whether the line is a voice or a video line as follows 0 The line is a data line Video amp Data 1 The line is a voice line Audio Only 255 Unknown A 39 Appendix A CDR File Fields Table A 23 Event Fields for Events 10 101 105 Reserved Participant Operator Add Participant Operator Update Participant
141. Continued Mute All OFF Indicates that all participants are unmuted This message is played to the conference to inform all participants that they are unmuted when Mute All Except Me was deactivated Chairperson Exit Indicates that the chairperson left the conference This message is played to the conference when the chairperson leaves the conference this causes the conference to automatically terminate Note This message is played only when the Terminate After Chairperson exits option is selected in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box End Time Alert Indicates that a conference is about to end This message is only played when the conference is about to end and it cannot be extended Note This message is played only when the End Time Alert option is selected in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box Change Passwords This voice menu is played when the participant requests to change the conference chairperson password This message details the steps required to complete the procedure Change Requests the participant to enter a new conference Conference password when the participant is attempting to Password modify the conference password Change Requests the participant to enter a new chairperson Chairperson password when the participant is attempting to Password modify the chairperson password Confirm Password Requests the participant to re enter the new Change password Change Password A messag
142. Continuous Presence Classic y l l Remarks Update Remark Remarks History The Conference Properties dialog box does not include the Scheduler tab when defining templates in MGC format When the Reservation template is used to reserve a conference or set an On Going Conference the Schedule dialog box will be enabled All the fields show the default values set in the Res Defaults in the Database Manager application Type the Reservation template name in the Name field Define the parameters as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Conference General Parameters 4 Click the Settings tab The Settings dialog box opens Fill in the Conference Properties Settings parameters as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Conference Settings 8 13 Chapter 8 Templates Handling Click the Participants tab The Conference Properties Participants dialog box opens x General Settings Participants Video Sources Meet Me Per Cont Recording Pre Defined Participants Conference Participants Name Nadine ISDN gt Rick_ISDN Roger_IP Sandy lt d Stan_ISDN_Dial in Wanda Del 4 gt Search New I Allow Undefined Parties Min Participants f3 4 Max Participants 255 Pre Defined Participants File AccordDB Group My Group I Dial Out Manually Browse From database From directory Cancel App
143. D The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Channel ID The channel identifier This is a number assigned to the channel by the system according to the order in which the channels connect The initial channel is always 1 Channels Number Connect Initiator Relevant only to multiRate calls The total number of channels being connected for this participant Indicates who initiated the connection as follows 0 MCU 1 Remote participant Any other number Unknown A 29 Appendix A CDR File Fields A 30 Table A 13 Event Fields for Event 3 Net Channel Connected Continued COE rs Call Type Net Specification PRF Mode The call type as follows 1 VOICE_VAL normal voice call 2 MODEM_VAL 3 1 khz audio 4 56K_VAL 56k data call unknown type 8 64K_VAL 64k data call unknown type 10 64K_REST_VAL 64k restricted data call 20 384K_VAL 384k data call unknown type 40 384K_REST_VAL 384k restricted data not supported at PRI 4000 MULTIRATE_DATA multirate service data call unknown type 8000 1536K_VAL 1536k data call unknown type 10000 56K_UNREST 56k data call unrestricted 20000 ALAW_VOICE Voice call outside of North America A law 40000 ALAW_MODEM 3 1kHz audio call outside of North America A law 400000 ALAW_VOICE 3 1kHz audio call outside of North America A law The network service parameters For more details see the MGC Administrator s
144. Database Copy Manager table to the clipboard B Pastes an entry from the clipboard to the selected Paste table 6 35 Chapter 6 Using a Database Ce E 6 36 ics Up one level E S Refresh Database List 5 Refresh Database Lists each of the table entries using a small icon and the entry name The list is displayed horizontally Lists each of the table entries using a small icon and the entry name The list is displayed vertically Displays the details of each of the table entries The details are displayed in a table format allowing you to sort the list according to a selected column Updates the databases list used by the system when a database is added to the ODBC list via the Control Panel instead of from within the Web Server Manager application Displays changes made to the database by other users or via the MGC Database Manager particularly when modifying the Groups table Defaults MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The MGC Manager enables users to customize their system according to their needs by defining default values for users conferences participants and general system parameters These defaults can be determined for the WebCommander and MGC Manager users The default sets are stored in a centralized or local database The default sets may be defined in the WebCommander Server Manager or the MGC Database Manager application When a user defines a new conference Reservation
145. Deleting Participants from a Reservation Template 8 46 Copying Reservation Templates from one File or Database to another erea neemen nen cdesiagsdtnsdenededsesdiex suse EEE EES 8 47 vii Table of Contents viii Basing a Reservation Template on another Reservation Templio aaia nea iE A NA E 8 49 Moving Reservation Templates from one File or Database to another seais tre e E e E N IAEE 8 50 Copying an On Going Conference or a Conference Reservation to a Reservation Template File or Reservation Database 8 52 Modifying Reservation Templates ssseseesseeseeeeessessseeseseeees 8 54 Deleting a Reservation Template ssssssessesseeseessrsessrssessesseresees 8 56 Printing the Template Information 0 0 0 0 ceceseeseeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 57 Adding a Participant from an On Going Conference or a Reservation to a Participant Template file or Participant T E E AI EIE EAI A AOE EENE A T E 8 60 Modifying a Participant Definition in a Participant Template file or Participant Database ccccecceeesseeeseeeteeeeteeeeseeeeeensnees 8 61 Linking Unlinking Participants in the Database 0 0 0 8 63 Deleting Participants from a Participant Template file or Participant Database eeeceeseceeceeceseceseceeeeneceneceeeceeeenesneaes 8 64 Call Detail Record CDR Utility 9 1 Viewing Retrieving and Archiving Conference Information 9 3 The CDR Window Conferences List 2
146. For a description of the fields see Table A 40 Event Fields for Events 102 103 104 Operator Delete Participant Operator Disconnect Participant Operator Reconnect Participant on page A 58 CDR event code 103 A participant was disconnected from the conference by an operator For a description of the fields see Table A 40 Event Fields for Events 102 103 104 Operator Delete Participant Operator Disconnect Participant Operator Reconnect Participant on page A 58 CDR event code 104 A participant who was disconnected from the conference was reconnected by an operator For a description of the fields see Table A 40 Event Fields for Events 102 103 104 Operator Delete Participant Operator Disconnect Participant Operator Reconnect Participant on page A 58 CDR event code 105 An operator updated the properties of a participant during the conference for example an operator changed the Video Layout For a description of the fields see Table A 23 Event Fields for Events 10 101 105 Reserved Participant Operator Add Participant Operator Update Participant on page A 38 CDR event code 2105 Additional information about an Operator Update Participant event For a description of the fields see Table A 24 Event Fields for Events 2010 2101 2105 Reserved Participant Continue 1 Operator Add Participant Continue 1 Operator Update Participant Continue 1 on page A 41 MGC Manager Us
147. H capabilities are exchanged between the two conferences If both conferences are MIH capable full H 243 cascading capabilities are established Setting Up Cascading Conferences Setting up a cascading conference begins with defining a number of conferences that take part in the Cascading conference The first conference the master Master Conference is the link to any additional conferences the second conference named Slavel is linked to the Master Conference Defining Master and Slave Conferences To define a Master Conference 1 Connect to an MCU and expand its tree Product Management Normal H a MCU Configuration On Going Conferences 0 On Going Gateway Sessions 0 d Participants Queue 0 Reservations 0 e Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories 6 H F 2 Right click the On Going Conferences icon and then click New Conference ay On Going Confere New Operator Conference Print All Paste CtrlHy CirltP 5 5 Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences The Conference Properties General dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Product Management Type the Master conference name in the Name field Fill in the rest of the General tab fields as described in the MGC Manager s User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Conference General Parameters Click the Participants tab to add participants to the Mast
148. I must be registered with the SIP server to enable routing of calls to the SIP Factory To ensure that the SIP factory is registered the option to register Entry Queues and SIP Factories must be enabled in the IP Network Service For instructions refer to the MGC Manager Administrator s Guide Chapter 3 Defining an IP Network Service Creating SIP Factories The Profile should be set to Auto Terminate when the Chairperson exits the 5 A conference Profile must be defined in the MCU before creating a SIP Factory conference To create a SIP Factory 1 Expand the MCU tree 2 Right click the Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories icon and then click New SIP Factory i Product Management Normal H g MCU Configuration H F On Going Conferences 2 On Going Gateway Sessions 0 d Participants Queue 0 H Reservations 0 H paan a taiii le Factories 7 Print All 3 41 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication The SIP Factory dialog box opens SIP Factory Settings Name SIP ADHOC Profile CP v V Automatic Connection Cancel 3 Define the following parameters Table 3 5 SIP Factory Properties ees eee ee Enter the SIP Factory name This name will be used as part of the URI dialed by the SIP endpoint to initiate the conference together with the domain name Profile Select the conference Profile from the list of Profiles
149. IH disabled Slave MIH enabled All the operations available in Star cascading such as token management and chair operations are available in the Multi Hierarchy cascading 5 20 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II When two branches of MCUs are connected or disconnected all the MCU numbers in these branches are reassigned When the Slave MCU gets a new MCU number the renumbering process ends During the renumbering process all the tokens are released and all the messages to the Master are deleted Monitoring Participants in a Cascading Conference When running a cascading conference once the connection between two or more conferences is established the MCUs exchange messages establishing the status of each conference either as a Master or a Slave and number all the terminals participating in the combined conference The number of the endpoint as assigned by the MCU can be viewed in the Participant Properties Advanced dialog box Link In Properties E Video Sources H221 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Identification Advanced Connection Info Connection Info2 Aggregation Number of Channels H221 z 2 Wideo Protocol Terminal Number identity Auto E 0 2 Recording Cascade Status None E F Auto Detect F Restrict Only Iv AGC andard Video Cards only Not required for Yideo J Service Name Sub Service Name Node Type Terminal zj Taken from servic
150. Link Out 2 Figure 5 4 MIH Cascading Flow MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Shown below is the Multi Hierarchy Cascading Conference as viewed in the MGC Manager Main window File Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help ASAE a Aa arane petere naea fan aliwe z o a jil AEA ee E L Pred gmt Normal MCU Configuration B On Going Conferences 4 B pal Conference A 8 Link In unz f Conference B unkout I cal Conference C 1 unkin From conf c urkouz I Conference D fil Link Out to Conf C conference A Prod Mgmt ID 3762 tink in uknz conference B Prod Mam 1D 3763 nko k conference C Prod Mgmt ID 3768 Linkin rom cont c ukowz conference D Prod Mgmt ID 3769 tink out to conf c 2 Connected 1 Connected 2 Connected 1 Connected AD connected D gt connected Single Participant D gt connected AD connected AD connected Single Participant De connected Single Participant Single Participant M996 996 P 99 99 M998 998 P 99 99 M999 999 P 99 99 7087998 Jan 26 2004 14 09 58 Jan 26 2004 Jan 26 2004 Jan 26 2004 14 23 pje ziz P k 21 Jan 26 2004 16 09 58 Jan 26 2004 16 10 01 Jan 26 2004 16 21 00 Jan 26 2004 16 23 42 BF oian a Dial in 5a Dial out E Dial in 5a Dial out Be Dial out 5 19 Chapter 5 H 243 Conf
151. MCU Expand the MCU options by double clicking the MCU icon or by clicking the plus icon next to the MCU icon Double click the MCU Configuration icon or click the plus icon next to the MCU Configuration icon to expand the MCU Configuration options Click the plus icon next to the AV Msg Services icon or double click the AV Msg Services icon The list of AV Message Services is displayed i Polycom Up to four AV Message Services can be defined in the system The default AV Message Service is indicated by a highlighted icon and bold name MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Setting an AV Message Service as the Default Service An AV Message Service can be set as the default service Attended wait or Welcome No Wait conferences in which the Message Service is not defined use the audio and video settings of the default AV Message Service To set an AV Message Service as the Default Service l gy View the AV Message Services as described in Listing the AV Message Services on page 4 10 Right click the icon of the AV Message Service to set as default and then click Set As Default a Polycom Standard Set As Default Delete Del Properties A check mark appears next to the function in the pop up menu and the icon is highlighted The AV Message Service name is displayed in bold print AV Message Services a Polycom Ei standard Kv Set As De
152. MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Il Version 7 5 Wi POLYCOM Network Systems Group Copyright 2006 Polycom Inc All Rights Reserved Catalog No DOC2065F Version 7 5 Proprietary and Confidential The information contained herein is the sole intellectual property of Polycom Inc No distribution reproduction or unauthorized use of these materials is permitted without the expressed written consent of Polycom Inc Information contained herein is subject to change without notice and does not represent commitment of any type on the part of Polycom Inc Polycom and Accord are registered trademarks of Polycom Inc Notice While reasonable effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing Polycom Inc cannot assume responsibility for any errors Changes and or corrections to the information contained in this document may be incorporated into future issues Canadian Department of Communications EC Declaration of Conformity Polycom Inc declares that the MGC 50 MGC 100 with NET 8 card is in conformity with the following relevant harmonized standards EN 60950 1992 Including Amendments 1 2 3 amp 4 EN 55022 1994 EN 50082 1997 Following the provisions of the Council Directive 1999 EC on radio and telecommunication terminal equipment and the recognition of its conformity Notice The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification mea
153. Meet Me E Office Reservation t H iP Polycom Office Reservation WebOffice Polycom weboffice_v2 WebOffice Piatt ATM alpha 1 weboffice_v2 ic G7221 alpha 21 Gham alpha 1 2B Auto Transcoding H 323 conf alpha 17 dibor alpha 21 384kbps 24 G722 1 Siren7 Video Switching 4p H323 cnf alpha 22 dipha conf alpha 17 128kbps 16 G728 Siren7 Video Switching goo 3 e H323 Lecture Mode S PH323 cnf alpha22 384kbps 56 G722 G711 Video Switching Eimi Lecture Show alpha 1 Select New Res Template from the Group right click The General tab opens Define the conference type duration and password p 05 5H323 Lecture Mode 384kbps Auto Continuous Prese Sa LectureMode pig z Lecture Show alpha 1 128kbps 16 G728 Siren7 Continuous Prese Pia ba oP Meeting Confer 00167879549 w Si Lecturemode 384kbps 56 G722 G711 Continuous Prese 3 Right click a Group icon and then click New Res Template Define the conference parameters in the Settings tab New Res Template New Res Operator Template Print All Paste Ctrl Select or define Paste As Ctrl P the conference New Group Delete Group participants in the Participants tab Select the Video Layout Continuous only in the Video tab If required define the phone number to be assigned to the conference in the Meet Me Per Conf tab MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Conference Properties General
154. Num type MCU ha Taken from service 7 IV Save Participant Cancel Help Auto The participant inherits the Conference Entry Queue encryption setting On The participant joins the Conference Entry Queue encrypted Off The participant joins the Conference Entry Queue non encrypted When the participant encryption is set to Auto the participant connects as encrypted only if the conference is defined as encrypted A non encrypted undefined participant cannot connect to an Encrypted Auto Add conference even if the encryption at the participant level flag is enabled 1 35 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings Table 1 4 summarizes the dependencies between the connecting participant s defined encryption status the Conference Entry Queue encryption setting and the participant level flag setting Table 1 4 Participant Level Encryption Options Conference Entry Queue Conference Entry Queue Encryption Encryption Enabled Disabled Participant Level Flag Setting Participant Level Flag Setting eee e Joins Joins Joins Joins conference conference conference conference encrypted encrypted non encrypted non encrypted Joins Joins Joins Cannot join conference conference conference conference encrypted encrypted encrypted Joins Cannot join Joins Joins conference conference conference conference non encrypted non encrypted non encrypted Move Guidelines e When participants are mo
155. Numbers Extension Identifier String Meet me per Bonding Phone Number Party bd User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 Broadcasting Yolume 5 Listening Yolume 5 fo ih A a ooo io i ft eco o T Audio Only M vip 4 Fill in the parameters in the Participant Properties Identification and Advanced tabs as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties For a definition of a participant with the T1 CAS Interface Type see the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 2 Defining Participant Properties LS The Participant Properties Identification fields differ according to the Interface Type selected 5 Click OK MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Participant Properties dialog box closes and the Participant template is added to the Participant Template file O Participants 1 oj x Participant Numbers IP Address SIP Address Channels Aggregatid rry 172 22 141 82 SIP Dial out Egnancy 122 22 132 116 H323 Dial in Gs Sam 100 ISDN Dial in Repeat steps 2 to 5 for each new Participant template you want to add to the Participant Template file To save the changes to the Participant Template file on the Template qm menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Table 8 1 Participant Template Icons Participant template Audio only Participant template Audio and
156. Off AGC Properties Open the Participant Template file or Participants in Database window In the Participant Template file window right click on a clear area anywhere in the template window In the Participants in Database window right click the Group icon to which to paste the Participant template Participants in AccordDB E O Root Name Phone IP E Office Reservation te Accord WebOffice Accord 1 E weboffice_v2 Paste As Accord 2 New Group Accord 3 Delete Group MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Click Paste The new Participant template is added to the Participant Template file or Participant database An asterisk appears in the title bar of the Participant Template file or Participants in Database window to indicate that changes have been made Click Save on the Template menu when the Participant template is stored in a Participant Template file or click Save Database on the Database menu when the Participant template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively click on the Save button on the toolbar The asterisk is removed from the title bar of the Participant Template file or Participants in Database window This confirms that the modifications have been saved Modifying a Participant Definition in a Participant Template file or Participant Database You may modify the properties of a Participant template stored in the Participant Template file or in the Participa
157. P endpoint e Via the WebOffice application Telephone Video ISDN participant The participant dials the Entry Queue dial in number and then via DTMF codes enters the Numeric ID of the destination conference If the conference does not exist on the MCU it is initiated according to the Profile assigned to the Entry Queue Telephone Video H 323 participant Video SIP participant The H 323 participant enters the dialing string of the Entry Queue The dialing string is composed of the Network Service Prefix and Entry Queue s Numeric ID or Entry Queue name The SIP participant enters the URI of the Entry Queue in the format lt Entry Queue name gt lt domain name gt Once in the Entry Queue the participant enters the Numeric ID of the destination target conference If the conference does not exist on the MCU it is initiated according to the Profile assigned to the Entry Queue WebOffice Participant The participant initiates an Audio or Video conference from the WebOffice Meeting Manager or WebOffice Meeting Client Each participant may be assigned a unique password by the WebOffice Server When the participant dials in to connect to the audio or video conference initiated by the WebOffice the MCU checks the participant password with the WebOffice database application which in turn sends a confirmation together with the participant name Additional Participant Definitions for Ad Hoc Conferencing The Profiles can contain participant defin
158. Participant Properties Connection Info tab For a detailed description of all connection parameters see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Participant Level Monitoring To monitor Software CP conference participants 1 In the Browser area expand the list of participants in the On Going Conference list Alternatively right click the On Going Conferences icon and select Monitor In the Browser Monitor or Status area right click the participant icon and then click Properties The participant s Properties dialog box opens Click the Connection Infol tab The Participant Properties Connection Info dialog box opens poly Properties Video Sources H245 Disconnection Cause Resource Details Identification Advanced Connection Infot Connection Into2 Member In I Audio J T120 J FECC Participant State IZ Video 7 Content Disconnect Channels Status 0 00 M Video in 28 9 A Video out 119 8 Content in 0 00 0 00 oo opg These columns provide information regarding the synchronization process with the endpoint A checked box O Content out e indicates problems in a stage Pannell Source Pos Video switch of the synchronization process The counter indicates the number of times the system tried to I f video sync loss I rvideo sync loss syn chronize I FECC Token I Content Token The window in the video layo
159. Participants Queue Greeting stage to the Conference conferencing stage without the operator s intervention However while in the Participants Queue the operator can move the participant to the Operator conference for a one on one conversation if needed The MGC Manager provides tools that enable you to monitor participants statuses in each conference stage and to move them from one stage to another e The status of participants in Attended conferences can be monitored in the Participants Queue e Special icons are used to indicate the participant status in a Greet and Guide conference e Interactive drag and drop of participants from the Participants Queue to the Operator conference or to any other conference is available e Adding or deleting participants from Greet and Guide conferences Once the participant connects to the conference all operations that can be performed during a standard conference can also be performed during an On Going Greet and Guide conference For details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Operations Performed During On Going Conferences MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Viewing Participants in a Greet and Guide Conference To 1 2 3 view participant statuses in a Greet and Guide Conference Connect to the MCU Click the plus icon next to the MCU icon to display its options Double click or click the plus icon next to the On Going Confe
160. R Message Service on page 2 24 Modify the required parameters or download the required audio file 4 Click OK 2 50 Assigning IVR Services to Conferences amp MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Assigning an IVR Service to a conference enables the participants and the chairperson to perform various operations from their endpoints using the DTMF codes and also to use the Roll Call feature You can assign an IVR Service to a conference during the definition of a new On Going Conference Meeting Room or Reservation You cannot disable or change the selected IVR Service during an On Going Conference To assign an IVR Service to a video conference l During the definition of a new On Going Conference or a new Reservation in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box in the Msg Service Type list select IVR x General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Cont Recording General Settings I Restricted Line Rate 2B T z n But e On Port I Encryption I Silence IT Msg Service Type Msg Service Name IVR lt lt Basic Master Name None Chair Control None X Cascade None X 7120 Rate None z FECC LSD Rate None To Mute T Conference Lock I Start Conf Requires Chairperson F OnHold J Terminate After Chairperson Exits J7 Enable Invite e patties IT Auto Termination Before First Join
161. S Access or SQL database format 8 1 Chapter 8 Templates Handling This chapter describes the procedures to create the Reservation Template and Participant Template files MGC proprietary templates their conversion to MS Access or SQL database format and various operations that can be performed with templates in general such as copy paste delete and move Participant Template Files Figure 8 1 Participant Template Files Flow shows the steps required to create the Participant templates that are stored in a Participant Template file Before creating a Participant template you must create a new Participant Template file or open an existing Participant Template file to which the new Participant template is added Create a new Participant Template File Add a new Participant Template to the Participant Template File Define the Participant parameters Save the Participant Template File Figure 8 1 Participant Template Files Flow Creating a New Participant Template File This section describes how to create a new Participant Template file You can create as many Participant Template files as needed Q MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To create a new Participant Template file 1 On the Template menu click New Template DataBase Directory Optior Ctrl N Open Ctrl O Saye Ghri s Convert into Database Recent File Reservation Template File Cancel OK
162. TENSION YES NO default is NO enables or disables this option for all conferences running on this MCU This option must also be enabled defined at the conference level For details see To set a conference to automatically extend on page 1 41 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II MAXIMUM EXTENSION _TIME value in minutes default is 30 the maximum allowed extension of the predefined conference duration For example if the conference was defined to last up to 3 hours and this flag is set to 45 minutes the conference can last up to 3 hours and 45 minutes EXTENSION_TIME INTERVAL value in minutes default is 5 number of minutes that are added to the conference duration each time the system performs a new check to determine whether or not at least a single participant is connected to the conference and if resources are available for the extended conference Setting Auto Extend at the Conference Level Once the automatic extension parameters are enabled and defined in the system confer cfg file you can apply them to a specific conference using the Conference Properties Settings dialog box To set a conference to automatically extend 1 Inthe Conference Properties dialog box if the Media Settings area shows only the Basic settings click the Advanced button to display the advanced settings options 2 Select the End Time Alert Tone check box to apply the automatic extension of the confer
163. TMF codes only the participants in the chairperson s local conference are affected 1 45 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings Simple Cascading In Simple Cascading one conference is connected directly to another conference With Simple Cascading it is possible to connect conferences using both ISDN and H 323 links Conferences can run on different MCUs or on the same MCU using cascading on a single MCU enables you to run very large conferences whose number of participants exceeds the predefined maximum number of participants per conference Participant link Figure 1 4 Simple Cascading Scheme In Figure 1 4 a participant dials from one MCU to another establishing a dial in link in conference A and a dial out link in conference B Simple Cascading with an ISDN Link In Simple Cascading you set up two conferences In conference A you define one participant as a link from conference B This participant is defined as the dial in ISDN participant Meet Me per Party and you enter the dial in number for this participant In conference B you define one participant as a link to conference A This participant is defined as the dial out ISDN participant the dial out number is the same as the MCU number of the dial in link in conference A ae Dials mee i till 9251995 ip i nn Ain Hena a La 7 Conference A Conference B Participant Link In Participant Link Out Connection Type Dial in Connection Type Dial out MCU Numb
164. Terminated when end time passed B rorvcom Feb 01 2004 04 06 29 01 59 55 Feb 01 2004 04 06 29 02 00 00 2 Terminated when end time passed B Pouvcom Feb 01 2004 03 33 59 00 32 00 Feb 01 2004 03 33 59 02 00 00 2 Terminated by operator YO debbie Feb 01 2004 03 31 15 00 35 43 Feb 01 2004 03 31 15 02 00 00 2 Terminated by operator YW debbie Feb 01 2004 03 30 44 01 59 55 Feb 01 2004 03 30 44 02 00 00 2 Terminated when end time passed 2G test2 Feb 01 2004 03 10 25 00 00 57 FebO1 2004 03 10 25 00 01 00 2 Terminated when end time passed Polycom Feb 01 2004 01 03 11 00 13 26 Feb 01 2004 01 03 11 02 00 00 2 Terminated by operator 4 gt Connected to Prod Mgmt Num lg To open the CDR utility through the MGC Manager right click menu 1 Ifthe MGC Manager is not connected to the MCU connect it now For more information see Connecting to an MCU in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 2 Connecting to an MCU MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 2 Right click the MCU icon and then click CDR A Disconnect IP Configuration New Reservation Resource Report MCU Utils Retrieve Diagnostic Files Fast Configuration Wizard Play Batch Telnet IP Terminal SNMP Create SSL Certificate Request Send SSL Certificate Stop Current Indication Repeating Remove MCU Reset MCU Properties The CDR window opens displaying th
165. Time 15 Sec Quality Auto z Audio Mix Depth Ro 4 Stes I AnnerN M Anner I Annex 1 15 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings 2 Inthe FECC LSD Rate box select one of the following options Table 1 1 LSD FECC Rate Options Dynamic Default When The FECC LSD option is disabled any request for far end camera control during the conference is rejected The On Going Conference starts with the FECC LSD channel closed Upon request from a participant the MCU opens the FECC LSD channel and assigns the data token to that participant The FECC LSD channel remains open throughout the conference In Video Switching conferences when opening the FECC LSD channel endpoints that do not support FECC LSD become connected as Secondary audio only This is the only option available in encrypted conferences In encrypted conferences with ISDN participants when starting the conference the MCU opens the FECC LSD channel at a fixed rate of 4 8 Kbps LSD 4800 and keeps the channel open at this rate throughout the conference Note This option is not available for P Only video conferences The fixed rate MCU opens the FECC LSD data channel at a fixed rate of LSD 6400 when starting the conference and keeps the channel open throughout the conference Once the channel is open the behavior is the same as in the Dynamic mode Note This option is not available for encrypted conferences MGC Manager
166. U name s and then click the Remove lt lt button Multi selection is available using standard Windows conventions The unassigned MCUs appear in the MCUs list Click OK to return to the User Properties dialog box MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 6 Click the Creation amp Authentication button to display additional parameters User Properties 6 57 Chapter 6 Using a Database 7 Define the following parameters Table 6 6 Creation amp Authentication parameters Ea ees Conference Creation Billing Code Entry Password Web Chairperson Password 6 58 Enter the billing code that will be added to the conference parameters when starting a new On Going Conference from the New Meeting window or from the MGC Personal Scheduler Outlook s Add on application In Ad Hoc conferencing when the MCU is configured to use the WebCommander Server Manager as the External database application for authentication the billing code defined here overwrites the billing code defined in the Ad Hoc Profile Enter the conference entry password that the participants must enter to connect to the conference This password is assigned to the conference scheduled or started from the New Meeting window or from the MGC Personal Scheduler In Ad Hoc conferencing when the MCU is configured to use the WebCommander Server Manager as the External database application for authentication the conference entry
167. User s Guide Volume Il Alternatively click Copy As to modify the participant name and other properties pea i 4p weboffice_v1 a ta To2_1 Delete Dial Out Ctrl Line Rates Link participant Properties The Participant Properties dialog box opens Change the participant s name or any other parameters and then click OK The participant parameters are copied to the clipboard under the new name Right click the icon of the destination On Going Conference Reservation or Reservations template in the database and then click Paste The participant s details are copied to the destination conference or reservation under the same name die Sales1 Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Default Attending Print Template Cut Ctrl x Cop trl C Paste Ctrl Paste As Ctri p Delete Del Properties Alternatively click Paste As to modify the participant name or other properties The Participant Properties dialog box opens Type the desired name that you wish to save the participant as and then click OK 7 25 Chapter 7 Database Templates The participant s details are copied to the destination conference or Reservation template under the new name Defining an Operator Reservation Template 7 26 To define an operator Reservation template L 2 Open the Reservations in Database window Expand the Template Gro
168. V Save Participant Cancel Help Define the participants in the Cascading conference just as in any standard conference For details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties Define the participant who is used as a link between the two conferences Master and Slave and select Dial out in the Connection Type field Enter the number of the MCU running the Master conference in the Participant Phone Number field Click the Settings tab to define the conference technical parameters 5 11 Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences The conference Properties Settings dialog box opens Default Cor ance Properties Product Management 16 Sien7 6728 nos d I Rolcall 9 Select Slave from the drop down menu in the Cascade field 10 Select the name of the participant who acts as the link to the master conference from the Master Name drop down list 11 Complete the conference definition 5 12 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Defining other Conferences Participating in the Cascade Conference There can be a number of Slave conferences Only the first conference is defined as the Master conference The other conferences are usually defined as Slave conferences In each Slave conference define one participant to be used as a link to the Master conference in each Slave conference It is recommended to define these participants as dial out participants entering the
169. abase Reservation template 1 Open the Reservations in Database window 2 Expand the Template Groups tree until you locate the Reservation template containing the participant that you wish to copy 3 Double click the Reservation template icon or click the plus icon next to the Reservation template icon to display the list of participants oix Root Name Phone j1P__ Connectio channels aggregation Division te fil potyeom Beoftice 2 Dial out Auto Auto SB main office_at ray office 3 Dialout Auto Auto I Frade ey office 4 Dial in Auto Auto fix office 1B offices Diskin Auto Auto Sa office 3 Gig otfce 4 Gia offices WebOffice Se weboffice_al E weboffice vi q F 4 Right click the icon of the participant to copy and then click Copy or 7 22 press lt Ctrl gt lt C gt The participant details are copied to the clipboard MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To copy the participant under a new name click Copy As eta 3 46 weboffice_v1 a a To2_1 Opy Ctrl C Cut Ctrl X Delete Del Ctrl 4 Debbie Properties Identification Advanced Connection Type Interface Type Dial out H323 hd Participant IP Signaling Port 172 22 169 72 i720 Alias Name Alias Type H323 1D x Extension Identifier String User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Volu
170. added to the database or they can be added directly to the database Defining a New Participant during the Reservation Template Definition To define a new participant during the Reservation template definition This procedure can be performed when defining a Reservation template in the database or when defining an On Going Conference or conference Reservation directly l In the Reservations in Database window expand the Groups tree until the desired group is located Right click the Group to which to add a new Reservation template and then click New Res Template on the pop up menu The Conference Properties dialog box opens Click the Participant tab 7 35 Chapter 7 Database Templates The Conference Properties Participants dialog box opens Default Conference Properties 3 To define a new participant click the New button 7 36 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Participant Properties Identification dialog box opens Default Participant Properties xj Identification Advanced Name Connection Type Interface Type Dial in ISDN ha Participant Numbers MCU Numbers Extension Identifier String Meet me per Bonding Phone Number Party Be User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 Broadcasting Yolume 5 Listening Volume 5 foo oo 0 8 PA to oO 0 00 I Audio Only F vip J Participant linked Cancel He
171. ading procedure see step 8 on page 2 29 If the files were not downloaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you 2 44 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 2 11 IVR Properties SilencelT Options and Messages SilencelT Message SilencelT Menu Unmute and Return to Conference Adjust SilencelT Sensitivity and Unmute Disable SilencelT and Unmute Return to the Conference Muted Description Played when a participant returns to the conference after having placed the phone line on hold Notifies participants that the line has been muted and indicates which DTMF code they should enter to listen to the available options The default voice message is Your line has been muted due to a noisy line For list of available options press nine Note This message is mandatory Indicates which DTMF code participants should enter to return to the conference unmuted The default voice message is To unmute and return to the conference press one Note This message is mandatory Optional Indicates which DTMF code to enter to adjust the sensitivity of the SilencelT algorithm and then return to the conference unmuted The noise detection sensitivity remains at the adjusted level until the end of the conference The default voice message is To reduce the noise detection level and return to the conference press three Optional A voice message indicating which DTMF code to enter
172. al Name a Participant Name The original name of the participant for example the name automatically assigned to an undefined participant such as undefined participant_ 000 Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Visual Name The new name assigned to the participant by the operator 81 characters Table A 35 Event Fields for Event 22 DTMF Code Failure ce a Participant Name The name of the participant Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Wrong Dtmf Code The incorrect DTMF code entered by the participant or NULL if the participant did not press a key Right Data The correct DTMF code if known Failure State The type of DTMF failure as follows 2 The participant failed to enter the correct conference password 6 The participant failed to enter the correct chairperson password 12 The participant failed to enter the correct Conference Numeric ID for the destination conference A 54 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 36 Event Fields for Event 26 Recording Link Event Fest ean eee Participant name The name of the Recording Link participant Participant ID The Recording Link participant s identification number as assigned by the system Operation Type The type of recording operation as follows 0 Recording started 1 Recording stopped 2 Recording paused 3 Recording resumed 4 Rec
173. alled in the MCU and the Audio card is configured accordingly For more details see the MGC Installation and Configuration Guide Chapter 4 The welcome audio messages are recorded For more details see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 8 The welcome video slide is created For more details see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 8 The Audio message and the Video slide are converted into the MGC format For more details see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 8 A new AV Message Service is defined For more details see Defining a New AV Message Service on page 4 6 The audio messages video slide and AV Message Services may be prepared in advance for different types of conferences and used repeatedly over time or they may be created when needed 4 5 Chapter 4 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences Defining a New AV Message Service 4 6 An AV Message Service contains the video slide audio messages set and if available music input from an external device A special AV Message Service can be set for different Attended conferences or for conferences reserved on a regular basis Different messages can be created for weekdays and holidays or special announcements Up to four AV Message Services may be defined in the system The AV Message Service can be defined only after the appropriate audio and video files are prepared and converted into MGC internal format files For details see th
174. ally Fo Auto add Max Participants Auto T Lock I Enable Party I Meeting Room I OnHold F Limit c I Mute Meet Me Parties I Start Conf Requires Chairperson Background Oo zl J Terminate After Chairperson Exits T Layout Border H iEn I Speaker Notation a r Recording I Enable Recording Recording Link Name Start Recording Immediately y 6 41 Chapter 6 Using a Database 6 42 Define the Settings2 parameters These additional fields are defined in the same manner as in the Conference Properties dialog box described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining a New Video Conference Audio Only conference fields are described in the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 2 Defining a New On Going Audio Only Conference In the Owner field users with administrator s permission may assign the conference to any user by entering the user s name Reservations stored in the database may be filtered using the Owner name 10 Click OK to confirm and store the new Conference Defaults set Defining Participant Defaults To define participant defaults 1 Right click the Participant Defaults icon A pop up menu appears 1 Participant Defaults Add New Participant Defaults 2 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Click Add New Participant Defaults The Party Properties Settings dialog box open
175. ant Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Connection Type The connection type as follows 0 Dial out 5 Dial in 6 Direct A 59 Appendix A CDR File Fields A 60 Table A 43 Event Fields for Events 108 112 Operator Move Participant to Conference Attend Participant to Operator Conference Continued as E Bonding Mode Net Number Of Channels Net Channel Width Net Service Name Indicates whether bonding is enabled or disabled Bonding is a communication protocol that aggregates from two up to thirty 64 Kbps B channels together to look like one large bandwidth channel Possible values are 0 Bonding is disabled 1 Bonding is enabled 255 Auto The number of channels as follows 255 Auto Otherwise in range of 1 30 The band width of each channel This value is always 0 which represents a band width of 1B which is the only band width that is currently supported The Network Service as defined in the system An empty string indicates the default network service Indicates whether or not the line is restricted as follows 27 Restricted line 28 Non restricted line 255 Unknown or unimportant Indicates whether the line is a voice or a video line as follows 0 The line is a data line Video amp Data 1 The line is a voice line Audio Only 255 Unknown MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 43 Event Fiel
176. ant connects to the conference and the event data will list the date and time the participant connects to the conference the participant name and ID and the participant capabilities used to connect to the conference For a full description of the CDR file record types and fields see Appendix A CDR File Fields Appendix A CDR File Fields The CDR Call Detail Records utility is used to retrieve conference information to a file CDR Files and Records The CDR utility can retrieve conference information to a file in both formatted and unformatted formats Unformatted CDR files contain multiple records The first record in each file contains information about the conference in general such as the conference name and start time The remaining records each contain information about one event that occurred during the conference such as a participant connecting to the conference or the operator extending the length of the conference The first field in each record identifies the event type and this is followed by values containing information about the event The fields are separated by commas Formatted files contain the same information as unformatted files but with the field values replaced by descriptions Formatted files are divided into sections each containing information about one conference event The first line in each section is a title describing the type of event and this is followed by multiple lines each containin
177. ard For values and explanations see the Q 931 Standard The disconnection cause value For values and explanations see the Q 931 Standard Cause Value Location The disconnection cause location For values and explanations see the Q 931 Standard A 33 Appendix A CDR File Fields Table A 18 Event Fields for Event 5 Participant Connected eS re Participant Name The name of the participant Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Participant State The participant status as follows 1 Connected 8 Secondary the participant could not connect the video channels and is connected via audio only Capabilities The remote capabilities in H 221 format Remote The remote communication mode in H 221 format Communication Mode Secondary Cause Relevant only if the Participant State is Secondary The cause for the secondary connection not being able to connect the video channels as follows 1 Restrict 2 SM comp 3 Bit rate for example when 6B is needed but not supported 4 LSD 5 HSD 6 MLP 7 H MLP 8 QCIF 9 Video frame rate 10 H243 bad behavior 255 Other A 34 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 19 Event Fields for Event 7 Participant Disconnected ae as Participant Name The name of the participant as in the reservation An empty name denotes an unidentified participant or a participant whose name is u
178. as Sam 100 ISDN Dial in MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Reservation Template Files Figure 8 2 Reservation Template File and Reservation Template Creation Flow shows the steps required to create Reservation templates that are stored in a Reservation Template file Before creating a Reservation template you need to create a new Reservation Template file or open an existing Reservation Template file to which the new Reservation template is to be added To open an existing Reservation Template file see Opening a Reservation Template File on page 8 16 Create a new Reservation Template File Add a new Reservation Template to the Reservation Template File Define the Conference parameters in the Reservation Template Assign the participants to the Reservation Template Optional Save the Reservation Template File Figure 8 2 Reservation Template File and Reservation Template Creation Flow Chapter 8 Templates Handling 8 10 Creating a New Reservation Template File This section describes how to create a new Reservation Template file You can create as many Reservation Template files as desired To create a new Reservation Template file 1 On the Template menu click New Template DataBase Directory Optior Ctrl N Open Ctrl O Close Save Ghr s Save As Convert into Database Recent File The New dialog box opens Reservation Template File Participant Template File
179. as the maximum allowed number of Exceeded participants will be exceeded Recording in Indicates that the conference is currently being Progress recorded Recording Failed Indicates that recording of the conference failed and was cancelled 17 To assign the appropriate audio file if one was downloaded to the message type click the appropriate table entry The Message Type appears at the bottom of the table and the list of message files is enabled 18 Select the audio file to be assigned to the event 19 Repeat steps 17 and 18 to select the audio files for all the messages to be played during the conference 2 38 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 20 Click Next The Operator Assistance dialog box opens Operator Assistance x Enable Operator Assistance Operator Assistance Indication Message opethelp aca zj Add Message File Disconnection Message goodbye aca Add Message File J Enable Operator Assistance on Failure lt Back Cancel Help 21 Select Enable Operator Assistance to enable operator assistance when the participant waits in the IVR queue and during the conference The Operator Assistance function is enabled 22 Select the Enable Operator Assistance on Failure check box to enable operator assistance when the participant fails to correctly access the conference When this option is cleared a participant who failed all password attempts will be automatically disconnected
180. atabase Configuration Add Modify Public Filters Modify Defaults in Manager Enter the name for this set of options determining the access rights to various functions This set will be assigned to users and will determine their access rights Determines whether the user will be able to configure the administrator s tables Defaults MCUs Labels Permissions Users and Groups in the database via the Web Server Manager or the MGC Database Manager in the MGC Manager application when both applications use the same database This option should be enabled for a Permission that will be assigned to an Administrator Determines whether the user will be able to create and modify public filters Determines whether the user will be able to read the various default sets from the database add new defaults to the database or modify the existing default sets in the database from the MGC Database Manager or the MGC Web Server Manager applications Owned Users can view and or modify the default sets assigned to them while saving the default sets to the database All Users can view and or modify all the default sets in the database while saving the default sets 4 Click OK to confirm and add the new Permission to the database 6 52 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Viewing the Permissions List 1 Inthe Browser area click the Permissions icon The Permissions list is displayed in the Status area in a table format
181. ation Numeric ID validation with an External Database application The participant dials in to the Entry Queue and is prompted for the conference numeric ID The MCU is configured to work with an external database application to validate the participant s right to start a new conference The Numeric ID entered by the participant is compared against the database that contains a list of participants users and if a match is found the participant is granted the right to start a new conference based on the Profile assigned to the Entry Queue Conference Access Conference Password validation with an External Database application Once the participant is moved from the Entry Queue to the conference the participant request to join the conference is validated against the database In such a case the IVR Service assigned to the conference is configured to validate each of the participants attempting to join the conference with the external database If a match is found the participant is granted the right to join the conference The participant may also be MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II requested to enter the chairperson password however this password is not validated with the external database application only against the conference parameters Conference level Conference Access Chairperson Password validation with an External Database application In this scenario only participants requesting to join the conferen
182. ation template is to be copied In the target window right click the Conferences List or Reservation Group icon and then click Paste or Paste As to change the name of the Reservation template New Res Template New Res Operator Template Print Paste Ctrl V Paste As Ctrl P New Group Delete Group The Reservation template is copied from the clipboard to the target Reservation Template file window or to the relevant group in the Reservations in Database window A new Reservation icon is added to the list of Reservations under the Conferences List or Reservation Group icon Click Save on the Template menu when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation template file or click Save Database on the Database menu when the Reservation template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively for all types click the Save button on the toolbar MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Basing a Reservation Template on another Reservation Template When defining a new Reservation template you can base it on an existing Reservation template that is similar to the one you want to create For example Company X has a general managerial staff meeting every Tuesday and a sales managerial staff meeting every Thursday All the meetings are via multipoint video conferencing Moreover all the participants of the sales managerial staff meeting must attend the general staff meeting To
183. ator 0 MCU 1 Remote participant Any other number Unknown Table A 31 Event Fields for Events 17 23 H 323 Participant Connected SIP Participant Connected E aaa Participant Name The name of the participant as in the reservation An empty name denotes an unidentified participant or a participant whose name is unspecified Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU A 47 Appendix A CDR File Fields A 48 Table A 31 Event Fields for Events 17 23 H 323 Participant Connected SIP Participant Connected Continued i ae Participant State Capabilities H 323 participant Remote Communication Mode H 323 Participant The participant status as follows 1 Connected 2 Disconnected 3 Waiting for dial in 4 Connecting 5 Disconnecting 6 Partially connected the participant has completed H 221 capability exchange 7 Deleted by operator and his her resources are released 8 Secondary the participant could not connect the video channels and is connected via audio only 9 Stand by waiting for trigger by operator 10 Connected with problems list byte The remote capabilities in H 245 format An empty list means that capabilities are unavailable The remote communication mode in H 245 format MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 31 Event Fields for Events 17 23 H 323 Participant Connected SIP Participant Conne
184. ay of files and Folders change file as fronts Add change and manage fonts on your computer came Controllers Add remove and configure game controller hardware s Winternet Options Configure your Internet display and connection settings p Java Plug in Java Plug in Control Panel aKeyboard Customize your keyboard settings such as the cursor b Email Microsoft Outlook Profiles B Mouse Customize your mouse settings such as the button conl network Connections Connects to other computers networks and the Intern 3 NVIDIA nview Desktop Manager Configure your NVIDIA nVview Desktop Manager settings e Phone and Modem Options Configure your telephone dialing rules and modem settir Power Options Configure energy saving settings for your computer Printers and Faxes Shows installed printers and fax printers and helps you a QuickTime Configures QuickTime software and hardware componer Regional and Language Options Customize settings For the display of languages a a A MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II In the Control Panel window double click the Administrative Tools option The Administrative Tools window opens File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ou O it Powe imme io eX Address 49 Administrative Tools at sa k er Management m Event Viewer EE Local Security Policy HeMicrosoft NET Framework 1 1 Configuration Sfpmicrosoft NET Framework 1 1 Wizards Sf Performance fi Services
185. ayed in the Pre Defined Participants File field To add a participant from a different Participant Template file or to select the Participant Template file when the database is active click the Browse button The Open dialog box appears Use the standard Windows techniques to select the desired Participant Template file When a different Participant Template file is selected its full path and name appear in the Pre Defined Participants File field and the participants defined in the Participant Template file appear in the Pre Defined Participants list In the Pre Defined Participants field click the name of the Participant you want to add to the Reservation template 8 33 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 8 34 10 The participant s name is highlighted Click the Add button The selected name appears in the Conference Participants list Repeat steps 7 and 8 for all the participants you want to include from the current Pre Defined Participants list If you want to use participants from other sources of Participant templates repeat steps 5 to 8 for each Participant Template file and Participant database group Click OK The participant is added to the Reservation template The participant s name appears in the Reservation template s list of participants template stored in the same database are Linked participants LS Participants that are added from the Participant database to a Reservation 11 An aster
186. base 6 48 To define a Defaults set as the Global Defaults set LS Only the administrator can define a Defaults set as the Global Defaults set 1 2 In the Database Manager Status area right click the Defaults set icon A pop up menu appears Video Set As Private Default Set Default to Users Alt D Copy Copy As Delete Properties Set As Global Default Click Set As Global Default The appropriate indiction appears in the Status area and a check mark appears next to the Set as Global Default option To define a Defaults set as the Private Defaults set 1 In the Database Manager Status area right click the Defaults set icon A pop up menu appears Video Set Default to Users Alt D Copy Copy As Delete Properties Set As Global Default Click Set As Private Default The Defaults set is assigned as the Private Defaults set of the user who is currently logged in The appropriate indiction appears in the Status area and a check mark appears next to the Set as Private Default option MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To Assign a defaults set to other users LS Only the administrator can assign a Defaults set to other users 1 Inthe Status area right click the Defaults set icon A pop up menu appears Set As Private Default Set Default to Users Copy Copy As Delete Properties Alt D Set As Global Default 2 Click Set Default
187. ble to connect as the chairperson You can change the status of any participant to chairperson during an On Going Conference by using the appropriate DTMF code and password 11 When the Enable Chairperson Messages option is enabled select the various audio messages and prompts that assist the participant in identifying as a chairperson want to add new audio files click Add Message File to download the appropriate audio file to the MGC units memory For the downloading procedure see step 8 on page 2 29 If the files were not downloaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you Table 2 5 IVR Properties Conference Chairperson Options and Messages Chairperson Identifier Select the audio file that requests the participants Request to enter the key that identifies them as the conference chairperson 2 30 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 2 5 IVR Properties Conference Chairperson Options and Messages Request Chairperson Select the audio file that prompts the participant Password for the chairperson password Chairperson Password Select the audio file that prompts participants to Failure Message re enter the chairperson password if they enter it incorrectly Chairperson Identifier Enter the key to be used for identifying the Key participant as a chairperson Possible keys are pound key or star Use Chairperson Select this option to enable the caller to join to the Password
188. bles These changes will apply to both applications Registering the Access Database in ODBC Data Sources During installation an Access file is installed on the local hard disk A central database may also be installed separately on the network server In both cases the database file must be registered in the ODBC of the operator workstation in order to access it The Access database can be registered either from the ODBC Control Panel or within the MGC Manager application To register the database in the ODBC Control panel 1 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II On the Start menu click Control Panel D My Documents L My Recent Documents gt My Pictures Sve Gd My computer J My Network Places Help and Support E en search SS LBB MGC Manager ver 7 0 aw 2 Polycom ViaVideo Y Paint fee MGC Manager ver 7 0 0 36 Adobe Photoshop Album 2 0 Starter Ecition Sos All programs gt tog off OY shut Down The Control Panel window opens E Control Panel File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Oa O B Pea Folders ay 2 x 9 4 Address gt Control Panel x Adjust your computer settings for vision hearing and n Installs and troubleshoots hardware a ams and Windows components AB Administrative Tools Configure administrative settings for your computer Automatic Upda deliver important upda o gt Date and Time Set the date time and time zone for your computer sil
189. c switching between participants is enabled Timer Indicates whether automatic switching between participants is enabled or disabled as follows 0 Automatic switching between participants is disabled 1 Automatic switching between participants is enabled Audio Activated This function is relevant when the Lecture Mode is enabled and the Lecturer name is set to Auto Select Indicates if the automatic switching between lecturers is audio activated as follows 0 Automatic switching between lecturers is not audio activated 1 Automatic switching between lecturers is audio activated Lecturer ID Displays the lecturer ID number This number is insignificant A 28 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 12 Event Fields for Event 2 Conference End E aes Indicates the reason for the termination of the conference as follows 2 The conference was terminated by an operator 3 The conference ended at the scheduled end time 4 The conference ended automatically when all the participants disconnected from the conference 252 The conference never started since the scheduled end time was surpassed at startup 253 The conference could not become an Ongoing Conference due to a problem 254 The conference was ended by an MCU reset 255 An unknown error occurred Table A 13 Event Fields for Event 3 Net Channel Connected se car Participant Name The name of the participant Participant I
190. can be Auto Cascaded into one conference The MCU network can support multiple Auto Cascaded conferences simultaneously The cascading is performed by an Ad Hoc Cascade component in the WebCommander which monitors the MCUs The Ad Hoc Cascade component is installed as part of the MGC WebCommander Professional installation When the Ad Hoc Cascade component finds that two or more MCUs are running a conference with the same Conference Numeric ID it checks if the conferences are already cascaded by looking for a cascading link between the conferences If there are no cascading links the conferences are automatically connected using pre defined cascading links If at a later stage the Ad Hoc Cascade component finds an additional MCU running a conference with the same Numeric ID it adds the conference to the cascaded conferences The following apply to Auto Cascaded conferences e In Continuous Presence conferences the layout must be set to full screen e For H 263 4CIF and H 264 Continuous Presence conferences the link will be defined as H 263 CIF e The Auto Cascade feature does not work with H 239 People Content Auto Cascading Setup The following tasks must be performed to implement Auto Cascading e Configure the cascading links using the WebCommander Server Manager e Set up an Auto Cascade Entry Queue on each MCU on which Auto Cascading is to be implemented You must set up identical Ad Hoc Entry Queues and Profiles on each MCU
191. ce and vice versa e MCU level encryption and system handling of encrypted and non encrypted participants are enabled in the system cfg file e Encryption is a purchasable option and is enabled accordingly e Conference level encryption must be set at reservation stage that is during conference definition and cannot be changed once the conference is running In Cascaded conferences the link between the cascaded conferences must be encrypted MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Enabling Encryption at the MCU Level Encryption is enabled for the MCU in the system cfg file When encryption is disabled at the MCU level all encryption options are disabled for all conferences running on that MCU and encryption is not included in the capabilities set declared by the MCU To enable Encryption The Encryption flag that enables encryption at the MCU level must be obtained from Polycom support When enabled encryption can be applied at the conference level and at the participant level When it is disabled all encryption options are disabled for all conferences running on that MCU and encryption is not included in the capabilities set declared by the MCU Encryption should be enabled on the MCU only if the appropriate license was obtained from Polycom In addition you can define whether access to conferences for encrypted and non encrypted participants is done at the conference level or at the participant level by settin
192. ce as chairpersons are validated against the external database The IVR Service is configured to validate the participant request to enter the conference as a chairperson only when the participant enters the chairperson identifier key pound or star keys If a match is found the participant is granted the right to join the conference as chairperson All other participants join the conference as standard participants Ad Hoc Conferencing without External Database Authentication A participant dials in to an Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue and starts a new conference based on the Profile assigned to the Entry Queue In this configuration any participant connecting to the Entry Queue can start a new conference and no security mechanism is applied This mode is usually used in organizations where Ad Hoc conferences are started from within the network and without security breach Starting a conference uses the following method l 2 3 The participant dials in to an Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue The Conference Numeric ID is requested by the system The participant inputs a Numeric ID via his her endpoint remote control using DTMF codes The MCU checks whether a conference with the same Numeric ID is running on the MCU If there is such a conference the participant is moved to that conference If there is no On Going conference with that Numeric ID the system creates a new conference based on the Profile 3 5 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Con
193. ce to dial in undefined Chairperson participants Mute Meet Me participants upon their connection to Chairperson the conference Manage Question and Answer sessions Enable or disable the Roll Call feature 2 8 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 2 1 DTMF Enabled Actions and Permissions Continued Stop the Roll Call names review Invite other participants to join the conference Chairperson in an Audio Only conference End the Conference Chairperson Start and stop recording Chairperson Using Roll Call The Roll Call feature is used in IVR Message Services to record the participant s name and play it back when the participant enters or leaves a conference The purpose of Roll Call is to ensure that all required participants are present and to identify the participants to one another A participant connecting to the conference is asked to record their name The system records the name and plays the recorded name when the participant enters and leaves the conference During an IVR enabled conference the chairperson can request the system to play the names of all connected participants at the beginning of the conference or at any time during the conference The IVR system plays the recorded list of conference attendees one after the other in the order that they entered the conference The recordings are played to all the conference participants The basic flow of Roll Call comprises these stages 1 T
194. ces For more details about Entry Queues see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 8 The Entry Queue Service and the IVR Service must be used in Ad Hoc conferencing This allows callers to initiate an On Going conference without prior scheduling based on conference parameters taken from a Profile assigned to the Entry Queue The system also can verify the participant s right to start such a conference with an external database application MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The IVR service can also be configured to verify the participant s right to join a conference For more details see Chapter 3 IVR Service with Access to the External Database Application on page 3 27 LS Up to 30 IVR Services can be defined for a single MGC unit IVR and Entry Queue Stages Participants attending an I VR enabled conference a conference to which an IVR Service is assigned or connecting to an Entry Queue can be in one of the following stages Greeting Participants connect to the Entry Queue or directly to an IVR enabled conference where they hear an audio Welcome message view the slide in video but not in Audio Only conferencing and are guided through their connection process using voice prompts In the Entry Queue participants are routed to the destination conference according to the conference Numeric ID they enter or according to the conference entry password depending on the system configuration Participant
195. changes or Cancel to abort the operation 7 48 Templates Handling gy MGC Reservation and Participant templates can be created in the database or in Template files Reservation Template and Participant Template files are MGC internal proprietary tools used to organize data The data in these files cannot be easily exchanged between external databases and the MGC Manager template files Microsoft Access or SQL databases can be used to organize the conference and participant data so that the MGC Manager users can easily share data with external applications Participant Template files were referred to as User Template files in previous versions MGC Templates The Reservation Template file is a shell containing the various Reservation templates Usually Reservation templates that have common characteristics are grouped together in the same Reservation Template file Some examples of common characteristics might be that all Reservation templates in the Reservation Templates file relate to the same company or that all the conferences are dial out The Participant Template file is a shell containing the various participants Usually participants who have a common characteristics are grouped together in the same Participant Template file For example all the participants that belong to a certain company You can create as many Participant Template files as needed Reservation templates MGC proprietary templates may be converted into M
196. ck one of the highlighted conference records ES CDR List Prod Mgmt 172 22 138 116 JO x File Connection View Help Prod Mgmt 172 22 138 116 2 lt 2 Start Time Duration Reserved Start Time Reserved Duration GMT Offset Sta Jan 26 2004 02 20 27 00 04 55 Jan 26 2004 02 20 26 02 00 00 2 Te Jan 26 2004 02 10 04 00 02 40 Jan 26 2004 02 10 04 02 00 00 2 Te Jan 26 2004 02 10 01 01 50 48 Jan 26 2004 02 10 01 02 00 00 2 Te Jan 26 2004 02 09 58 01 50 49 Jan 26 2004 02 09 58 02 00 00 2 Te S O04 01 58 44 00 10 40 Jan 26 2004 01 58 44 02 00 00 2 Te 00 11 11 Jan 26 2004 01 58 04 02 00 00 2 Te Retrieve Formatted arzo zoor y 00 14 29 Jan 26 2004 01 50 00 12 00 00 2 Te B Product Management Jan 26 2004 12 26 52 00 10 35 Jan 26 2004 12 26 52 02 00 00 2 Te conference Jan 26 2004 12 25 27 01 38 56 Jan 26 2004 12 25 26 02 00 00 2 Te conference B Jan 26 2004 12 24 01 01 40 17 Jan 26 2004 12 24 00 02 00 00 2 Te BW conference A Jan 26 2004 12 17 41 01 46 32 Jan 26 2004 12 17 41 02 00 00 2 Tew 4 a For Help press F1 C u 4 3 Select one of the following options Retrieve To retrieve the conference raw data in an unformatted format and save it to a text file whose extension is cdr This data can be transferred to an external program such as Microsoft Excel for billing purposes For a sample of an unformatted conference file see Figure 9 1 Unformatted CDR Record on
197. confirm the new set 6 44 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Defining MGC Manager General Defaults To define MGC Manager defaults l Right click the MGC Manager Default icon A pop up menu appears Add MGC Manager Defaults Click Add MGC Manager Defaults The MGC Manager Defaults dialog box opens MGC Manager Defaults x Name l Owner M General Defaults J Save Participant J Linked Party I Linked Party Message m Conference Templates In DB J Show Time In DB Conference Templates J Show Past Time As Current Time Cancel In the Name field enter the name of the defaults set The Owner field displays the name of the user to whom the MGC Manager Default set is assigned This field is disabled for users with no permission to modify write database tables Users with Administrator permission can read and write all database tables can assign the defaults set to any registered user 6 45 Chapter 6 Using a Database 5 Define the following parameters Table 6 3 MGC Manager Default options as ae General Defaults Conference Templates in DB Save Participant When enabled the Save Participant check box appears in the Participant Properties dialog box enabling the user to save the participant properties to the Participant template database Linked Party When enabled the Linked Participant check box appears in the Participant Properties dialog
198. cted Continued a rs Secondary Cause Relevant only if the Participant State is Secondary The cause for the secondary connection not being able to connect the video channels as follows 1 Restrict 2 SM comp 3 Bit rate for example when 6B is needed but not supported 4 LSD 5 HSD 6 MLP 7 H MLP 8 QCIF 9 Video frame rate 10 H 243 bad behavior 255 Other Table A 32 Event Fields for Event 18 New Undefined Participant Eee el Pee Participant Name Participant ID Connection Type The name of the participant The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU The connection type as follows 0 Dial out 5 Dial in 6 Direct A 49 Appendix A CDR File Fields A 50 Table A 32 Event Fields for Event 18 New Undefined Participant Continued es ee eee Bonding Mode 1 Net Number Of Channels Net Channel Width Net Service Name Number Type Indicates whether bonding is enabled or disabled Bonding is a communication protocol that aggregates from two up to thirty 64 Kbps B channels together to look like one large bandwidth channel Possible values are 0 Bonding is disabled 1 Bonding is enabled 255 Auto The number of channels as follows 255 Auto Otherwise in range of 1 30 The band width of each channel This value is always 0 which represents a band width of 1B which is the only band width that is currently supporte
199. d The Network Service as defined in the system An empty string indicates the default network service Indicates whether or not the line is restricted as follows 27 Restricted line 28 Non restricted line 255 Unknown or unimportant Indicates whether the line is a voice or a video line as follows 0 The line is a data line Video amp Data 1 The line is a voice line Audio Only 255 Unknown Relevant for dial out only The type of telephone number as follows 0 Unknown 1 International 2 National 3 Network specific 4 Subscriber 6 Abbreviated 255 Taken from Network Service default MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 32 Event Fields for Event 18 New Undefined Participant Continued eee Net Sub Service Relevant for dial out only Name The Network sub service An empty string means that MCU selects the default sub service Number of The number of participant phone numbers Participant Phone The participant phone number is the CLI Calling Line Numbers Identification as identified by the MCU Number of MCU The number of MCU phone numbers Phone Numbers The MCU phone number is the number dialed by the participant to connect to the MCU Participant and One or more fields one field for each participant and MCU Phone MCU phone number Numbers The participant phone numbers are listed first followed by the MCU phone numbers Identification Relevant f
200. d as the dial out alias for the links from the slave conferences while the name of the slave conference Slave1 is used as the alias identifying the dial in participant used as the link from the slave conference Configuration Example In the configuration example shown in Figure 1 9 each of the Slave conferences includes one dial out participant used as the link to the master conference The dial out alias for each conference is the MCU prefix 1719 and the name of the master conference MasterConference The master conference MasterConference includes three dial in participants whose aliases are the names of their originating slave conferences Slavel Slave2 and Slave3 DTMF enabled cascading can also be applied to H 323 Enhanced Cascading conferences For detail see Using DTMF Codes in Cascading Conferences on page 1 45 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Figure 1 9 illustrates the Enhanced Cascading links between conferences MasterConference e Party 1 e Party 2 e Slave1 e Slave2 e Slave3 MCU oe ha Prefix 1719 Slave1 Slave2 Slave3 e Link 1 e Link 2 e Link 3 e Party 11 e Party 21 e Party 31 e Party 12 e Party 22 e Party 32 e Party 13 e Party 23 e Party 33 MCU 2 MCU 3 MCU 4 Prefix 101 Prefix 102 Prefix 103 Figure 1 9 Enhanced Cascading with H 323 Links Dial up MasterConference M lt M MCU A MCU B Conference Name MasterC
201. d by the conferencing service provider as voice messages and are configured like any other voice message in the system The audio file containing additional DTMF codes that can be used by the chairperson when two help menu messages are recorded for the chairperson operation This file is played after the file assigned to the Chairperson Help Menu 1 2 37 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Table 2 7 IVR Properties General Voice Messages Continued Participant Help The audio file listing DTMF codes that can be used Menu 1 by the ordinary participant The voice message that can be recorded for one Help file is limited to 30 seconds To overcome this limitation you can have two audio files played one after the other as a single menu Menu 1 is the first file to be played Participant Help The audio file listing additional DTMF codes that can Menu 2 be used by the standard participant when two help menu messages are recorded for the participant operation This file is played after the file assigned to the Participant Help Menu 1 Invite Help Menu The audio file listing DTMF codes available to the participant chairperson during the Invite session Voting Help Menu The audio file listing DTMF codes available to the participant chairperson who controls the voting session depending on the configuration in the DTMF codes dialog box Maximum Indicates the participant cannot join the destination Participants conference
202. d from the clipboard to the target Reservation Template file or Reservation database A new icon is added under the Conference List or Group icon Click Save on the Template menu when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation Template file or click Save Database on the 8 53 Chapter 8 Templates Handling Database menu when the Reservation template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar Modifying Reservation Templates 8 54 When the same Reservation template is used repeatedly you may need to modify its parameters when conditions change When modifying a Reservation template you can modify Global conference information Individual participants information To modify global conference information L In the Reservation Template file or Reservations in Database window double click the Conferences List or Group icon to expand the list of Reservation templates Right click the icon of the Reservation template that you want to modify and then click Properties se weboffice_v1 z Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Default Attending Print Template Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Paste As Ctrl P Delete Del The Conference Properties dialog box opens Modify the necessary conference properties For a detailed description of the conference properties see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volu
203. d to announce the SilencelT feature options Return to Conference Indicates which DTMF code the Muted participant must enter to return to the conference muted Unmute Reminder Indicates which DTMF code the participant must enter to unmute his her line after returning to the conference muted Unmute and Return to Indicates which DTMF code the Conference participant must enter to return to the conference unmuted Adjust SilencelT Indicates which DTMF code the Sensitivity and participant must enter to adjust Unmute the sensitivity of the SilencelT algorithm and return to the conference unmuted Disable SilencelT and Indicates which DTMF code the Unmute participant must enter to disable the SilencelT option and return to the conference unmuted 2 21 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Table 2 2 IVR Message Types by Message Category Continued Message Category Message Type Description SilencelT Participant Detected Informs all participants that the cont as Noisy line of a specified participant has been detected as noisy and has been muted Conference ID Requests the participant chairperson to use the required Conference ID to connect to the conference 10 Click Download File to download the appropriate audio file to the Polycom MCU memory The Jnstall File dialog box opens Install File Prod Mgmt 172 22 138 116 x fe sar Install fI Browse Proceed Le _ 11 Click
204. dding Participants to a Reservation Template eee 7 33 Adding a Linked Participant 2 0 0 0 cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 7 34 Adding an Embedded Participant 0 00 00 cceeceeceeeceteeeeeeees 7 34 Defining Participants in the Database eseeseececeteeeeeeeeeees 7 35 Defining a New Participant during the Reservation Template Definition ee ceeeeceeseeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneenees 7 35 Defining a New Participant Template Directly in the Database sairone noa ERE NRE 7 39 Saving the Database 0 ec esessceesseseeeseeeneeeeeneeeteeeeeeeeneeeeeesees 7 42 Opening Additional User Tables ececeeseeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 43 Deleting a Reservation Template from the Database 7 43 Adding a Template Group to the Database ec eeeeeeeseeneees 7 44 vi MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Refreshing the Database cceeceeceesceseceneceseeseceseceaeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeeenees 7 46 Closing the Database Tables 0 000 eceeseceseeeceseceeeeeeeceeeeneeeneenneeseeens 7 47 Templates Handling ssc ccocnkteten saree eee esas anes 8 1 MGC Templates 0 0 00 cccccccccescecssseeseeceseeseeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeesseeeneeesseeenes 8 1 Participant Template Files ccccccscceescceeseeeseeeeseeeeseeeneeensneeees 8 2 Creating a New Participant Template File eee 8 2 Adding Participants to a Participant Template File 8 4 Defining a Participant Directly oe eeseesecneeeteeeteeene
205. dditional IVR Services or languages you can skip this section and the section describing the definition of a new IVR Service e The audio files must be converted into the MGC internal format aca before MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To define the IVR Properties 1 Connect to the MGC unit MCU 2 Expand the MCU tree and then expand the MCU Configuration tree 3 Right click the VR Msg Services icon and then click Properties fig Product Management Minor ga MCU Configuration ie Cards a Connections IVR Msg Services New IVR Service New Entry Queue Service Paste As Gtr P Gorey T Operators a Gateway Configuration T Profiles op Recording Links F The JVR Properties dialog box opens x Supported Languages ENGLISH FRENCH RUSSIAN Add Message File cancel _ This dialog box lists the currently used languages that were selected from the languages supported by the system 4 To adda new language click the plus button Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services 2 18 The Custom Language dialog box opens Custom language x New Language New Language ITALIAN cmos In the New Language field enter the name of the language to include in the Supported Languages list LS The language name cannot include a period Click OK T
206. dialog box opens Default Conference Properties General Scheduler Settings Participants Video Sources Meet Me Per Cont Recording Name Default Conference Conf Entry Password Duration 2 00 Web Chairperson Password Billing Numeric ID User Detined 1 I Entyy Queue Access User Defined 2 IV Meet Me Per Conf User Defined 3 es Conference Type Media _ r Supported Network Video Session Standard C Audio Cc IP Video Switching Meeting Room Video Audio IPLISDN Transcoding ATM MPI Operator Continuous Presence Classic X Remarks Update Remark Remarks History Conference Parameters x The conference properties are logically grouped in the following tabs The conference definition options include both Audio Only and Video and Audio conferences For information on the conference definition parameters when defining Video and Audio conferences see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining a New Video Conference For Audio Only and Audio Look and Feel settings refer to the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 2 Defining New On Going Audio Conferences General defines the conference name duration password and type 7 11 Chapter 7 Database Templates 7 12 Scheduler defines the duration and time parameters option is enabled in the MGC Manager Defaults in the MGC Databas
207. dice conf 512kbps Auto Continuous Presence i Sg Ss J H 323 conf alpha 17 kerz alpha 21 384kbps 24 G722 1 Sir Video Switching bd be H323 cnf alpha 22 JEpH 323 conf alpha 17 128kbps 16 G728 Siren7 Video Switching g x or H323 Lecture Mode seapyse3 cnf alpha 22 384kbps 56 G722 G711 Video Switching a Lecture Show alpha 1 ate sea H323 Lecture Mode 384kbps Auto Continuous Presence The asterisk that appears in the title bar indicates that the database was modified and must be saved to retain the changes 16 To save changes to the database click the Save button E on the toolbar or select Save Database from the Database menu DataBase Directory Options Window Save Database Refresh Database F9 Filter Login Open D B Reservation Template Open D B Participant Template Logout amp Clear Login Record Load Defaults From DB Manage databases Database ODBC 7 20 Starting a Conference from a Reservation Template Using the Reservation template you can schedule a conference to start MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II immediately On Going Conference or to start automatically at a predefined date and time Reservation For more information see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Starting an On Going Conference from a Reservation Template Listing the Participants in a Reservation Template To view
208. dow MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Defining the participant during conference setup such as an On Going Conference or a Reservation and saving the new participants to an existing Participant Template file Defining the participants during the creation of a Reservation template and saving the new participants to an existing Participant Template file Copying the participant parameters from an On Going Conference or a Reservation to the Participant Template file Defining a Participant Directly The MGC Manager application does not need to be connected to an MCU when you add the participant to the Participant Template file To define a new Participant Template l Open a Participant Template file This is where the new Participant template will be stored To open an existing Participant Template file refer to Opening a Participant Template File on page 8 7 Right click in the Participant Template file window Do not right click on a Participant template icon as this displays a different menu Click New Participant CELTES jo x Name Participant Numbers IP Address SIP Address Channels New Participant Paste Paste amp s 8 5 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 8 6 The Participant Properties dialog box opens Default Participant Properties Exi Identification Advanced Name Connection Type Interface Type Dialin ISDN 7 Participant Numbers MCU
209. ds for Events 108 112 Operator Move Participant to Conference Attend Participant to Operator Conference Continued iS he Number Type Net Sub Service Name Number of Participant Phone Numbers Number of MCU Phone Numbers Participant and MCU Phone Numbers Relevant for dial out participants The type of telephone number as follows 0 Unknown 1 International 2 National 3 Network specific 4 Subscriber 6 Abbreviated 255 Taken from Network Service default Relevant for dial out only The network sub service name An empty string means that MCU selects the default sub service The number of participant phone numbers In a dial in connection the participant phone number is the CLI Calling Line Identification as identified by the MCU In a dial out connection participant phone numbers are the phone numbers dialed by the MCU for each participant channel The number of MCU phone numbers In a dial in connection the MCU phone number is the number dialed by the participant to connect to the MCU In a dial out connection the MCU phone number is the MCU CLI number as seen by the participant The MCU phone numbers are entered in the MCU Number field in the Network Service One or more fields one field for each participant and MCU phone number The participant phone numbers are listed first followed by the MCU phone numbers A 61 Appendix A CDR File Fields A 62 Table A
210. e 1 Inthe MGC Manager main window right click the On Going Conferences icon and then click New Conference The Conference Properties General dialog box opens allowing you to define the general parameters of the conference 2 Define the conference General parameters such as name duration passwords optional and whether the conference is Standard or a Meeting Room For a detailed description of conference setup see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 3 In the Supported Network box select IP 4 Inthe Video Session box click the Continuous Presence option and then select Software from the list Conference Properties xi General Settings Patticipants Video Sources Resource Force Recording Name Finance Cont Entry Password Duration 2 00 Web Chairperson Password Billing Numeric ID MCU Product Management User Defined 1 siz I Entry Queue Access User Defined 2 J Meet Me Per Conf a eooo Conference Type p Media Ca r Video Session Standard C Audio EP C Video Switching C Meeting Room Video Audio C IPLISDN ATM MPI C Transcoding C Operator Continuous Presents Classic i Remarks History 1 26 5 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Click the Settings tab The Conference Properties Settings dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Product Management E x General Settings Participant
211. e For a description of the fields see Table A 48 Event Fields for Event 113 Conference Remarks on page A 65 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 3 CDR Event Types Continued User Defined Information Event Specific Fields CDR event code 3010 Participant information was added For a description of the fields see Table A 49 Event Fields for Event 3010 User Defined Information on page A 66 The following tables describe the fields which are specific to each type of event Table A 4 Event Fields for Event 1 Conference Start BS Stand By Automatic Termination Indicates whether the conference was a standby conference or not A standby conference is a conference in which the MCU initiates the communication with dial out or direct participants Communication is established only at the reconnect command from operator Possible values are 0 The conference was not a standby conference 1 The conference was a standby conference Indicates whether the conference ended automatically when all participants disconnected This applies only when two participants have already joined the conference Possible values are 0 The conference did not end automatically 1 The conference ended automatically A 17 Appendix A CDR File Fields A 18 Table A 4 Event Fields for Event 1 Conference Start Continued a ie Conference Transfer Rate Restrict Mode
212. e message is skipped and the participant will hear the next prompt in the IVR menu If the IVR Service will be used in conjunction with an Entry Queue Service and the conference is set to Entry Queue Access forcing participants to go through both queues when connecting to the conference the participant will hear the Welcome message twice once via the Entry Queue Service and the second time via the IVR Service In such a case you can disable the General Welcome Message in the IVR Service or select None as the Welcome Message 2 27 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services 7 When the IVR Service Welcome Message check box is enabled you can select the various audio messages that will be played when the participant enters the conference IVR queue Table 2 4 IVR Properties Welcome Message General Welcome e None to skip the General Welcome message Message for example if the participant already heard the message in the Entry Queue Message to be played when the participant first connects to the conferencing service and enters the conference IVR queue without connecting through an Entry Queue The list includes all the audio files that were downloaded to the MGC unit s memory for this Message type Add Message File If you have not downloaded the audio files prior to the definition of the IVR Service click the button to download the audio file now For instructions see step 8 on page 2 29 Conference Select this
213. e releasing the data token from one participant and transferring it to another for example when you want to transfer the control over the remote sites to another participant 1 Inthe Status pane the Browser pane or the Monitor pane right click the appropriate On Going Conference icon and then click Properties The Conference Properties General dialog box opens 2 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Click the Ongoing State tab to view the conference status The Conference Properties Ongoing State dialog box opens weekly Properties Product Management xj General Scheduler Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Ongoing State Recording Conference Status FECC LSD FECC LSD Token Holder MCU Name Product Management Empty One Participant At Most pure Latico FECC LSD Rate ott N Withdraw FECC LSD Token A I7 Not Full I Faulty Connection I7 Resources Deficiency Jel Doma seed Chair Control Chair Token Holder Recording None MCU Name Product Management Audio Source Withdraw Chair Token None pl Exclusive Speaker Content None h Content Token Holder Current Cascade Mode fhe SSCS one i lone Withdraw Content Token Refresh Video The FECC LSD pane shows the current FECC LSD information for this conference Table 1 2 FECC LSD Options for an On Going Conference FECC LSD Token The name of the pa
214. e MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 8 A new AV Message Service cannot be defined while there are active conferences and reservations on the MCU To define the new AV Message Service 1 Connect to the MCU 2 Double click the MCU icon or click the plus icon next to the MCU icon to expand the MCUs options 3 Ensure that there are no active conferences or reservations currently on the MCU 4 Double click the MCU Configuration icon or click the plus icon next to the MCU Configuration icon to expand the MCUs Configuration options 5 Right click the AV Msg Services icon and then click New AV Service na MCU Configuration WE cards ae Connections H A IVR Msg Services i AV Message Services H amp New AV Service MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The AV Message Service dialog box opens AY Message Service x Name l Add new file Video File Audio File Audio On Hold File V Set Music Welcome Period 1 00 Cancel Only files that were downloaded and are stored in the MCU are shown in the Video File Audio file and Audio On Hold file lists If you have not downloaded the files prior to the AV Message Service definition you can do it now using the Add New File option For instructions see step 8 on page page 4 8 6 Inthe Name box enter the service name 7 Define the following parameters Table 4 1 Message Service options Les Video File Select th
215. e Manager i 5 The Scheduler tab appears only if the Show Time in DB Conference Template application Settings defines the conference parameters such as line rate audio algorithms audio tones video and more Participants adds participants to the reservation either from the Participant database or by defining new participants Video Sources selects the video layout when the session type is set to Continuous Presence or Software CP and enables Lecture Mode Meet Me Per Conference defines Meeting Rooms and Meet Me Per Conference Reservation templates when the General Meet Me Per Conf check box is selected Recording sets up recording options Conference General Parameters 4 Enter the template name in the Name box and fill in the other general parameters MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Setting the Scheduler Parameters 5 Click the Scheduler tab to define the conference starting date and time The Conference Properties Scheduler dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri 1 The date and time parameters are used for filtering enabling you to list all the templates that should be used to start an On Going Conference on the selected date This can be done if you do not want to reserve an actual conference on the MCU and use MCU resources 6 Define the start date and time 7 13 Chapter 7 Database Templates Defining the Settings Parameters
216. e Start Continue 4 Conference End Net Channel Connected Net Channel Disconnected A 8 CDR event code 5001 Additional information about a Conference Start event For a description of the fields see Table A 8 Event Fields for Event 5001 Conference Start Continue 4 on page A 26 Note An additional Conference Start Continue 4 event will be written to the CDR each time the value of one of the following conference fields is modified e Chairperson Web Password e Billing Code e Used Defined These additional events will only contain the value of the modified field CDR event code 2 Contains the conference termination cause For a description of the fields see Table A 12 Event Fields for Event 2 Conference End on page A 29 Note There is one Conference End event per conference and it is always the last event in the file CDR event code 3 The connection of a network channel For a description of the fields see Table A 13 Event Fields for Event 3 Net Channel Connected on page A 29 CDR event code 4 The disconnection of a network channel For a description of the fields see Table A 16 Event Fields for Event 4 Net Channel Disconnected on page A 33 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 3 CDR Event Types Continued Participant Connected Participant Disconnected Participant Disconnected Continue 1 Remote Communication Mode Participant Errors
217. e X 5 21 Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences 5 22 The following parameters display the Cascading status Table 5 1 Participant Properties Cascading Parameters Cae Terminal Number Displays the terminal number as assigned by the identity MCU The first number indicates the terminal s sequential number The second number indicates the MCU number Cascade Status Master indicates that the participant is part of a slave conference and is used as a link to a Master conference Slave indicates that the participant is part of a Master conference and is used as a link to a Slave conference Displays the name of the default Network Service Sub Service Name Displays the terminal name if one exists Node Type Terminal indicates that the participant is not used as a link between Cascading conferences If the participant is the link between two conferences the terminal number is 0 and the conference properties to which it is linked are shown The Terminal number of a link to a second Slave conference will be 0 2 0 terminal number and 2 is the second conference and the Cascade Status is Slave which is the status of the second conference If the participant is part of the Master conference but not the link the MCU number is 1 and the Cascading Status is Master When participants connect or disconnect from the conference the participants list on all the endpoints is updated accordingly In addition
218. e as Standard Select the Media Audio and Video Supported Networks all Networks and Video Session For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Conference General Parameters Default Conference Properties Product Management x General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Conf Recording Name Default Conference Duration 2 00 a Biling ne 7 MCU I Enty Queue Access I Meet Me Per Cont Conference Type p Media Conf Entry Password iz Web Chairperson Passwort Numeric ID o y User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined Supported Network Video Session Standard C Audio Je Video Switching C Meeting Room Video Audio G IP ISDN C Transcoding ATM MPI C Operator C Continuous Presence Classic z Remarks Remarks History p Cancel Apply Help If you are defining a Reservation click the Scheduler tab Select the conference Starting Date and Starting Time For more details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 9 Defining a New Reservation Click the Settings tab 4 15 Chapter 4 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences The Conference Properties Settings dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Product Management x General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Pe
219. e installed on a LAN server and they can be accessed by all the MGC Manager users on the network and from the WebCommander site over the Internet using the Web browser In addition operators can have personal databases installed on their computers Unless defined as shared the personal databases cannot be accessed by other network users and can be used only from a specific operator workstation Users upgrading from previous versions can convert the existing template files to the active database It is still possible however to work with the template files together with the database For more details on converting template files to database format see Chapter 8 Converting MGC Templates to Database Templates on page 8 18 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Logging into the User Tables of the Database The User Tables are used to store Reservation and Participant templates The tables are organized in Template Groups Participants Table Participant Template 1 Group 1 Participant Template 2 Participant Template 3 Participant Template 4 Group 2 Participant Template 5 Participant Template 6 Root Participant Template 7 Group 3 Participant Template 8 Participant Template 9 Template Participant Template 9 Reservations Table Reservation Template 1 Reservation Template 2 Reservation Template 3 Group 1 Reservation Template 4 Reservation Template 5 Reservation Template 6 Re
220. e link from conference Slave1 The alias that will be used to identify the dial in participant can be the name of the calling slave conference Slave1 In the Master conference define a dial in participant as the link from conference Slave2 The alias that will be used to identify the dial in participant can be the name of the calling slave conference Slave2 In the Master conference define a dial in participant as the link from conference Slave3 The alias that will be used to identify the dial in participant can be the name of the calling slave conference Slave3 1 55 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings gy Monitoring Monitoring of cascading conferences with an H 323 Enhanced Cascading link is done in the same way as with an ISDN link You can link several slave conferences to one master conference as in Star cascading topology For information on Star Cascading using the H 243 Standard see Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences Ad Hoc Auto Cascading 1 56 The Auto Cascade feature enables automatic cascading of Ad Hoc conferences over multiple MCUs For details see Ad Hoc Auto Cascading on page 3 16 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Configuring Large Video Switching Conferences gg The default standard Audio card configuration allows the card to support only up to 16 participants in a Video Switching conference However if your system does not include Audio cards you can conf
221. e list of conference records CDR List Prod Mgmt 172 22 138 116 lol x File Connection View Help Prod Mgmt 172 22 138 116 7 2 heme __ tr tme_ bration _ Reserved start Time Reserver Duration aT offset tatus__e S roLycom Feb 02 2004 01 11 25 02 00 00 Feb 02 2004 01 11 25 02 00 00 2 Ongoing conference Ba detties Feb 02 2004 12 54 14 00 20 33 Feb 02 2004 12 54 14 02 00 00 2 Terminated by operator Proost Management Feb 02 2004 11 43 14 01 59 56 Feb 02 2004 11 43 14 02 00 00 2 Terminated when end time passed test Feb 01 2004 05 17 55 01 59 56 Feb O01 2004 05 17 55 02 00 00 2 Terminated when end time passed Ba debbies Feb 01 2004 04 07 16 01 59 56 FebO1 2004 04 07 16 02 00 00 2 Terminated when end time passed B Pouvcom Feb 01 2004 04 06 29 01 59 55 Feb 01 2004 04 06 29 02 00 00 2 Terminated when end time passed B Pouvcom Feb 01 2004 03 33 59 00 32 00 Feb 01 2004 03 33 59 02 00 00 2 Terminated by operator HB debbiez Feb 01 2004 03 31 15 00 35 43 Feb 01 2004 03 31 15 02 00 00 2 Terminated by operator E debbie Feb 01 2004 03 30 44 01 59 55 Feb 01 2004 03 30 44 02 00 00 Terminated when end time passed Tesz Feb 01 2004 03 10 25 00 00 57 Feb 01 2004 03 10 25 00 01 00 2 Terminated when end time passed P Polycom Feb 01 2004 01 03 11 00 13 26 Feb 01 2004 01 03 11 02 00 00 2 Terminated by operator of 4 gt Connected to Prod Mgmt NN yg To disconnect from the MCU 1 C
222. e name of the video file that is displayed when the participant connects to an Attended conference to which this message service is assigned This video slide is displayed when the participant is in the Greeting or On Hold stages Audio Select the name of the audio message file that is played when the participant is in the Greeting stage of a Welcome No Wait or Attended Wait conference Audio on Hold Select the name of the audio message file that is played when the participant is placed on hold If the same file is used for the Greeting and On Hold stages the same file must be selected in both fields 4 7 Chapter 4 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences 4 8 Table 4 1 Message Service options Continued PE Set Music Select this check box to play music from an external device while the participant is on hold This option is relevant only if the music extension is installed in the MCU Welcome period Define the length of time in minutes that the welcome slide is to be displayed before the participant automatically connects in to the conference This option is relevant only for Welcome No Wait conferences If the audio and video files were not downloaded to the MCU prior to the definition of the AV Message Service using the Send File utility you can download them now Inthe AV Message Service dialog box click the Add New File button to download the files to the MCU The Jnstall File dial
223. e on the Database menu when the Reservation or Participant template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively for all types click the Save button on the toolbar Deleting Participants from a Reservation Template 8 46 If a Reservation template contains participants who are no longer needed delete them to save disk space To delete a participant from a Reservation template 1 2 Open the Reservation Template file or Reservation database In the Reservation Template file window expand the Conferences List icon to list the Reservation templates In the Reservations in Database window expand the Groups tree to locate the group containing the desired Reservation template Double click the icon of the Reservation template whose participant you want to delete A list of participants appears below the Reservation template s icon Right click the icon of the participant to be removed and then click Delete Gay Slice Copy As Copy Ctrl C Cut trl x Delete Dial Out Ctrl amp Line Rates gt Link participant Properties The participant is deleted The participant s icon is removed from the participants list Click Save on the Template menu when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation Template file or click Save Database on the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Database menu when the Reservation template is stored in a database to sa
224. e on the Template menu when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation Template file or click Save Database on the Database menu when the Reservation template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar 8 56 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Printing the Template Information The MGC Manager enables you to print the template information to a text file printer or clipboard to be imported to an external application In addition you can define the date starting time and duration that should be defined to set a conference reservation based on this template It allows you to use the printed data for scheduling conferences for the next day week month etc You can also print the name of the operator that should schedule the conference To print the Template information 1 Open the Reservation Template file or Reservation database that contains the conference to be printed 2 Double click the Conferences List or Groups icon to expand the list of Reservation templates 3 Right click the Reservation template icon to print and then click Print Template sea weboffice_v1 Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Defaulk Atte g Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl Paste As Ctrl P Delete Del Properties 8 57 Chapter 8 Templates Handling The Scheduler dialog box opens Scheduler xj Oper Name Re
225. e per Conferences and Meeting Rooms The MGC Manager provides a digital recording option with the Polycom Conference Recorder enabling recording of the conference audio channel of both Audio Only and video conferences For more information see the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 8 Recording 9 Click OK to complete the Reservation template definition The Conference Properties dialog box closes The new Reservation template is added to the conference list The Reservation template is added to the Reservation Template file window below the Conferences List icon An asterisk appears in the title of the Reservation Template file window to indicate that changes have been made If the list of conferences is not currently displayed double click the Conferences List icon or click the plus icon next to the Conference List icon to display the list E ResTemplatesFile2 0 x 10 To save the changes on the Template menu click Save Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar 8 15 Chapter 8 Templates Handling The asterisk is removed from the title of the Reservation Template file window In the widow shown below are illustrated the different template types including their icons E ResTemplatesFile2 15 x Conferences List i Audio Conference a as Operator Conference oso 4B Video Conference Opening a Reservation Template File To work with a Reservation tem
226. e played in each case If the files were not downloaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you want to add new audio files click Add Message File to download the appropriate audio file to the MGC unit s memory For the downloading procedure see step 8 on page 2 29 Table 2 6 IVR Conference Password Messages ee ee ee Request Select the audio file that prompts the participant for Password the conference password Retry Password Select the audio file that requests the participant to enter the conference password again when failing to enter the correct password Request Digit Select the audio file that prompts the participant to press any key 16 Click Next The General dialog box opens locked aca Lock ON Lock OFF Billing Number Added to 0 amp 4 Removed from G84 Next Q amp A Questioner Secure ON Secure OFF Requires Chairperson ha Lock ON EAEE v Add Message File The General dialog box lists additional events that can occur before or during a conference You can assign an audio file to an event and the 2 33 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services message in the file will be played when the event occurs If no audio file is assigned to an event no message will be played when the event occurs want to add new audio files click Add Message File to download the appropriate audio file to the MGC units memory For the downloading procedure see step 8 on page 2 29 I
227. e played when the participant enters an Failure invalid password usually when that password is already in use Change Password Amessage played when the conference password Successful was successfully changed MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 2 7 IVR Properties General Voice Messages Continued Message Type Self Mute Self Unmute Chairperson Help Menu 1 Chairperson Help Menu 2 A confirmation message that is played when participants request to mute their line A confirmation message that is played when participants request to unmute their line A help menu which is played upon a request from the chairperson listing the operations their respective DTMF codes that can be performed by the chairperson The playback can be stopped any time The voice message that can be recorded for one Help file is limited to 30 seconds You can have two audio files play one after the other as a single menu The grouping of two audio files into one Help menu can be done for the Chairperson Help menu and also for the Participant Help menu If you configure two help menu messages the two messages are heard in sequence as one menu Menu 1 is the first file to be played Note If you intend to modify the default DTMF codes the default voice message files for the help menus that are shipped with the system will have to be replaced with new recordings that list the new DTMF codes The help menus are usually recorde
228. e reservation in the Reservations window of the database These participants can be copied from one reservation to another However the participants retain their embedded characteristics and are considered as unique participants Therefore when modifying the properties of an embedded participant only that participant is affected and not all occurrences in other reservations The MGC Manager enables you to add participants to an existing Reservation template There are several methods to add participants to a Reservation template e Add a new participant to an existing Reservation template defining the specific participant parameters There are two methods using the Reservation template right click or Reservation properties Participants tab When you add a new participant to a Database Reservation template you can specify whether they are linked or embedded e Select the Participants from the Participant database or Participant Template file during the definition of the Reservation template in the Conference Properties Participant dialog box If you add a participant from a Participant database to a Reservation template in the same database the participant will be added as a linked participant e Copy participants from a Participant Template file or Participant database to a Reservation template If you copy a participant from a Participant database to a Reservation template in the same database the participant will be added as a lin
229. e your volume press pound nine To ask a question press star two two To cancel your question press pound two two 2 69 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Table 2 15 Default IVR Messages Continued Message Type Message Text FileName General The available touch tone keypad INVITHP ACA Invite Help menu actions are as follows To exit this menu press any key To obtain an outside line and dial out to an invitee press star four To admit an invitee to the conference and invite another participant press star one To disconnect the invitee and invite another participant press star two To admit an invitee to the conference and return to the conference press star three To disconnect the invitee and return to the conference press star four General Voting The available touch tone keypad VOTEHLP ACA Help menu actions are as follows To exit this menu press any key To vote press star eight one To end the voting session and get the results press pound eight one To start a new voting session press star eight two To cancel the voting session press pound eight two Roll Call User After the tone please state your NAMERCRD ACA name recording name request Roll Call Playing The name you have recorded NAMEIS ACA the recorded name is here the system will play the for the user to get name confirmation 2 70 MGC Manager User s Guide
230. ease my Broadcasting volume Everyone Decrease my Broadcasting volume Everyone Mute all but me Chairperson Cancel Mute All but me Chairperson Change Password Chairperson Place conference on hold chairperson Reinstate on hold conference Chairperson Mute dial in participants Chairperson Cancel mute dial in participants Chairperson Start voting session Chairperson stop voting session chairperson i i Chairperson Cancel voting session Chairperson Ask a_question Everyone Cancel my question Everyone Next in line question chairperson End current question Chairperson Cancel all questions chairperson Dial out to Invitee Chairperson Admit invitee amp continue dial out Chairperson Disconnect invitee amp continue dial out chairperson Admit invitee amp return to conference Chairperson Disconnect invitee amp return to conference Chairperson Everyone chairperson Chairperson chairperson Chairperson Chairperson conference Termination Chairperson start Click amp view Everyone Change to Chairperson Everyone Increase Listening volume Everyone Decrease Listening volume Everyone override Mute All but Me Everyone For a full list of IVR messages and their DTMF codes see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 6 Using DTMF Codes during a Conference 2 64 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Default IVR Prompts and Messages The system is shipped with the following audio prompts and messages Table 2 15 Default IVR Me
231. ecording System Link Event on page A 56 SIP Private CDR event code 28 Extensions Contains SIP Private Extensions information For a description of the fields see Table A 38 Event Fields for Event 28 SIP Private Extensions on page A 57 Operator Terminate CDR event code 100 Conference The conference was terminated by an operator For a description of the fields see Table A 39 Event Fields for Event 100 Operator Terminate Conference on page A 57 Operator Add CDR event code 101 Participant A participant was added during the conference by an operator For a description of the fields see Table A 23 Event Fields for Events 10 101 105 Reserved Participant Operator Add Participant Operator Update Participant on page A 38 Operator Add CDR event code 2101 Participant Additional information about an Operator Add Continue 1 Participant event For a description of the fields see Table A 24 Event Fields for Events 2010 2101 2105 Reserved Participant Continue 1 Operator Add Participant Continue 1 Operator Update Participant Continue 1 on page A 41 A 13 Appendix A CDR File Fields Table A 3 CDR Event Types Continued Operator Delete Participant Operator Disconnect Participant Operator Reconnect Participant Operator Update Participant Operator Update Participant Continue 1 CDR event code 102 A participant was deleted from the conference by an operator
232. ecsssessseeeseeesteeesteeeenes 1 39 Setting Auto Extend at the MCU Level 0 eceesseeeteeees 1 40 Setting Auto Extend at the Conference Level c cece 1 41 Cascading Conferences 0 cccccecssscsceeseceseceeeseeeseeeseseeeeseeseeeseeenseees 1 43 Simple Cascading Modes cccsccccscessecesseceseeseseceeeeseeeneeenes 1 43 MCU CLUSTER iss iencyatigicinesinaiaaiiest REAA 1 43 MCU Rollyo i ccccieicesscresidscess cual ectessentioesttilattecsstiwerstens 1 45 Using DTMF Codes in Cascading Conferences eeeeeeeee 1 45 Table of Contents Simple Cascading ecsescsesssscsccesceeseeesceecesscesscessceseeesceeeeees 1 46 Simple Cascading with an ISDN Link eee eeeeeeeee 1 46 Simple Cascading with an H 323 Link oe ee eeeeeeeeeee 1 49 Enhanced Cascading with H 323 Links ceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 52 Ad Hoc Auto Cascading cc ceccescceseceneceseceeceseeeaeeeaeeeeceaeeeaeees 1 56 Configuring Large Video Switching Conferences 000 eeeeeeeeeneee 1 57 Automatic Line Rate Detection 0 0 eeceescescececeeeceeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeees 1 59 IVR and Entry Queue Services 000 eee eee eee 2 1 What is an IVR Service oo eeeesceeseceseeneeeseceseceaeeaeceseeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeens 2 2 IVR and Entry Queue Stages cee eeeeeceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeneeeneeeeees 2 3 Conference ACCESS occ eeeeeeeeseceeeseesecseeseeseeeecesesaseeeeseeseseeseaees 2 4 Conference IVR ACCESS eeeeceesceseesreeseceeeeseenr
233. ed However if Node Type in the Participant Properties Advanced dialog box is set to MCU no IVR service is available e H 243 site names for H 320 are supported e AnH 320 link must be configured to H 263 using 30 Fps 5 13 Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences To enable H 239 People Content in Video Switching Cascading conferences 1 2 3 Default Conference Properties Product Management General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Conf Recording r General Settings I Restricted Line Rate 384 kbps Video Rate In Out I Conference Gh Part JT Encryption Msg Service Type None z Msg Service Name E F Siencelt M VTX 1000 eba None Cascade None Audio Mix Depth 3 Sites F GnHold Master Name Master ef I Enable Invite 7120 Rate None I Auto Termination K Before First Join 9 Min After Last Quit 1 4 Min p Media Settings Audio Alg 56 G722 G711 X Dual Stream Mode H 239 People Content v lt lt Basic F Rol Call Pro Motion Auto x Enty Tone Roll Call announcement Video Protocet ha a End Time Alert Tone 5 Min Fe j 7 Exit Tone Roll Call announcement hides Foams oF Frame Rate 30 pic sec X Talk Hold Time 15 4 Sec Quality Auto v I AnnexN J AnnexP P Annex F In the Conference Properties Settings dialog box in the Dual Stream Mode list select H 239 People Content
234. ed by the MCU Indicates whether or not the conference is locked for dial in participants as follows 0 The conference is not locked for dial in participants 1 The conference is locked for dial in participants The maximum number of participants that can connect to the conference The default value is 255 This value indicates that as many participants as the MCU s resources allow can connect to the conference up to the maximum possible for the type of conference for example 30 for a Video Switching conference MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 5 Event Fields for Event 2001 Conference Start Continue 1 Continued ae ei ae Resource Information AV Message Information Lecture Mode Information The resources imposed on the MCU to run the conference For a description of the fields see Table A 9 Resource Information Fields on page A 27 The AV Message Information fields For a description of the fields see Table A 10 AV Message Information Fields on page A 27 The Lecture Mode Information fields For a description of the fields seeTable A 11 Lecture Mode Information Fields on page A 28 Table A 6 Event Fields for Event 3001 Conference Start Continue 2 Ea a Web Reserved Web Reserved User ID Web Reserved Database ID Indicates whether or not the reservation was established from the web as follows 0 The reservation was not established from the web
235. eded the system overwrites conferences starting with the earliest conference To save the conferences information their data must be retrieved and archived to files The frequency in which the archiving is performed depends on the daily weekly or monthly volume of conferences run by the MCU remember that several operator workstations can use the same MCU to run conferences For example if the MCU runs 300 conferences a week you will have to archive the conference records approximately once a week If the same volume is run in a month you will have to archive the conference records once a month The conference records are stored in the MCU folder in the Directory c mcu cdr Each conference is a separate record in the MCU memory When a conference is archived it is archived as a separate file Each conference CDR file contains a section with general information about the conference such as the Conference ID start time and duration and a section for each event occurring during the conference such as adding a new participant The events logged in the CDR file include the following e Network channel connected e Network channel disconnected e MPI channel connected e MPI channel disconnected e H 323 call setup H 323 clear indication 9 1 Chapter 9 Call Detail Record CDR Utility H 323 participant connected New undefined participant Operator added a participant Operator moved a participant from a conference Ope
236. eeeeeeeeseeaees 2 4 Entry Quevie ACCESS sssrinin EA A ENEE 2 5 Direct ACCESS nosats ein iepa r a A 2 7 Operator Conferences mecenes nrn i NR 2 7 Operations Performed Using the IVR Service ssssesseseeseeeeeeeee 2 7 Wsing ROM Call A I A E A A E E E 2 9 Using SilencelT sca senses nciaetie teens desdesieanvies Wesdcesdeateeasdeviensdes vente 2 11 DTMF Enabled Cascading Conferences ccsceeseeereeeees 2 12 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication 2 13 Audio and Video Conversion Tools cesceeseeseeeteeeeeeneeeneees 2 13 IVR Hardware Requirements cccscecsscessscceececseeeeeeeeeeeseeeseenaes 2 15 Defining the IVR Module Properties ce eeceeceeceesceeeeeeeeeteeeneeeees 2 16 Setting IVR Message Services ccccccscccssseseseeseeeeeeseseeessetseeenseees 2 24 Defining a New IVR Message Service eeseeseeeseceeeeeeeeeeeees 2 24 Viewing IVR Message Services seeseeseceeceseeeteceneeeeceneeeneees 2 48 Setting an IVR Message Service as the Default Service 2 49 Modifying IVR Message Service Properties c ceeeeeeeeeees 2 50 Assigning IVR Services to Conferences 0 ceceeseeseeeeeereeeneees 2 51 Defining a New Entry Queue Message Service ceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 2 53 Connecting to a Conference from an Entry Queue 66 2 59 Assigning an Entry Queue Service to an Entry Queue 2 60 Viewing the Audio Messages Status ceccese
237. eeeees 8 5 Opening a Participant Template File eee eeseeereees 8 7 Reservation Template Files eccceesceseceneceeceeeeseeeaeeeeceaeeeaeees 8 9 Creating a New Reservation Template File 0 00 0 8 10 Adding a Reservation Template to a Reservation Template Fil sce cei seeeccdeeeedee a r a 8 12 Opening a Reservation Template File cecceeseeesteeneeeneees 8 16 Converting MGC Templates to Database Templates eee 8 18 Converting Individual Reservation Templates into the Reservations Database sociigi anergia oana ina 8 19 Converting Participant Templates into the Participant Database sissisota E E N E 8 21 Dragging and Dropping Participant Templates cee 8 22 Managing MGC and Database Templates cceccceeseceeseeteeeenes 8 24 Listing the Participants in a Reservation Template 8 25 Adding Participants to an Existing Reservation Template 8 27 Adding a New Participant to an Existing Conference 8 28 Adding a Participant from a Participant Template file or Participant database sossscnunscsncisninnnconinneiesins 8 31 Adding Participants from another Reservation Template 8 37 Copying a Participant from a Reservation Template to an On Going Conference 000 cccceesecccesccsseceeneeeeseeeseeesseeesseeseeenseeeseneees 8 41 Modifying the Line Rate Set in the Participant Template 8 43 Modifying the Participant Dial In Dial Out Definition 8 45
238. efault ad IVR Msg Services BB EDemo IVR C Set s Default Delete Del Copy Print IVR Data Properties H ad IVR Msg Services WE ATTENDED gis Attended EQ Deb_EQ SE Deb_Ivr BE Demo IvR Default IVR Service als ae EQ60 HE R60 The selected IVR Message Service appears in bold both name and icon indicating that it is the current default service 2 49 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Modifying IVR Message Service Properties You can change one or several properties of a defined IVR Service To modify the properties of an IVR Service 1 List the IVR Services defined in the system For details see Viewing IVR Message Services on page 2 48 2 Right click the icon of the IVR Message Service to modify and then click Properties Alternatively just double click the IVR Service icon aa IVR Msg Services E attended pg SetAs Default t Delete Del el aS Copy lt ol gt Print IVR Data aa lle The IVR Message Service properties dialog box opens x General Operator Assistance RollCall Video Services SilencelT DTMF codes Global Welcome Message Conference Chairperson Conference Password IVR Service Name Attended Language for IVR ENGLISH 7 External Server Authentication Never ha Number of User Input Retries g Timeout for User Input g sec DTMF Delimiter g The tabs and options of this dialog box are described in Defining a New IV
239. efine the dial in participants for the Meeting Room on the main MCU one for each Meeting Room link Local Meeting Room Dial in aa 9754800 da 1234 NID Local Participant Entry Queue and Ehana Conference Dial in Numeric ID NID ngan aye Tj 8 a 310 8795222 4567 aN k w eas Pre configured MCU Local Call 8 a Jy Conference Dial out oe Link1 Long Distance Call 00 1 212 9754801 eas Ss USA Atlanta Pre configured MCU Pad Conference Dial out Cascaded Meeting Local Participant Entry Queue and Israel Link2 Long Distance Room Conference Dial in Numeric ID NID Pad Call 00 1 212 9754802 Dial in Linkt England ial in Lin nglan a a aaeeene SHAD a gu E Dial in Link2 Israel gt Figure 1 3 Simple Cascading in Cluster Mode As illustrated in Figure 1 3 participants dial in their local MCU to access the appropriate Entry Queue Once they enter the correct conference ID or password depending on MCU configuration they are moved to their local Meeting Room When the conference starts the Cascaded participant link automatically dials out to the direct dial in number assigned to the Meeting Room on the main MCU MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II It is important to configure the IVR Service assigned to the Meeting Room without the need to enter the conference password otherwise the links will not be able to connect to the conference MCU Rollover In MCU Rollover mode one MCU is used as the Master MCU a
240. efined within the Entry Queue Service is ls Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 3 5 Click Next The Welcome Message dialog box opens Welcome Message E xj IV Enable Welcome Messages General Welcome Message WWELCMPNS ACY Add Message File IV On hold for Operator Assistance lt Back Cancel Help 2 55 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services This dialog box contains a limited set of options that are identical to those defined in the JVR Welcome Message dialog box the conference is set to Entry Queue Access forcing participants to go through both queues when connecting to the conference the participant will hear the Welcome message twice once in the Entry Queue and the second time in the IVR queue In such a case you can select the Welcome Message in the Entry Queue Service and disable it in the IVR Service 5 If the Entry Queue Service will be used in conjunction with an IVR Service and 6 Define the appropriate parameters For a description of these parameters see Table 2 4 on page 2 28 7 Click Next The Conference ID dialog box opens Conference Id xi Name Message fle Request Conference Id Password Join failure Message y Add Message File lt Back Next gt Cancel Help The following messages and prompts can be played to request the conference Numeric ID or password depending on the MCU configuration Table 2 13 Entry Queue Properties Conference Id
241. efreshing the Database 6 70 Several users may access databases concurrently from the MGC Web Server Manager application as well as from the MGC Database Manager module of the MGC Manager application When that happens the information that you see in the MGC Database Manager window may not be updated with the latest changes performed by other users It is therefore recommended to periodically refresh the database to make sure that the latest data is displayed MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To refresh the database e On the Options menu click Refresh dB 6 71 Chapter 6 Using a Database 6 72 Database Templates A template is a set of parameters that define a conference or participant and it is saved to a database for repeated use Participant and Reservation templates are organized in Template Groups This chapter describes the User Tables of the Database e Reservation templates e Participant templates Templates Overview A Reservation template is useful when you run a series of conferences that involve basically the same parameters such as participants transmission sites and phone connections A Reservation template contains the definitions of one conference These definitions can be partial or complete definitions of the conference A Reservation template is a conference definition stored in the database or in a Reservation Template file The database or a Reservation Template file can contain several
242. elT a line is muted due to a noisy line PARTDET ACA Participant line detected as noisy 2 72 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication An Ad Hoc conference is a conference that is started instantly without a reservation or conference definition The Ad Hoc conference parameters are based on a Profile that is stored on the MCU and is linked to the Entry Queue A Profile is a set of parameters for a conference similar to a template that is used to define the Ad Hoc conference parameters As opposed to Meeting Rooms that are individual predefined conferences saved on the MCU Ad Hoc conferences use one Profile to start many conferences Once an Ad Hoc conference is started it becomes an On Going Conference and it is monitored and controlled as any standard On Going Conference The procedure for joining an Ad Hoc conference is the same as joining any other conference An external database application can be used for authentication The authentication can be done at the Entry Queue level or at the conference level At the Entry Queue level the MCU queries the external database server whether the participant has the right to create a new conference At the conference level the MCU verifies whether the participant can access the conference and if the participant is the conference chairperson Ad Hoc conferences require the use of an Audio board combined with the Entry Queue and IVR Entry Queue SIP endpo
243. ence the endpoint connects as Secondary audio only Polycom ViewStation FX connect as Secondary audio only e Inthe MGC Manager you define the properties of the video conference The properties of the contents transmission are defined internally and cannot be modified by the MGC Manager operator e ViewStation PC endpoints connecting to a conference that was set to e Annexes N P and F are optional and are additions to the Video Format when using the H 263 video protocol improving the video quality For Annex definitions see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 1 Chapter 4 Defining Advanced Media Settings 1 11 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings In a dual video conference with Visual Concert PC settings the ViewStation FX endpoints use a resolution of 4CIF 704 x 480 NTSC 704 x 576 PAL Video Content Video Content as J s e e s Visual ViewStation Polycom MCU ation Visual Concert FX FX Concert FX cad Figure 1 2 VCFX Configuration Scheme To enable the Visual Concert FX dual stream mode for a video conference 1 Inthe Conference Properties General dialog box define the parameters of a standard Video Switching conference 2 Click the Settings tab MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Conference Properties Settings dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Product Management In the Dual Stream Mode list click Visual Concert FX When you selec
244. ence duration 3 Set the value to define how many minutes before the end of the conference the system will play the End Time Alert Tone and display the end of conference alert icon rah 1 41 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings Q 1 42 This value determines when the system checks for the first time if at least a single participant is still connected to the conference and if resources are available to automatically extend it This check is repeated x minutes before the added time segment is up to determine whether or not the conference should be extended again until the predefined maximum extension time is reached and the conference is automatically ended by the MCU Default Conference Properties Product Management xi General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Cont Recording r General Settings I Restricted Line Rate 2B ed Msg Service Type None x Vide In Out Msg Service Name FP Conference Gn Pot Encryption P Silence J vTx1000 lt Basic b I Conference Lock cna coot None z 7 Mute Meet Me parties Cascade None z I Start Corf F GrHold Master Name None v P Temin hair F Enable Invite T120 Rate None X T Auto Termination FECC LSD Rate None fy Before First Join 5 4 Min AfterLast Quit M H Min m Media Settings Audio Alg 16 Siren G728 z Dual Stream Mode None z lt lt
245. encing stage is automatic without the operator s intervention In the Welcome No Wait mode the participant who connects to the conference sees the video slide hears the audio message and after a pre defined period is automatically connected to the conference without the operator s assistance Several operators can run Greet and Guide conferences simultaneously 4 3 Chapter 4 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences AV Message Services An AV Message Service is a set of audio messages two per Message Service and a video slide that are assigned to a conference This set is activated when a participant connects to the Greet and Guide conference to which the set is assigned Up to four Message Services can be defined to accommodate different types of conferences For example setting up a conference for a certain company on a regular basis you can use the company s logo and or title in the opening video slide and have a special message recorded Greet and Guide Hardware To set up and manage Greet and Guide conferences the following hardware is required Messages extension a special card that is attached to the audio card It stores up to eight audio messages four Attended messages and four On Hold messages that can be played while the participants wait in the Welcome queue Only one message extension per MCU can be installed Music card optional an I O card attached to the rear of the Audio module
246. enseeeseeensneenes 4 5 Greet and Guide Settings Workflow cceesseesceeeeteeseeeeeeeees 4 5 Defining a New AV Message Service esececeseeeeceseeeeeeeeceneeeneeeeenes 4 6 Listing the AV Message Services ccesceeseececereceeeceeeeneesneeees 4 10 Setting an AV Message Service as the Default Service 4 11 Modifying an AV Message Service cccscccscssseeseteeeeteeeeneeenes 4 12 Deleting a Message Service from the Message Services List 4 13 Defining an Attended Wait or Welcome No Wait Conference 4 14 Managing Greet and Guide Conferences ccccceeesseeeseeeeseeereeenees 4 18 Viewing Participants in a Greet and Guide Conference 4 19 Icons used to indicate the Participant Status 00 eee 4 20 Participant QUEUES aicese ovessas Pose cossend evss eves EAE EEA 4 22 F242 Conferences scsi ccc eet eae be ee eee Ree ee Oe 5 1 H 243 Cascading Conferences ccccccssccessessseeseceeeeeeeseeeneeesseeenseees 5 1 Star Cascading H 243 cccccccccccccsesseeesseeeeseeseeeeseeeeeeeesteeenseenses 5 2 Multi Hierarchy MIH Cascading H 243 eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 4 Setting Up Cascading Conferences ecceesceeeseeereestseeeteeennes 5 5 Defining Master and Slave Conferences 000 0 ceceeeeeseeeeeeee 5 5 Defining other Conferences Participating in the Cascade CONTErGNCS 23 chesstettestsnderisaadhesesasuriastciechent eames AEE 5 13 H 239 People Content in Cascading Confere
247. eo Sources dialog box is used to determine what the participants see on their screens 14 Select the appropriate Video Layout and other properties as required Meet Me Per Conference One or two phone numbers can be assigned to the conference Participants wishing to participate in such a conference must dial one of these numbers to be automatically connected to the appropriate conference For more information on this conference type see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 7 Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms 7 19 Chapter 7 Database Templates Recording The MGC Manager provides a digital recording option with the Polycom Conference Recorder enabling recording of the conference audio channel of both Audio Only and video conferences For more information see the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 8 Recording 15 To complete the Reservation template definition procedure click OK from any Reservation template Properties dialog box The Properties dialog box closes and the new Reservation template is added to the Reservations in Database window below the Group icon oix 2 gt Root Name LineRate Audioalg Video Session Meet Me Office Reservation tn Polycom E office Reservation WebOffice ia Polycom weboffice_v2 WebOffice ATM alpha 1 D weboffice_v2 6 a CP conf SEAT alpha 1 28 Auto Transcoding J G7221 alpha 21
248. er s Guide Volume II Table A 3 CDR Event Types Continued a ey Operator Set End CDR event code 106 Time Operator Move Participant from Conference Operator Move Participant to Conference Operator Move Participant to Conference Continue 1 Operator Move Participant to Conference Continue 2 An operator modified the conference end time For a description of the fields see Table A 41 Event Fields for Event 106 Operator Set End Time on page A 58 CDR event code 107 A participant was moved from this conference to another conference For a description of the fields see Table A 42 Event Fields for Events 107 109 Operator Move Participant from Conference Operator Attend Participant on page A 58 CDR event code 108 A participant was moved from another conference to this conference For a description of the fields see Table A 43 Event Fields for Events 108 112 Operator Move Participant to Conference Attend Participant to Operator Conference on page A 59 CDR event code 2108 Additional information about an Operator Move Participant to Conference event For a description of the fields see Table A 44 Event Fields for Event 2108 Operator Move Participant to Conference Continue 1 on page A 64 CDR event code 3108 Additional information about an Operator Move Participant to Conference event For a description of the fields see Table A 45 Event Fields for Event
249. er 9251995 Dial out Number 9251995 Figure 1 5 Simple Cascading with an ISDN link 1 46 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To define the ISDN link between conferences The Participant s Properties Identification dialog boxes show how to define the ISDN links for each participant in a conference that uses Simple Cascading as described in the configuration example in Figure 1 5 Link In Properties Link Out Properties Participant Properties Link In Participant Properties Link Out Conference A Conference B 1 47 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings Monitoring You can monitor a Simple Cascading Conference using the Browser Status and Monitor panes of the MGC Manager main window The display shows separate information for each of the two linked conferences using an ISDN link as shown in Figure 1 6 te h conference a conference 8 afeway Sessions 0 BRB Participants Queue 0 H Reservations 3 amp Meeting Rooms 2 5 Alpha 1 2 Connected D gt connected D Connected F conference B Product Management ID 3721 2 Connected unkout D gt connected me Audio Only D Connected Jan 25 2004 11 38 10 Jan 25 2004 11 38 37 Jan 25 2004 15 38 00 3720 2 Jan 25 2004 15 38 00 3721 2 M9251995 9251995 P ga Dial in 84971111 ga Dial out Bes Dial out Bed Dia
250. er Conference MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Participant Properties Identification dialog box opens x Identification Advanced Name Master Conference Copneetierr typ Interface Type fisDN x Parteipan aller ID fa708aq MCU Numbers Extension Identifier String Meetm pom Bonding Phone Number MCU Conference hd User Detined User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Volume 5 I iP foes oul Paes al Titer Ti er ert We av Vapi se ae T Audio Only T vip IV Save Participant Cancel Help Define the participants in the Cascading conference just as in any standard conference For details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties Define the participant who is used as a link between the two conferences Master and Slave and select the appropriate connection type in the Connection Type field It is recommended to define the slave participants as Dial in Select the MCU Conference option in the Meet Me per field if the Connection Type is set to Dial In If the Interface Type is set to ISDN and the Connection Type is Dial in the MCU Number field is active Enter the MCU number of the local MCU the one that runs the Master conference the MCU Number field 5 7 Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences 10 11 12 If the Connection Type is set to Dial Out set the Participa
251. er area click the Labels icon The Labels list is displayed in the Status area LT TT alclx File Edit View Options Help E H AccordDB EAH Defaults LI User Defined Defaults EB Conference Defaults Participant Defaults f Product Management MGC Manager Defaults Ja Permissions Users gt Groups SeA Root Sy Default i UserGroups EA WebOffice Ready Data Base Name AccordDB Sys DSN C Program Files MGC Manager ver 6 0 Database Accordacc 7A Sorting the Labels List You can sort the labels alphabetically by name in ascending or descending order by clicking on the Name heading 6 69 Chapter 6 Using a Database Refreshing the Database List Databases can be added to the database list used by the MGC Database Manager externally via the Control Panel Data Source ODBC In sucha case you need to refresh the database list to gain access to that database from the MGC Database Manager application To refresh the database list in the MGC Database Manager e On the Options menu click Refresh dB List Options Help Auto Cascade Configuration Personal Scheduler Configuration Polycom Datastore settings E mail Format Automatic Email Crash Notifications Administrator Email Notification Settings d s to Update Refresh dB 5 Add Remove connection to ODBC The database list in the MGC Web Server Manager window is refreshed and the new databases are listed R
252. eration MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Closing the Database Tables This option is used to close database tables Be sure to save changes before exiting the database To close the Reservations or Participants in Database window l At the top right corner of the Participants or Reservations in Database window click the Close button If you have not saved changes made to the database before closing the window the following message box is displayed MGC Manager x A Save changes to Reservations in AccordDB1 o _ coc Click Yes to save changes No to discard the changes or Cancel to abort the operation To close all Reservations or Participants in Database windows l On the Database menu click Logout amp Clear Login Record DataBase Directory Options Window Save Database Refresh Database F9 Filter Login Load Defaults From DB Manage databases Database ODBC 7 47 Chapter 7 Database Templates The following message is displayed MGC Manager xi A All database windows will be closed Do you want to continue lt a 2 Click Yes to close all the windows or No to cancel the logout operation If you clicked Yes and you have not saved the changes to the database before logging out the following message box is displayed MccManoger A Save changes to Reservations in AccordDB1 ne ce 3 Click Yes to save changes No to discard the
253. erences Managing a Cascading Conference A cascaded conference is started in the same way as a standard conference Before the linking participant is connected each conference is run as a standard separate conference Once the connection between two or more conferences is established the MCUs exchange messages establishing the status of each conference as either a Master or a Slave conference The MCUs also recognize and assign a number to each terminal participating together in the conference If one conference is set as Auto and the other conference is set as Slave after the messages are exchanged between the MCUs running both conferences the MCU running the Auto conference is set as Master If both conferences are set to Auto each MCU sends a random number The conference running on the MCU that sends the lowest number is set as the Master conference The terminal numbers as well as any existing names are set accordingly and are sent to all the participants in the collective conference If one conference does not support MIH the following scenarios may occur e The MIH enabled conference becomes the Master conference and the MIH disabled conference becomes the Slave In that case full H 243 cascading capabilities are established e The MIH enabled conference becomes the Slave while the MIH disabled conference becomes the Master In that case a conflict exists between the conferences and only simple cascading is enabled Master M
254. ese parameters change according to the network Interface Type selected in the Identification dialog box 10 Click OK to add the Participant template to the database window You can define the dentification and Advanced properties for both ISDN ATM and H 323 network of the same participant if the endpoint supports both interface types First select the appropriate Interface Type then define the Identification and Advanced fields and then click OK Open the Participant Properties Identification dialog box again and select another nterface Type Then define the dentification and Advanced fields Both definitions will be stored in the system s memory 11 Repeat steps 5 to 10 to define additional participants 12 Select Save Database from the Database menu or click the Save button on the Toolbar to save the changes to the database 7 41 Chapter 7 Database Templates The new Participant template is added to the selected Template Group in the Participant database PEE E E Root Name Phone 1P Connection Type Channels aggregation H D office Reservation t R a Henry ga Henry Dial in Auto Auto oa Joe fae Dial in Auto Auto oa Melissa Ga Melissa Dial in Auto Auto Se polycom Debo Ga polycom Debo 29501111 Dial out 2 Yes ae Sarah a Sarah Dial in Auto Auto aa Tanya Ga Tanya Dial in Auto Auto H Polycom WebOffice weboffice_v2 Saving the Database This option is used to save the change
255. ew a Reservation Template on page 7 10 Copying the Reservation parameters from an On Going Conference or Reservation For more details see see Chapter 8 Copying an On Going Conference or a Conference Reservation to a Reservation Template File or Reservation Database on page 8 52 Converting existing templates from Reservation Template files to the database format For more details see see Chapter 8 Converting Individual Reservation Templates into the Reservations Database on page 8 19 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Defining a Reservation Template in the Database The following procedure describes the definition of a new Reservation template in the database Once created the template can be used to initiate an On Going Conference or a Reservation that will automatically start at a predefined date and time This is the recommended method to set up conferences as it allows you to save the conference for repeated use or to use it as a basis for reserving other conferences with similar properties To define a new Reservation template in the database you must first log in to the database and open the Reservations in Database window For more details see Logging into the User Tables of the Database on page 7 3 iix H Root Name LineRate Audioalg Video Session Meet Me E Office Reservation t Oo Polycom Office Reservation 5 weboffice Polycom 5 weboffice_v2 Weboffice ad iG
256. ext to it 2 Copy As Copy Ctrl C Cut Ctrl x Delete Del Dial Out Ctri A Line Rates J v Auto 2x64 kbps _ 1B 56 kbps 1B 64 kbps 2B 2x56 kbps 2B 2x64 kbps 112 kbps 128 kbps 224 kbps 256 kbps 336 kbps 384 kbps 512 kbps 768 kbps T1 1472 kbps E1 1920 kbps Link participant Properties 5 Click on the desired Line Rate A check mark appears next to the selected Line Rate which appears in bold 6 On the Template menu click Save when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation Template file or when the Participant template is stored in a Participant Template file Alternatively click Save Database from the Database menu when the Reservation or Participant template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively for all types click the Save button on the toolbar To modify the line rate of a H 323 Participant you need to access the participant s Advanced Properties dialog box 8 44 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Modifying the Participant Dial In Dial Out Definition ey You can toggle between the Dial In and Dial Out definition of a participant without accessing the Participant Properties dialog box To enable the interactive toggling between the participant s Dial In and Dial Out Connection Type the phone numbers for both Dial In and Dial Out must be defined during the definition of the participant parameters in the Participant Pr
257. f the files were not downloaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you The following types of messages and prompts can be enabled Table 2 7 IVR Properties General Voice Messages Lock ON Indicates that the conference is now locked to unidentified dial in participants This message is played to all conference participants Lock OFF Indicates that the conference is now unlocked to dial in participants This message is played to all conference participants Billing Number Requests the participant to enter a code for billing purposes Added to Q amp A Indicates that a participant was added to the Q amp A queue Note This message is only played to the participant that was added to the Q amp A queue Removed from Indicates that a participant was removed from the Q amp A Q amp A queue Note This message is played only to the participant that was removed from the Q amp A queue Next Q amp A Indicates that a participant is the next questioner Questioner This message is played only to the participant who is the next in line to ask a question so he or she can get ready 2 34 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 2 7 IVR Properties General Voice Messages Continued Secure ON Indicates that the conference status has changed to Secure This message is played to the conference when the chairperson secures the conference In this mode the conference cannot be joined by any new participant or by the
258. f the participant as in the reservation Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Channel ID The channel identifier This is a number assigned to the channel by the system according to the order in which the systems connect The initial channel is always 1 Channels Number Relevant only to multiRate calls The total number of channels being connected for this participant Connect Initiator Indicates who initiated the connection as follows 0 MCU 1 Remote participant Any other number Unknown A 43 Appendix A CDR File Fields A 44 Table A 25 Event Fields for Event 11 ATM Channel Connected Continued a Restrict Indicates whether or not the line is restricted as follows 0 Non restricted line 1 Restricted line ATM Address The ATM address Table A 26 Event Fields for Event 12 ATM Channel Disconnected ja Pee ae ia Participant Name The name of the participant as in the reservation Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Channel ID The channel identifier This is a number assigned to the channel by the system according to the order in which the channels connect The initial channel is always 1 Disconnect Indicates who initiated the disconnection as follows Initiator 0 MCU 1 Remote participant Any other number Unknown Q 931 The disconnection cause structure Disconnection See Table A 17
259. fault Properties You cannot set an AV Message Service as default while there are active conferences and reservations saved on the MCU Chapter 4 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences Modifying an AV Message Service You may change the selection of the video and audio files set in the AV Message Service However the Message Service name cannot be modified To change the Message Service name delete it from the list and define a new one with a different name To change the AV Message Service parameters 1 View the defined AV Message Services as described in Listing the AV Message Services on page 4 10 2 Right click the icon of the AV Message Service you want to modify and then click Properties ey Polycom Standard Set As Default Delete Del The AV Message Service dialog box opens x Name Add new file Video File Audio File Audio On Hold File RIVNDELACY x TPLY_ATT ACA v XGEN_ATT ACA x M Set Music Welcome Period 1 00 Cancel 3 Modify the AV Message Service parameters as described in Defining a New AV Message Service on page 4 6 4 Click OK to confirm If you have selected a different audio and or video file the MCU must be reset for the changes to take effect 4 12 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Deleting a Message Service from the Message Services List Use this option to delete an AV Message Service from
260. ferencing and External Database Authentication assigned to the Entry Queue and connects this participant as the conference chairperson On Going Conference Numeric ID 1234 9251222 ST PEST oncom ye to with this 103 e R Entry Queue Profile Parameters New Conference Numeric ID 1300 Figure 3 1 Conference Initiation without Authentication To enable this workflow the following components must be defined in the system e A conference Profile containing the conference parameters e An Entry Queue Service with the appropriate Numeric ID Request messages e An Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue with an assigned Profile MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Entry Queue level Conference initiation Numeric ID validation with an External Database application To increase the system security and ensure that only authorized participants callers can start a new conference an external database application is used for authentication Initiating a conference uses the following method l 2 3 The participant dials in to an Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue The participant is requested to enter the conference Numeric ID The participant enters the conference Numeric ID via his her endpoint remote control or telephone using DTMF codes If there is an On Going conference with this numeric ID the participant is moved to that conference where another authentication process can occur depending on the IVR Service configuration
261. fice Reservation t Ba Henry P Berry Dial in Q R Jo New Participant i Joe o fa Melissa Ba Melis COPY As z Co Ctrl C polycom Debo polyc py f a on al A Ctrl X fatty Sarah fatty 534 paste ctrl Bs Tany Delete Del Polycom Dial Out Ctr D Weboffice Line Rates H D weboffice_v2 Properties The participant is deleted An asterisk appears in the title bar of the Participant Template file or Participants in Database window to indicate that changes have been made 3 Click Save on the Template menu when the Participant template is stored in a Participant Template file or click Save Database on the Database menu when the Participant template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar The asterisk is removed from the title bar of the Participant Template file or Participants in Database window This confirms that the modifications have been saved 8 65 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 8 66 Call Detail Record CDR Utility The Call Detail Record CDR utility enables you to view summary information of conferences such as the length of the conference and the list of participants The CDR allows you to retrieve this information and archive it to a file that can be used to produce reports or can be exported to external billing programs The MCU can store details of up to 500 conferences When this number is exce
262. fice_v1 Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Default Attending Print Template Copy C Paste Ctrl Paste As Ctrl P Delete Del Properties The MGC Manager dialog box opens prompting for confirmation MGC Manager xi A Delete Reservation Polycom Are You Sure a Click Yes to confirm or No to cancel the Cut operation The Reservation definition is moved from the source Reservation Template file or Reservation database to the clipboard Open the target Reservation Template file or Reservations in Database window In the Reservations in Database window expand the Groups tree to locate the group to which the Reservation template is to be moved 8 51 Chapter 8 Templates Handling T Right click the Conference List or Group icon and then click Paste H gain New Res Template New Res Operator Template Print Pas Ne tee P New Group Delete Group The Reservation template is copied from the clipboard to the target Reservation Template file or to the target group in the Reservation database A new conference icon is added to the list of Reservation templates listed under the Conferences List or Group icon Click Save on the Template menu when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation template file or click Save Database on the Database menu when the Reservation template is stored in a database to save the changes Alte
263. follows 0 None T120 was not used in the conference 2 H MLP 62 4 3 H MLP 64 4 H MLP 128 5 H MLP 192 6 H MLP 256 7 H MLP 320 8 H MLP 384 12 H MLP 14 4 k 13 var H MLP 17 MLP 4K 18 MLP 6 4 k 19 var MLP 20 MLP 14 4 k 21 MLP 22 4 k 22 MLP 30 4 k 23 MLP 38 4 k 24 MLP 46 4 k 25 MLP 16 k 26 MLP 24 k 27 MLP 32k 28 MLP 40k 29 MLP 62 4 k 30 MLP 64k A 21 Appendix A CDR File Fields A 22 Table A 5 Event Fields for Event 2001 Conference Start Continue 1 a ene Audio Tones Alert Tone Timing Talk Hold Time Audio Mix Depth Operator Conf Video Protocol Meet Me Per Conf The audio tones that were used in the conference as follows Bit 0 on Entry tone Bit 1 on Exit tone Bit 2 on End time alert tone Relevant only if the end time alert tone is enabled Indicates when the end time alert tone is to be played A value of X indicates that the alert tone is to be played X minutes before the conference end time The minimum time that a speaker has to speak to become the video source The increments are in 0 01 sec The range is 0 10 seconds The maximum number of participants whose audio can be mixed The range is 1 5 Indicates whether or not the conference is an Operator conference as follows 0 The conference is not an operator conference 1 The conference is an operator conference The video protocol a
264. for the conference For more details on enabling Roll Call during a conference and a list of Roll Call DTMF options refer to the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 6 Using SilencelT The SilencelT feature is part of the IVR Service used to automatically mute audio participants who placed their phone lines on hold during an On Going Conference causing all other conference participants to hear the background music When the audio participant is muted an IVR message may be played to the conference informing the other participants that one of the participants was muted due to a noisy line When muted participants return to the conference they hear a message informing them that their line was detected as noisy and muted At this point the participant can press lt 9 gt to listen to a menu offering one of the following options e Return to the conference unmuted default e Return to the conference muted e Reduce the level of the SilenceIT Sensitivity and return to the conference unmuted Disable the SilenceIT feature for this conference and return to the conference unmuted SilenceIT IVR messages are described in Table 2 11 on page 2 45 Enabling SilenceIT SilenceIT is enabled by performing the following steps e Enable the SilenceIT option in the IVR Message Service and select the voice messages for this feature For a detailed description see Defining a New IVR Message Service on page 2 24 Chapter 2 IVR and
265. fter you save the Entry Queue on the MCU Entry Queue Enter the name of the Entry Queue Service to be used Message to play audio and prompts and to display the video Service slide to participants waiting in the Entry Queue Leave this field blank if you want to use the default Entry Queue Service if an Entry Queue Service was set as default Note Select a Numeric D enabled Entry Queue Service The system is case sensitive The same Entry Queue Service can be used for Audio Only and Video participants Cascade This check box should be cleared for Ad Hoc Entry Queues VTX 1000 Select this check box to create a VTX 1000 enabled Entry Queue Participants connecting to VTX 1000 enabled Entry Queues are initially assigned wide band resources If the endpoint is not identified as VTX the wide band resources are subsequently released 3 35 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication 3 36 Table 3 4 Entry Queue for Ad Hoc Conferencing using a Profile Continued ee So as Select this check box to enable Ad Hoc conferencing When selected and an Ad Hoc conference needs to be created the Target Conference properties are taken from the Profile assigned to the Entry Queue Note e You cannot select the Ad Hoc option if Profiles are not defined in the system The Entry Queue can be used also for standard conferencing In that case participants can be moved to target conferences with propert
266. g information about the event either in the form of a descriptive field name and value for example entry tone OFF or just a descriptive field value for example no audio resource force Although the formatted files contain the same information in a few instances a single field in the unformatted file is converted to multiple lines in the formatted file and in other cases multiple fields in the unformatted file are combined into one line in the formatted file 5 This appendix describes the fields and values in the unformatted CDR records A 1 Appendix A CDR File Fields The MCU sends the entire CDR file via API and the MGC Manager or external application does the processing and sorting The MGC Manager ignores events that it does not recognize that is events written in a higher version that do not exist in the current version Therefore to enable compatibility between versions instead of adding new fields to existing events new fields are added as separate events so as not to affect the events from older versions The Conference Summary Record The conference summary record the first record in the unformatted CDR file contains the following fields Table A 1 Conference Summary Record Fields as So ra File version The version of the CDR utility that created the file Conference Name The conference name Conference ID The conference identification number as assigned by the system Reserved Duration The amount
267. g one of the following techniques Define a participant directly during the reservation definition without saving the participant information to the database This participant will be Embedded in the conference and is unique to the reservation The participant parameters are erased together with the conference when the On Going Conference terminates Assign a Participant template defined either in the database or in a Participant Template file This participant will be Linked to the conference and the participant s definition will be consistent in all conferences to which it is linked Defining Participant Templates in the Database Participant templates can be added to a database using the following methods Define the Participant template directly from the Participants in Database window Copy the participant parameters from an On Going Conference or a Reservation to the Participant database Define the participants during conference setup during an On Going Conference or reservation setup and save the new participants to the database Convert existing templates from Participant Template files to the database format For more details see Chapter 8 Converting Participant Templates into the Participant Database on page 8 21 Adding Participants to a Reservation Template There are two ways to add participants to a Reservation template Define the participant directly during the reservation definition the
268. g the flag ALLOW_ENCRYPT_IN PARTY LEVEL in the ENCRYPTION section of the system cfg file to YES or NO as follows Table 1 3 Participant Level Encryption According to Flag Settings Participant Level Encryption is Enabled for Encryption is Disabled Flag Settings the Conference for the Conference YES Encryption is determined at Encryption is determined at the participant level the participant level therefore encrypted and therefore encrypted and non encrypted participants non encrypted participants can join the conference can join the conference Encryption is determined at Encryption is determined at the conference level the conference level therefore only encrypted therefore only non participants can join the encrypted participants can conference join the conference Encrypted participants cannot be moved from an encrypted Entry Queue to this conference 1 31 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings Enabling Encryption at the Conference Level 1 32 Encryption at the conference level is set during the conference definition and cannot be changed once the conference is running On Going Conference To enable encryption at the conference level Inthe Conference Properties Settings dialog box select the Encryption check box Default Conference Properties Product Management 16 Sien7 G728 Nore H MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Enabling Encryption for Entry Queues To be ab
269. ge added to the playback of the Record recorded name The name you have recorded is here the system plays the name Roll Call Confirm Requests the participant to confirm the recorded name Record or to record the name again Note This message is optional and is not played to the participant when the appropriate flag in the system cfg is set to NO Roll Call Enter to A voice message added to the playback of the recorded Conference name stating that the participant has joined the conference here the system plays the recorded name has joined the conference Roll Call Exit A voice message added to the playback of the recorded from Conference name stating that the participant has left the conference here the system plays the recorded name has left the conference 2 41 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services 2 42 28 29 Table 2 9 Roll Call Voice Messages Continued Rolcall Description Message P Roll Call Start Played when Roll Call is requested by the chairperson Names Review introducing the names of the conference participants in the order they joined the conference Roll Call End Played at the end of Roll Call to indicate that the listing Names Review of participant names is concluded Click Next In Audio Look amp Feel the SilencelT dialog box opens skip to The SilencelT dialog box opens in step 31 In the Unified mode the Video Services dial
270. have only Read permissions in a database they are able to view and change a Template Group but are not be able to save the changes in the database If users have Read and Write permission they are able to view make changes and save changes to the database If the users have no Read or Write permission they will not be able to access the respective database windows For more information about assigning Read Write permissions see Defining a New User on page 6 53 7 7 Chapter 7 Database Templates Reservation Templates Setting up a conference to start some time in the future is referred to as scheduling a conference reservation 7 8 Setting up such a conference to start immediately is referred to as defining an On Going Conference Regardless of whether you are scheduling a conference reservation or defining an On Going Conference use one of the following techniques to set up the conference Define a conference reservation or an On Going Conference directly by assigning values for each property of the conference The reservation definition is erased when the conference finishes Use a Reservation template defined in the database or in a Reservation Template file Defining Reservation Templates in the Database Reservation templates can be added to a database using the following methods Defining the Reservation template directly from the Reservation in Database window For more details see Defining a N
271. he MGC Database Manager it creates a group for each of the listed users and assigns access rights to that group Participant and Reservation templates are automatically assigned to the appropriate user group according to the user name that appears in the Owner field If no Owner is defined they are automatically assigned to the Root group Therefore only users who have access rights to the Root group usually administrators are able to view these conferences The templates can be moved to the appropriate group in the Groups tree in the MGC Manager Database Manager module using Copy and Paste drag amp drop is unavailable 6 65 Chapter 6 Using a Database 6 66 5 Right click the icon of the groups to which you want to add a sub group and then click Add New Group to DB H E SEEM Set Users Rights Copy Delete Properties The Group Properties dialog box opens x Name Poeom Cancel Enter the group name and click OK The new group is added to the Groups tree Setting the Access Rights to a Group To view group Access Rights 1 In the Browser area right click the icon of the group whose access rights you want to view and then click Set Users Rights on the pop up menu Add New Group to dB Copy Delete Properties MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Set Users Rights dialog box opens xi Set the user Access rights on the group Participant View MCU Confere
272. he Reservation template is displayed below the Reservation template s icon amp Root H D Office Reservation HI dee Office Reservation Gs Alice Right click the icon of the participant to copy and then click Copy r ta Alice Copy As Delete Del Dial Out Ctrl 4 Line Rates gt Link participant Properties 8 37 Chapter 8 Templates Handling The participant s definition is copied to the clipboard Use the Copy As option from the right click menu to copy the participant parameters to the clipboard using a new name 5 Ifthe Reservation Template file or Reservation database containing the target Reservation template is not open open it now 6 Expand the Conferences List icon in the Reservation Template file window to list the Reservation templates Alternatively expand the Groups in the Reservation database to locate the target Reservation template 7 Right click the icon of the target Reservation template and then click Paste oS O s weboffice_v1 Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Default Attending Print Template Cut Ctrl x Cop trl C Paste a rl P Delete Del Properties The participant is added to the target Reservation template The participant icon is added to the Reservation template s participants list If you copy a linked participant from a Reservation template in the same Reservation database
273. he network However only participants with the highest permission rights Administrator can manage the default sets for all the users on the network In addition users with the highest permission rights Administrator can perform the following operations e Define new database users and their access rights e Define labels to be assigned to conferences and participants These labels can be used to filter the database for the desired information 6 29 Chapter 6 Using a Database To Log in to the Database Manager 1 2 6 30 On the Start Programs menu click MGC Manager Ver 7 5 and then click Database Manager Programs EG Pestlivens 4 Microsoft Office Tools 8 CDR E Settings gt Polycom WebOffice 2 Internet Explorer abase Manager a Search a Microsoft Outlook Pte g Help and Support amp MGC Manager ver 7 5 MGC Manager ver 7 5 hl Eq J Run ag p g w UNInstall MGC Manager ver 7 5 Log Off Debbie Shut Down Alternatively in the MGC Manager on the Database menu click Manage Databases DataBase Directory Options Window Save Database Refresh Database F9 Filter Login Open D B Reservation Template Open D B Participant Template Logout amp Clear Login Record gt Load Defaults From DB Manage datab Database The Database Login dialog box opens x Login Name faccorD Password I Create Login Record c
274. he new language is added to the VR Properties dialog box To download the audio files for the various messages and prompts in the IVR Properties dialog box click the Add Message File button The Add Message File dialog box opens Add Message File i x Path Generation Message Language Message Category Message Type Install to English O z Conference Password v Request Password z Download File The audio files are downloaded to the MGC unit one by one In the following steps you select a single Message Type in one of the Message Categories for which the audio file will be downloaded You can download several audio files for each Message Type Each file is downloaded separately when the appropriate Language Message Category and Message Type are selected You can download the required files during the definition of the IVR Message Service In such a case you can skip the next steps MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II From the Message Language list select the language for which the audio file will be downloaded to the MCU The languages list includes the languages that were defined in the VR Properties In the Message Category list select the category for which the audio file will be downloaded Welcome Message Played when the participant connects to the Polycom MGC unit and enters the Entry Queue VR enabled conference or Participants Queue Conference Password Requests the participant
275. he one to which you are adding the current Reservation template the participants will be embedded in the conference and not linked 10 To display the list of participants stored in a Participant Template file click the Browse button The Open dialog box appears Use the standard Windows techniques to select the desired Participant Template file The full path and name of the Participant Template file appear in the Pre Defined Participants File box and the participants defined in the Participant Template file appear in the Pre Defined Participants list Q MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 11 To assign the participant s to the Reservation template in the Pre Defined Participants list select the participant name s and then click the Add l button Multi selection of Participants is available using standard Windows conventions The selected participants appear in the Conference Participants list Repeat steps 9 to 11 to assign participants from other Template Groups and databases to the Reservation template 12 Define a new participant directly as follows a Click the New button b The Participant Properties Identification dialog box opens Default Participant Properties x Identification Advanced Name Connection Type Interface Type Dialin A ISDN Ge Participant Numbers MCU Numbers Extension Identifier String Meet me per Bonding Phone Number Par
276. he participants connect to the conference and are requested to record their name 2 The participants record their name The recording is automatically terminated after two seconds Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services 2 10 gy 3 The system plays the recorded name to the participant and asks for confirmation by pressing a pre configured key or the participant can record his her name again Playing the Roll Call Confirm Record message to participants is optional The Roll Call Confirmation message is not played to the participant when the flag ROLL_CALL_CONFIRMATION YES default located in the GREET AND GUIDE IVR section of the system cfg is set to NO 4 Once the participant confirms the recording the system connects the participant to the conference and announces his her name to the connected participants During the conference the chairperson can request a roll call using the appropriate DTMF code from the endpoint s input device The system plays back the recorded names of the participants to all the conference participants one after the other in the order that they entered the conference All participants get to hear the announced names list The chairperson can end the Roll Call playback at any time by entering the appropriate DTMF code from the endpoint s input device When a participant leaves or is disconnected from the conference participants remaining in the conference hear an audio message
277. he plus icon next to the Defaults icon to display the defaults categories Expand the Defaults tree Right click the User Defined Defaults icon A pop up menu appears Ussy Defined Derauits Add User Defined Default Click Add User Defined Default The User Defined dialog box opens User Defined x Name Owner M Show User Defined fields in Conference Parameters M Show User Defined fields in Participant Parameters M Conference User Defined Titles To Appear In MGC Manager User Defined 1 User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 3 m Participant User Defined Titles To Appear In MGC Manager User Defined 1 User Defined User Defined 2 UserDefined2 User Defined 3 User Defined3 User Defined 4 User Defined Carei _ MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 6 Define the following parameters Table 6 2 User Defined parameters description a eee ooo Enter the name of the User Defined default set Owner Show User Defined fields in Conference Parameters Show User Defined fields in Participant Parameters Conference User Defined Titles Participant User Defined Titles Enter the name of the owner of this set Only the owner and the administrator with the appropriate permission will be able to modify this set Leave this field blank to assign this set to the current logged in user Select this check box t
278. he speaker of the second conference is designated by the operator and forced This speaker is the presenter of the lecture presentation To define a Duo Video Presentation in a Video Switching conference IDefault Conference Properties Product Management General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Conf Recording p General Settings I Restricted Line Rate 28 x Msg Service Type None gt Bu T Meg SeviceName On Po I Enewyption I Silence l F vTx 1000 TE I Conference Lock Chair Contiot None 5 E ea Cascade None zi F Gr Hold Master Name None H I Enable Invite T120 Rate None IT Auto Termination FECC LSD Rate None z Before FistJon 5 Min AfterLastQuit T Min Media Settings Audio Alg 16 Siren7 G728 v Dual Stream Mode None z lt lt Basic None H 239 People Content I Rall Cal People and Content VO Pro Motion Auto Visual Concert PC M Enty T a e H263 End Tine Exit Tone Roll Call announcement des Foma puo Frame Rate Auto z Talk Hold Time 15 f Sec Quai Auto z Audio Mix Depth Bp 4 Sites T AnnexN M AnnexP IT Annex F Cancel Boal Help Duo Video is selected in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box x MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II In the Dual Stream Mode list select H 320 Duo Video if the conference is run in a
279. hecking only the chairperson password with the external database All other participants may be checked only with the MCU if the IVR Service is configured to prompt for the conference password or not checked at all if the IVR Service is configured to prompt only for the chairperson password 3 11 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication Initiating a conference uses the following method 3 12 The procedure starts with steps 1 to 7 of the Ad Hoc Entry Queue level Conference initiation Numeric ID validation with an External Database application flow In this flow the Conference Entry Password and the Chairperson password are returned from the database application to the MCU and override these parameters in the Conference Profile When the Ad Hoc conference is started the participant who initiated this conference and all participants subsequently requesting to join the conference are moved to the conference s IVR Queue If the IVR Service is configured to prompt for the Conference Entry password the participant is requested to enter the conference password In this flow the conference password is not validated with the external database application only with the MCU Ifthe wrong password is entered and the Operator s Assistance option is enable the participant is moved to the Participants Queue for assistance If there is no active Operator conference running on the system the participa
280. hen defined as an H 323 alias that matches all incoming parties to the conference In case the conference name is designated as numeric the H 323 Network Service Properties stores the Gatekeeper Prefix of the card that is used to define the Alias Name in the Participant Properties e Set the Alias Type to E 164 format in the Participant Properties 1 51 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings Enhanced Cascading with H 323 Links 1 52 Enhanced Cascading enables you to set up links between cascading conferences using aliases and the Prefix of the IP Network Service instead of the IP address of the IP card When the Prefix is used the conference name is added to the IP Network Service Prefix as the dial out string for the outgoing H 323 call In this case the alias is defined in the H323ID format If the destination conference name includes only numeric values the alias is comprised of the prefix number and the conference name Therefore the alias type should be set to E 164 Enhanced cascading using aliases is enabled in the system cfg in the H323 GK FLAGS Section by setting the flag H323_ENABLE_CONFERENCE_DIALIN_IDENTIFY NO to YES You can start the Enhanced Cascading conferences in the same way as Simple Cascading conferences by setting up each conference as a standard conference and then linking the participants and connecting the link In this mode the name of the master conference MasterConference is use
281. hen the Participant template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar The asterisk is removed from the title bar of the Participant Template file or Participants in Database window This confirms that the modifications have been saved MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Linking Unlinking Participants in the Database Participants who are embedded in a Reservation template may be changed to become linked participants In such a case the participant properties are copied to the Participant database and a new Participant template is created in the same group where the Reservation template is stored Linked participants may be unlinked In such a case the participant is embedded in the Reservation template and any change to his her properties will not affect the template and the participant definition in other Reservation templates to which the Participant template was linked Unlinking a participant does not delete the Participant template from the database To link unlink a participant in the database l 2 3 Open the Reservations in Database window Expand the Groups tree and locate the desired Reservation template Double click the Reservation template icon A list of participants defined in the Reservation template appears below the Reservation template s icon Right click the icon of the participant whose link status is to be changed Click Link participant t
282. hich the channels connect The initial channel is always 1 Indicates who initiated the disconnection as follows 0 MCU 1 Remote participant Any other number Unknown A 45 Appendix A CDR File Fields Table A 29 Event Fields for Events 15 24 H 323 Call Setup SIP Call Setup Ec a Participant Name The name of the participant as in the reservation Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Connect Initiator Indicates who initiated the connection as follows 0 MCU 1 Remote participant Any other number Unknown Min Rate The minimun line rate used by the participant Value range 0 1920000 Max Rate The maximum line rate achieved by the participant Value range 0 1920000 Source Participant The IP address of the calling participant Address A string of up to 255 characters Destination The IP address of the called participant Participant Address A string of up to 255 characters Endpoint Type The endpoint type as follows 0 Terminal 1 Gateway 2 MCU 3 Gatekeeper 4 Undefined A 46 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 30 Event Fields for Events 16 25 H 323 Clear Indication SIP Clear Indication S aal Participant Name The name of the participant as in the reservation Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Disconnect Indicates who initiated the disconnection as follows initi
283. ick Save on the Template menu when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation Template file or click Save Database on the Database menu when the Reservation template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively for all types click the Save button on the toolbar Moving Reservation Templates from one File or Database to another 8 50 It is possible to move a Reservation template from one Reservation Template file or Reservation database to another You do this by using the Cut and Paste functions The Reservation template is copied from the source Reservation Template file or Reservation database to the target Reservation Template file or database After you complete this procedure the Conference definition is erased from the Source Template file or database and exists only in the target Reservation Template file or Reservation database To move a Reservation Template from one file or database to another 1 Open the Reservation Template file or Reservation database 2 Inthe Reservation Template file window expand the Conferences List icon to list the Reservation templates In the Reservations in Database window expand the Groups tree to locate the desired Reservation template A list of Reservation templates appears below the Conference List or Reservations Group icon 3 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Right click the Reservation template icon to be moved and then click Cut ca webof
284. ies identical to the Target Conference Setting Properties defined in the Entry Queue Select the Profile to be used for the definition of the target conference The Profiles list includes all the profiles currently saved on the MCU For more information about Profiles see Profiles on page 3 29 Target Conferences Audio Only IP Only Select this check box to define an Audio Only Entry Queue If the Audio Look amp Feel mode is enabled for the MGC Manager this option is automatically selected Audio Only participants can connect to a video Entry Queue and you do not have to define a separate Entry Queue for Audio Only participants Select this check box to create an IP Only Entry Queue whose target conference are IP Only conferences The target conferences can be set as VoIP conferences Audio Only IP Only or Software Continuous Presence video For a detailed description of SWCP see Chapter 1 Software Continuous Presence Settings on page 1 25 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 3 4 Entry Queue for Ad Hoc Conferencing using a Profile Continued ee eae Encryption Video Switching Transcoding Continuous Presence Select this check box to encrypt this Entry Queue When enabled only encrypted participants can join this Entry Queue while non encrypted participants are disconnected from the MCU For more details about encryption and encrypted Entry Queues see Chapter 1 Media Encrypt
285. iewing IVR Message Services 2 48 Connect to the MGC Unit MCU Expand the MCU tree and then expand the MCU Configuration tree to view the MCU s Configuration options Expand the IVR Msg Services tree to list the IVR Message Services uug Product Management Minor ga MCU Configuration iE Cards ag Connections IVR Msg Services HE attended IVR AV Message Services E Network Services N 3 Operators H cg GateWay Configuration H i Profiles og Recording Links man H The currently defined IVR Message Services are listed by name Click the JVR Msg Services icon to list the IVR Message Services and Entry Queue Services in the Status pane displaying the service names and their defined language You can double click an IVR Message Service to view its properties MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Setting an IVR Message Service as the Default Service The first IVR Service that was defined in the system is automatically set as the default IVR Service However if several services are defined for the MCU you can choose another service as the default IVR Service This default IVR Service will be used in conferences where the IVR Service function is enabled but no specific IVR Service was selected To select the default IVR Service 1 2 List the IVR Services defined in the system Right click the icon of the IVR Message Service to set as default and then click Set As D
286. igure standard Audio cards to include 30 participants in a single Video Switching conference Systems with Audio cards support large Video Switching conferences without additional configuration When the audio bridge unit on the standard Audio card is configured for a conference of up to 30 participants it can run only one conference at a time even if the number of the participants is reduced to less than 16 If the conference started as a small conference and is running on another audio bridge unit when adding the 17th participant the system will attempt to move the conference to the audio bridge unit configured as 1 30 1 indicates the maximum number of conferences 30 indicates the maximum number of participants that can be supported If this audio bridge unit is occupied the 17th participant will be rejected The system uses the audio bridge unit that is set to 30 participants to manage conferences with 17 to 30 participants If the conference has 16 participants or less the system uses other audio bridges if available If no other audio bridge unit is available the audio bridge unit set as 1 30 will run the smaller conference but will not be able to run more than one conference at a time With the Audio card up to 100 participants can connect to one Video Switching conference at 128 Kbps line rate No special settings are required To set the Audio bridge unit to run large Video Switching conferences Standard Audio card 1
287. in the conference Complete the definition of the IVR Service as described in Chapter 2 Defining a New IVR Message Service on page 2 24 Profiles MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Profiles are conference templates stored on the MCU designed mainly for Ad Hoc conferences They must be defined for all Ad Hoc conferencing scenarios Profiles are assigned to Entry Queues designated for Ad Hoc conferencing They allow callers to start a new conference without prior definition of the conference based on the conference properties defined in the Profile assigned to the Entry Queue Only MGC Manager operators with Superuser permission can create modify or delete Profiles Defining Profiles Profile definition is done the same way as defining a regular conference It is recommended to create only Profiles required for Ad Hoc conferences and use Templates database or MGC for all other conferencing modes Profiles can be copied and pasted into Conference Template files and into databases or as Profiles on other MCUs To define a new Profile 1 Inthe Browser area expand the MCU tree and then expand the MCU Configuration tree 2 Right click the Profiles icon and then click New Profile Product Management Normal Ba MCU Configuration H ip Cards Connections IVR Msg Services Ki AV Message Services H amp Network Services H amp Operators H Eas Gateway Configuration New Profile New Operator Profi
288. information see MCU Configuration to Access the External Database Application on page 3 20 Conference level Conference Access Conference Password validation with an External Database Application An additional security measure may be added to the Ad Hoc conference initiation by verifying the conference entry password with the external database In this case only participants with the appropriate passwords will be able to connect to the conference Initiating a conference uses the following method The procedure starts with steps 1 to 7 of the Ad Hoc Entry Queue level Conference initiation Numeric ID validation with an External Database application flow In this flow the Conference Entry Password and the Chairperson password are returned from the database application to the MCU and override these parameters in the Conference Profile When the Ad Hoc conference is started the participant who initiated this conference and all participants subsequently requesting to join the conference are moved to the conference s IVR Queue where they are prompted to enter the conference password When the participant enters the conference password or his her personal password it is sent to the external database application for validation Ifthe password is incorrect and the Operator s Assistance option is enabled the participant is moved to the Participants Queue for assistance If there is no active Operator conference running
289. ints can initiate Ad Hoc conferences using SIP Factories Ad Hoc conferencing using SIP Factories is described in the last section of this chapter 5 Most of this chapter describes Ad Hoc conferences that are initiated via an 3 1 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication Requirements for Ad Hoc Conferencing Before a participant can initiate an Ad Hoc conference the following components must be defined Profiles A Profile is a set of parameters for a conference similar to a template which is used to define the Ad Hoc conference parameters Profiles are stored on the MCU s hard disk and can only be accessed by an operator with Superuser permission Entry Queue Service with Conference Numeric ID support From version 6 0 on each conference is assigned a unique conference ID The Entry Queue Service is configured to prompt for the conference Numeric ID This ID is used to route participants to their destination conferences In Ad Hoc conferencing the Numeric ID is used to check whether the destination conference is already defined or running on the MCU and if not to verify whether the user has the right to start a new conference If an external database application is used to verify the participant s right to start a new conference the Entry Queue Service must be configured accordingly Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue To initiate an Ad Hoc conference Ad Hoc conferencing must be enabled in the
290. ion on page 1 30 Select this option to set the Entry Queue as a Video Switching Entry Queue and save video resources as no video ports are used for participant connection The participants connect to this Entry Queue using the line rate and video settings of the Entry Queue Therefore to move from the Entry Queue to a destination Video Switching conference the destination conference line rate and video settings must be identical to the Entry Queue settings otherwise the endpoint will experience connection failure If the participants are moved from a Video Switching Entry Queue to Transcoding or Continuous Presence conference they retain the video settings of the Entry Queue hence not using the endpoint s best capabilities To use the endpoint s highest capabilities set a different Video Switching Entry Queue for each combination of line rate and video settings used by most endpoints or define a Transcoding or Continuous Presence Entry Queue using video resources Select this option to define a Transcoding Continuous Presence Entry Queue When participants connect to this Entry Queue they use the MCU s video resources Participants connecting to this Entry Queue maintain their highest capabilities when moved to a Transcoding or Continuous Presence conference If the target conference is a Video Switching conference the audio video and line rates of the Entry Queue and the target conference must match or the endpoint
291. ion tree To view the Profiles list Inthe Browser area expand the MCU Configuration tree and expand the Profile tree To view the Profiles list in the Status area click the Profiles icon The Profiles are listed with Conference IDs Passwords dialing numbers and other information MGC Manager VERSION 7 5 0 15 0 x File Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help O S 2 a a als 2 2 ees ls Product Management Normal Bq MCU Configuration FUNG cards T3 connections 8 IVR Msg Services AV Message Services E Ws Network Services E3 T Operators m GaWay cenfig oe 483 10 only cp 4B PROF2 4B sales quarterly meeting vsw 02 00 00 02 00 00 02 00 00 02 00 00 02 00 00 amp On Going Conferences 2 Participant Numbers P Ready POA 3 31 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication Using Profiles In addition to Ad Hoc conferencing Profiles can also be used in the same way as a Conference Template database or Participant Template file Once the Profiles are saved on the MCU a Superuser operator can modify the Profile parameters add and remove participants start a conference immediately based on the selected Profile reserve the conference to start at a later time and perform other actions The selected Profile can be used to start a conference only
292. ipants are connected to the conference MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Il The IVR Service is assigned at the conference level and different conferences can use different IVR Services or the same IVR Service can be used for all conferences In the example in Figure 2 1 a dial in number is assigned to an IVR enabled conference When the participants dial in they are routed to the appropriate conference according to the dial in number they have entered where they enter the conference IVR queue Using the DTMF input device touch tone telephone or endpoint s remote control the participants enter the conference entry password and other information and then they enter the conference accordingly Conference1 Numeric ID 1222 Password 34567 D 71356 ISDN PSTN o Endpoint Y or ay ISDN PSTN Conference2 IP Network Service Endpoint Prefix 925 Numeric ID 1223 Password 71356 Figure 2 1 Dial in Connection via IVR System Dial out participants connecting to the conference also enter the IVR greeting stage if the IVR service assigned to the conference is configured to prompt dial out participants for the conference passwords Entry Queue Access Entry Queue Access is a call routing method in which all participants with the same conference properties dial the same dial in number This dial in number is assigned to the Entry Queue Participants are guided to the conference using menu driven scripts that are par
293. iption and Value EXTERNAL_DB_ The URL of the external database application DIRECTORY For the sample script application the URL is lt virtual directory gt SubmitQuery asp Entry Queue Service with Access to the External Database The Entry Queue Service must be configured to access to an external database application to verify the conference Numeric ID and permission to start a new conference and to enable the Numeric ID Audio Messages To define the access to the External Database application 1 Connect to the MGC unit MCU 2 Click the plus icon next to the MCU icon to expand its tree 3 Double click the MCU Configuration icon or click the plus icon next to it to display the MCU Configuration options aJ Connections H B IvR Msg Services H amp Network Services eal 3 Operators H GB Gateway Configuration gt H rial Profiles ii Recording Links 3 On Going Conferences 0 S On Going Gateway Sessions 0 d Participants Queue 0 Reservations 0 g Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories 6 3 22 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 4 Right click the VR Services icon and then click New Entry Queue Service Ba MCU Configuration H iE Cards 2 el Connections zal E Product Management Normal IB Network Servicer BP operators Messages Status Properties gt a Gateway Configi E Profiles
294. isk appears in the title bar of the Reservation Template file or the Reservations in Database window containing the Reservation template to indicate that changes have been made On the Template menu click Save when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation Template file or on the Database menu click Save Database when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation database to save the changes Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar To add a participant from a Participant Template file or Participant database using the clipboard L Open the Participant Template file or the Participants in Database window When working with the Participant database in the Participants in Database window expand the Groups tree to locate the group where the desired Participant template is stored Expand the Group icon to list the Participant templates assigned to the group MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 3 Right click the participant icon and then click Copy a New Participant F8 Q t Copy As Cut Ctrl x Paste Cry Delete Del Dial Out Ciria Line Rates Properties The participant s definition is copied to the clipboard Use the Copy As option from the right click pop up menu to copy the participant parameters to the clipboard using a new name 4 Ifthe Reservation Template file or the Reservations in Database window containing the Reservation template to
295. itions used mainly to define recording ports and links between cascading conferences These participants should be defined in the Profile if they are used on regular basis Ad Hoc Recording Port The recording port is defined in the Profile in the Participants tab in the same way as it is defined in a standard conference Using the same Profile for all Ad Hoc conferences will result with the same recording port and account for all conferences based on that Profile MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Ad Hoc Cascading Link The link between the Ad Hoc conference and another conference such as a Meeting Room is defined in the Profile in the same way as it is defined in a standard conference The reserved Meet Me Per Conference or the Meeting Room contains a dial in participant as the link from the Ad Hoc conference and is configured to direct access No Entry Queue Access selected no IVR Service is assigned to it 3 15 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication Ad Hoc Auto Cascading 3 16 g The Auto Cascade feature enables automatic cascading of Ad Hoc conferences over multiple MCUs The automatic cascading of conferences is beneficial in distributed MCU environment when MCUs are installed in different locations In Auto Cascading conferences with the same Conference Numeric ID are automatically cascaded Both audio only and video conferences can be cascaded A maximum of six conferences
296. ked participant 8 27 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 8 28 Copy participants from one Reservation template stored in a Reservation Template file or a Reservation database to another Reservation template in the same or a different Reservation Template file or Reservation database If you copy linked participants from a Reservation template in the same database the participants will be added as linked participants Copy participants from an On Going Conference or a Reservation to a Reservation template Drag and drop a Participant Template icon from the Participants in Database window on to a Reservation icon in the Reservations in Database window The participant will be added as a linked participant Adding a New Participant to an Existing Conference You can add a new participant to an existing Reservation template directly This involves entering all the participant s information To add a new participant to an existing Reservation template directly in the Reservation database 1 2 Open the Reservation database In the Reservations in Database window expand the Groups tree to locate the group in which the Reservation template in which you wish to add the participant is stored Expand the Group icon to list the Reservation templates that are assigned to this group MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 4 Right click the icon of the desired Reservation template and then click New Participant Reservati
297. l MGC Manager ver 7 5 z 3 Log Off Debbie go Shut Down The CDR window opens List of MCUs Connect Disconnect Icon Icon MGC Manager CDR connection View Help alo x MCU is not selected Sa lata 2 Name Start Time Reserved Start Time Reserved Dur GMT Of Status For Help press F1 Chapter 9 Call Detail Record CDR Utility 2 From the MCUs list select the MCU whose conference records you wish to view The Connect icon is enabled 3 Click the Connect icon The Logon dialog box opens logon Login Name ji Password Cancel ox 4 Enter your login name and password and then click OK The system displays the list of conference records currently stored in the MCU s memory S CDR List Prod Mgmt 172 22 138 116 lol x File Connection View Help Prod Momt 17222138116 Sle Name Start Time Duration Reserved Start Time Reserved Duration GMT Offset Status al POLYCOM Feb 02 2004 01 11 25 02 00 00 Feb 02 2004 01 11 25 02 00 00 2 Ongoing conference BW debbie Feb 02 2004 12 54 14 00 20 33 Feb 02 2004 12 54 14 02 00 00 2 Terminated by operator BW Product Management Feb 02 2004 11 43 14 01 59 56 Feb 02 2004 11 43 14 02 00 00 2 Terminated when end time passed 2 Text Feb 01 2004 05 17 55 01 59 56 Feb 01 2004 05 17 55 02 00 00 2 Terminated when end time passed BW debbie Feb 01 2004 04 07 16 01 59 56 Feb 01 2004 04 07 16 02 00 00 2
298. l properties of the IVR software module Defining a new IVR Service Defining a new Entry Queue Service Verifying the Messages Status What is an IVR Service The IVR Service includes a set of voice prompts that allow support of multiple languages and user specific voice prompts This set is activated when a participant connects to the Polycom MCU for conference access or when certain events occur during the conference such as voting sessions Q amp A sessions requests for operator assistance and modifying self volume The IVR service is also used to enable special conferencing features such as Roll Call and SilencelT The IVR Service is assigned to specific conferences A different IVR Service can be assigned to each conference or the same IVR Service can be used for all conferences If an IVR Service is assigned to the conference the caller must respond through the touch tone keypad to the voice prompts defined in the IVR Service in order to connect to the conference Different IVR Services can be created allowing customization of the menu driven scripts and voice prompts to meet different needs For video conferences a IVR Service can include a video slide that is displayed when the participants connect to an Entry Queue or an IVR queue The Entry Queue Service is a subset of the IVR Service It is used in conjunction with the Entry Queue Using a limited set of voice prompts the callers are routed to the appropriate conferen
299. lds such as the time stamp and the event type code followed by fields that are event specific Standard Event Record Fields All unformatted event records start with the following fields Table A 2 Event Record Standard Fields ee ay CDR Event Type Code The CDR event type code as follows 1 The conference started 2 The conference ended 3 A network channel connected 4 A network channel disconnected 5 A participant connected 7 A participant disconnected 8 Achange occurred in the remote communication mode 9 Asummary of participant errors 10 A reserved participant was added 11 An ATM channel connected 12 An ATM channel disconnected 13 An MPI channel connected 14 An MPI channel disconnected 15 An H 323 call setup occurred 16 An H 323 clear indication occurred 17 An H 323 participant connected 18 A new undefined participant joined the conference 19 An unrecognized event occurred 20 A participant entered a billing code using DTMF codes 21 An operator assigned a visual name to a participant 22 A DTMF code failure occurred 23 A SIP participant connected 24 A SIP call setup occurred 25 A SIP clear indication occurred MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 2 Event Record Standard Fields Continued te er CDR Event Type Code cont 26 A recording event occurred for example recording started or recording resumed
300. le Print All 3 29 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication The Conference Properties General dialog box is displayed Default Conference Properties Product Management 3 Define the Profile parameters These parameters are identical to the Conference Template parameters For parameter details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining a New Video Conference or the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 2 Defining New On Going Audio Conferences Ifconference access authentication with an external database application is required for this conference in the Properties Settings dialog box select an IVR service in which the External Server Authentication option is set to Always or Upon Request 3 30 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Password and the conference Numeric ID in the profile as all Ad Hoc conferences initiated from the Entry Queue s to which it is assigned will have the same Numeric ID and Passwords e The option for adding participants to the profile is intended for recording port and cascading link definitions e Itis not recommended to enter the Conf Entry Password Chairperson 4 Click OK to complete the Profile definition A new Profile is created and added to the Profiles list Listing Profiles The Profiles are stored on the MCU s hard disk and can be viewed under the MCU Configurat
301. le A 23 Event Fields for Events 10 101 105 Reserved Participant Operator Add Participant Operator Update Participant on page A 38 Note There is one event for each participant in the reservation CDR event code 2010 Additional information about a reserved participant For a description of the fields see Table A 24 Event Fields for Events 2010 2101 2105 Reserved Participant Continue 1 Operator Add Participant Continue 1 Operator Update Participant Continue 1 on page A 41 CDR event code 11 The connection of an ATM channel For a description of the fields see Table A 25 Event Fields for Event 11 ATM Channel Connected on page A 43 CDR event code 12 The disconnection of an ATM channel For a description of the fields see Table A 26 Event Fields for Event 12 ATM Channel Disconnected on page A 44 CDR event code 13 The connection of an MPI channel For a description of the fields see Table A 27 Event Fields for Event 13 MPI Channel Connected on page A 44 CDR event code 14 The disconnection of an MPI channel For a description of the fields see Table A 28 Event Fields for Event 14 MPI Channel Disconnected on page A 45 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 3 CDR Event Types Continued ee H 323 Call Setup CDR event code 15 The call setup of an H 323 participant For a description of the fields see Table A 29 Event Fields for Eve
302. le to join a conference from an Entry Queue as an encrypted participant encryption must be enabled for the Entry Queue All non encrypted participants connecting to an encrypted Entry Queue that is encryption enabled are disconnected from the MCU Encrypted participants can be moved from an encrypted Entry Queue to the destination conference depending on the destination conference settings and the setting of the participant level flag in the system cfg file If the target conference is encrypted and the participant level flag is set to YES encrypted and non encrypted participants from both encrypted and non encrypted Entry Queues can join the target conference If the target conference is encrypted and the participant level flag is set to NO only the encrypted participants from an encrypted Entry Queue can join the target conference If the target conference is not encrypted and the participant level flag is set to YES encrypted and non encrypted participants from both encrypted and non encrypted Entry Queues can join the target conference If the target conference is not encrypted and the participant level flag is set to NO only non encrypted participants can join the target conference stage LS Enabling encryption for Entry Queues can only be done at the setup reservation 1 33 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings To enable encryption for the Entry Queue Inthe Entry Queue Properties dialog box select the Encry
303. lication must be installed on the same computer deployed as the data source This computer is connected via the LAN to the ViewStation endpoint that will broadcast the data to all conference participants The data stream can be received by both ViewStation and ViewStation FX endpoints Data Source Computer running Visual Concert Figure 1 1 Visual Concert PC Configuration Scheme To be able to broadcast data you must first configure the link between the computer deployed as the data source and the ViewStation PC that will broadcast the data stream to all other endpoints MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To activate the Visual Concert PC application l Run the Visual Concert PC application The Polycom Visual Concert PC dialog box opens Polycom Visual Concert PC x IP Address of ViewStation Meeting Password WK Cancel In the ZP Address of ViewStation box enter the IP address of the ViewStation to broadcast the data stream to all other endpoints In the Meeting Password box enter the password defined for the endpoint Click OK The data stream can now be broadcasted Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings To select the Visual Concert PC dual stream mode for a video conference 1 Inthe Conference Properties General dialog box define a standard Video Switching conference 2 Click the Settings tab The Conference Properties Settings dialog box opens Default Conference Pro
304. lick the Disconnect icon 2 The MCU is disconnected and the CDR window returns to a blank screen 9 5 Chapter 9 Call Detail Record CDR Utility The CDR Window Conferences List The Conferences list summarizes the information of each conference stored in the MCU s memory in a table format Each row of the table represents a conference record Each column represents a data field in the record Table 9 1 Conference Record Fields i Reserved Start The time the conference was scheduled to start Time Discrepancy between the scheduled and the actual start time may indicate that a communication problem occurred at the beginning of the conference Reserved The time the conference was scheduled to last Duration Discrepancy between the scheduled and the actual duration may indicate that the conference duration was prolonged or shortened GMT Offset The time zone difference between your site and Greenwich Mean Time The conference status File Retrieved Indicates whether the conference record was retrieved and archived A diskette icon indicates that the conference record was saved to file Retrieving and Archiving Conference Records To retrieve and archive conference records 1 Select the conference whose information you would like to retrieve and archive from the conferences list Use standard Windows multi selection methods to select several records 9 6 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 2 Right cli
305. ll users In addition the administrator can add modify entries to all the administrative tables To display the database tables Click the plus icon next to the icon of the database whose tables you wish to display The database tree is displayed Database name Browser area Status area 3 DatabaseManager Vers on 7 5 0 6 File Edit View Options Help GS Defaults gE Conference Defaults U User Defined Defaults Q IMGC Manager Defaults LE Conference Defaults Participant Defaults 4 Participant Defaults U User Defined Defaults MGC Manager Defaults 4 Labels D Permissions Users E i Groups Root e Default e WebOffice Tables displayed only when an administrator is logged in The tree categories that represent the database tables change according to the Permission assigned to the user who logged into the database Users with any permissions other than Administrator can only view and modify the Default tables they own Users with the Administrator permission can view and modify all the database tables MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The following modes are available in the database tree Defaults enables users to define conference participant and general system default parameters Users with permissions to modify the database Database Configuration option is checked in the Permissions dialog box can define default settings to be used by all the MGC Database Manager users Users without
306. ll MCUs are installed at the same location site and are connected to the same network and PBX This mode employs the same basic principle as the Cluster mode where local Meeting Rooms connect to the main Meeting Room The PBX is configured to forward the calls from one MCU to another when all the ports on one MCU are used In all MCUs in the network the Meeting Rooms have the same configuration and each one of them includes a link to the main Meeting Room on the Master MCU must be defined as both Meet Me Per Conference and Entry Queue Access the participants connect via the Entry Queue while the cascade links connect directly This applies to MCU Cluster and MCU Rollover cascading modes i To allocate dial in numbers to the main Meeting Room on the Master MCU it Using DTMF Codes in Cascading Conferences DTMF codes can be used in a cascaded conference if the MCU is capable of sending the DTMF codes to several MCUs These codes enable the chairperson to control all the participants in the cascaded conference Using DTMF codes the chairperson can perform the following operations in a cascaded conference e Set the chairperson as the conference s exclusive speaker while muting all other conference participants e Terminate the conference e Lock or unlock the conference to dial in participants e Secure or release a secured conference e Place the conference on hold If the chairperson uses any other D
307. lp Define the participant Name Select the network Interface Type that will be used by the participants If you select H323 or SIP as the Interface Type the Identification and Advanced fields change The dentification tab fields for ISDN ATM MPI H 323 and SIP Interface Types are described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties The dentification tab fields for T1 CAS Interface Type are described in the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 2 Defining Participant Properties When defining a new participant during the definition of an Audio Only Conference or Reservation participant properties relevant to audio participants are displayed For more information see the MGC User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 2 Defining Participant Properties 7 37 Chapter 7 Database Templates 7 38 6 Check the Participant Linked check box to add the participant to the database If you clear the Participant Linked check box the participant will be embedded which means that he she will only be added to the conference and not to the database If you have Labels defined in the database and you want to use them for filtering the Participant templates assign a Label to the template In the Label list select the appropriate label 7 Click the Advanced tab to define additional parameters This step is optional as the default settings can apply to
308. lume I Chapter 5 are used to indicate the participant status In addition to the icons the following indications may appear in the Status column in the Status and Monitor panes of the MGC Manager s main window Table 4 3 Status column indications Sa eee ee Welcome Waiting Indicates that the participant is connected to the MCU Connected and is currently waiting in the Welcome queue Attended Faulty Indicates that the participant is taking part in an Operator Connected conference and is being assisted by the operator Hold Connected Indicates that the participant is on hold not taking part in any conference While on hold the participant views the Welcome Video Slide and hears the On Hold audio message assigned in the Messages Service 4 21 Chapter 4 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences Participant Queues 4 22 In the Participants Queue window the system lists the participants who require the operator s assistance or are on hold in all conferences regardless of which conference they belong to The Participants Queue is mainly intended for Attended conferences The Participants Queue window facilitates the operator s work by providing special tool bars command buttons and options to easily move the participants from the Participants Queue window to their destination conference For more information about the Participant Queue see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 8 The
309. ly Help To define and add a new participant to the Reservation template click the New button The Participant Properties Identification dialog box opens Define the participant s parameters as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties You can also add existing participants to the template from a Participant Template file For details see To add a participant from a Participant Template file or Participant database using the Conference Properties dialog box on page 8 31 If you are defining a Continuous Presence or Lecture Mode Conference click the Video Sources tab The Conference Properties Video Sources dialog box opens MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 7 Select the appropriate Video Layout and if you have assigned participants to the template you can force them to the selected video window For details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Video Sources If you are defining a Lecture Mode conference you can enable Lecture Mode and define Lecture Mode parameters For details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 10 Lecture and Presentation Options 8 Ifyou have checked the Meet Me per Conference option in the Conference Properties General dialog box click the Meet Me per Conf tab Define the Meet Me per Conference parameters as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 7 Meet M
310. m the Entry Queue to the conference IVR queue they can be requested to enter the conference entry password and or the chairperson password Alternatively you can configure the IVR Service not to request any password or to request that participants enter any key to confirm their presence When the system connects a dial out participant to the conference not via an Entry Queue in many cases there is no need for the participants to enter the conference password as they have been predefined in the system However you may require participants to enter a password or to press any key digit to confirm their presence and join the conference Select the required system behavior as follows Request password The system requests the participant to enter the conference password and after the correct conference password is provided moves the participant to the conference Request digit identifier The system requests the participant to enter a random key and after any key is pressed moves the participant to the conference This option is used mainly for dial out participants and to prevent an answering machine from entering the conference None The participant is moved to the conference without any password request MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 15 If you have enabled the conference password request and defined the system behavior for dial in and dial out participants select the various audio messages that will b
311. me I Chapter 4 Defining a New Video Conference Click OK to complete the changes and close the Conference Properties dialog box MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Click Save on the Template menu when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation Template file or click Save Database on the Database menu when the Reservation template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar The changes you made in the Reservation template are saved To modify an individual participant s information 1 In the Reservation Template file or Reservations in Database window double click the Conferences List or Group icon to expand the list of Reservation templates Double click the icon of the Reservation template to modify The list of participants defined in the Reservation template appears below the Reservation template s icon Right click the icon of the participant whose information you need to change and then click Properties Alternatively double click on the participant icon The Participant Properties dialog box opens Modify the settings in the Participant Properties dialog box as needed For a detailed description of the participant properties see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties Click OK in the Participant Properties dialog box to complete the modification of the participant properties
312. me No Wait conference upon connection to the MCU the participant enters the Greeting stage In this stage the participants are transferred to the Participants Queue where they view the video slide and hear the audio message After a predefined period participants are automatically transferred to the appropriate conference Home conference The welcome video slide audio message and the waiting period in the queue are defined in the AV Message Service assigned to the conference An Attended or a Welcome conference is set using the same options as for the following standard conferences Setting an On Going Conference directly Setting a Reservation directly Defining a Reservation template To define the Greet and Guide specific parameters l Open the Conference Properties General dialog box using one of the following three methods Inthe MGC Manager main window right click the On Going Conferences icon and then click New Conference Inthe MGC Manager main window right click the Reservations icon and then click New Reservation MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Inthe Reservations in lt database gt window expand the Groups hierarchy until you locate the Group to which to add the Greet and Guide Reservation template Right click the Group icon and then click New Res Template In the Conference Properties General dialog box define the conference Name and Duration and then set the conferences typ
313. me 5 Geo wieder st tou i EE A A i T Audio Only T vip Label None bA IV Participant linked Change the participant s name or any other parameters and then click OK The participant s details are copied to the clipboard under the new name In the Reservation database the On Going Conferences or Reservations list right click the icon of the destination conference 7 23 Chapter 7 Database Templates 7 24 A pop up menu appears Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Default Attending Print Template Cut Crrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste cri Paste As Ctrl P Delete Del Properties Click Paste The participant s details are copied to the destination conference or reservation under the same name Alternatively click Paste As The Participant Properties dialog box opens If you have selected Paste As type the desired name that you wish to save the participant as and then click OK The participant s details are copied to the new conference or Reservation template under the new name To copy the participant properties from a Participant template l 2 Open the Participants in Database window Expand the Template Groups tree until you locate the participant you wish to copy Right click the icon of the participant you wish to copy and then click Copy or press lt Ctrl gt lt C gt The participant is copied to the clipboard MGC Manager
314. meters in the Profile 8 The participant is moved to the conference If no IVR Service is assigned to the conference or if no password request is configured in the IVR Service assigned to the conference the participant that initiated the conference is directly connected to the conference as its chairperson 9 Ifthe IVR Service assigned to the conference is configured to prompt for the conference entry password and chairperson password without external database authentication the participant has to enter these passwords in order to join the conference On Going Conference eat Numeric ID 1234 new conference External Database 9251222 aN a Conference NO it o Gia ey poj Ww Entry i ae Profile New Conference Parameters Numeric ID 1300 Figure 3 2 Conference Initiation Validation with External Database Application To enable this workflow the following components must be defined in the system e A conference Profile with the conference properties MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II An Entry Queue Service configured with the appropriate Numeric ID Request messages and with enabled access to the external database for authentication An Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue with an assigned Profile An external database application with a database containing Numeric Conference IDs associated with participants and their relevant properties The MCU must be configured to access the external database For more
315. ministrator can select the MCU s on Custom MCU which the user may schedule reservations or start On Going Conferences Select this check box to select the MCU s for the user When cleared the user will be able to run conferences on all the MCU s defined in the MGC Web Server Select MCUs Click this button to designate the MCUs on which the user can run conferences Creation amp Click this button to expand this dialog box to reveal Authentication additional fields for creating and authenticating conferences and participants Note These additional fields are used when WebCommander is used as the external database application for conference initiation and conference access authentication 6 55 Chapter 6 Using a Database 6 56 To select the MCUs for a user in the User Properties window select the Custom MCU check box and then click the Select MCUs button The MCUs Per User dialog box opens MCU s Per User x Selected MCUs MCUs in Selected In Order The MCUs list shows all currently defined MCUs that were not assigned to the user The Selected MCUs list shows the MCUs currently assigned to the user To assign MCUs to the user in the MCUs list click the MCU name s and then click the Add gt gt button Multi selection is available using standard Windows conventions The selected MCUs appear in the Selected MCUs list To cancel the assignment of MCUs to the user in the Selected MCUs list click the MC
316. mmands from one endpoint to the camera of another endpoint When the data token is released by the endpoint holding it the token can be taken by another endpoint IP or ISDN without the MCU closing the data channel or stream If the token is not released by the endpoint the MGC Manager operator can also withdraw the data token from the endpoint FECC LSD Guidelines e The system allocates the LSD channel from the video channel bandwidth resulting in a lower line rate for the conference In Video Switching conferences in which FECC LSD is enabled ISDN endpoints that do not support LSD and cannot open the LSD channel connect as Secondary Audio only while IP endpoints remain connected at their initial line rate In Continuous Presence and Transcoding conferences ISDN endpoints that do not support LSD remain connected at their initial line rate In encrypted conferences with ISDN and IP participants the FECC channel rate is always 4 8 Kbps e Jn H 320 Master Slave cascading conferences only the FECC LSD 6 4 fixed rate option is available In such a conference when a request for MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II the data token is invoked by an operator connected to the slave MCU the slave MCU checks if another participant possesses the data token If yes the request is rejected If no the request is transferred to the Master MCU which opens the FECC LSD channel of all the participants in the Master conference
317. most participants and will not require changing 8 Define the various Advanced parameters These parameters change according to the Interface Type selected in the Identification dialog box The Advanced fields for ISDN ATM MPI H 323 and SIP are described in the User Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties The Advanced fields for T1 CAS are described in the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 2 Defining Participant Properties 9 Click OK to add the Participant template to the Conference Participants list of the Reservation template You can define the dentification and Advanced properties for both ISDN ATM and H 323 of the same participant if the endpoint supports both interface types First select the appropriate Interface Type then define the Identification and Advanced fields and click OK Open the Participant Properties Identification dialog box again and select another nterface Type Then define the dentification and Advanced fields Both definitions will be stored in the system s memory 10 Repeat steps 3 to 9 to define additional Participant templates 11 Continue the definition of the conference properties 12 Save the Reservation and Participant databases by clicking Save Database from the Database menu or click the Save button im on the toolbar 13 On the Database menu click Refresh Database to update the Participants in Database window and view the Partici
318. n ISDN environment H 323 Duo Video if the conference is run in an IP Only environment The annexes are automatically selected by the system To view or configure additional Media Settings information click the Advanced button Click the Participants tab The Conference Properties Participants dialog box opens Define the participants to be used for the content presentation If you want to force the participant to the video window one to be seen by all click the Video Sources tab The Conference Properties Video sources dialog box opens In the Video Layout window select the participant name to force this endpoint as the presenter For video Forcing details see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 6 Video Forcing Complete the conference definition and click OK to apply the settings Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings Polycom Visual Concert PC gy Polycom s Visual Concert PC is an endpoint feature that enables the sending of two alternating video streams video and data Typically the video stream is transmitted in the standard H 263 resolution in high frame rate while the data video stream is transmitted in a higher resolution but lower frame rate The Visual Concert PC option is available with Polycom s ViewStation endpoints This option is available only in Video Switching conferences for both H 320 and H 323 participants To activate this option the Polycom Visual Concert PC app
319. n cascaded conferences MCUs are networked together using two modes e MCU Cluster used for MCUs at different locations e MCU Rollover used for MCUs installed at the same location MCU Cluster In MCU Cluster mode the MCUs are installed at different locations states countries each MCU running its own conference When all of these conferences are cascaded between them they create one large conference that runs over a network of MCUs This configuration is used to save long distance charges by connecting each participant to their local MCU while only the links between the distributed conferences are billed as long distance calls 1 43 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings 1 44 To enable unattended cascaded conferences to run the following setup items are required on each MCU e Select one MCU to be the main MCU to which the conferences in all other MCUs will connect e Define an Entry Queue Access enabled Meeting Room on each MCU The Entry Queue Access is used for live participants e Assign a dial in number for direct dial in to the Meeting Room on the main MCU This number will be used by the links to dial into the Meeting Room and connect to it e Set up a link for each Meeting Room on the MCUs other than the designated main MCU to the Meeting Room defined on the main MCU a dial out participant The dial out number defined for each of these participants is the dial in number assigned to the Meeting Room e D
320. n is invoked by an operator connected to the slave MCU the slave MCU checks if another participant possesses the data token If another participant does possess the data token the request is rejected If not the request is transferred to the Master MCU which opens the FECC LSD channel of all the participants in the Master conference When participants connect to the conference the MCU assigns a terminal number to each of them The MCU sends these numbers to all the terminals connected to the conference including terminals connected to the slave MCUs If a terminal has a name assigned to it the MCU will also display this name together with the terminal number The following information is available to the chair control terminal e The numbers assigned to each of the participants in the conference The number is composed of the MCU number and the terminal number A list of all the terminal numbers is displayed on the chairperson s endpoint as well as the names of all the other endpoints that support the H 243 standard Endpoint names when available are also displayed together with the terminal numbers e Requests for chair control from other participants The list of endpoint numbers and names is updated by the MCU on all the endpoints when participants connect or disconnect from the conference In Continuous Presence mode when the video layout is different from full screen the terminal number of the source video for each window is
321. n template can be launched directly from the Participants Queue pop up menu enabling fast access to the participants waiting in the Welcome queue Only one Operator Reservation template can be set as the default To set an operator conference template as the default Attending Operator Conference 1 Expand the Template Groups hierarchy by clicking the plus icon next to each Template Group until you locate the Template Group storing the Operator Reservation template 7 31 Chapter 7 Database Templates 2 Right click the Operator Reservation template icon to be defined as default and then click Default Attending Operator H 4 perator Start Immediately Start New Participant Default Attending Print Template Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl y Paste 4s Gtrl P Delete Del Properties The next time you access the right click pop up menu a check mark appears next to the function to indicate that the selected Operator Reservation template is set as default The selection of an Operator Reservation template as default automatically cancels the existing default setting To cancel the selection of an Operator Reservation template as default either repeat the definition procedure above or select another Operator Reservation template as default 7 32 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Participant Templates Participants can be added to Reservations or On Going Conferences usin
322. n the figure above and then click Next to continue 10 Click the Change the default database to check box and select the database that was restored in the SQL Server Create a New Data Source to SQL Server as appropriate while pou are 11 Click Next to continue 12 To change the User Interface language used in the database click the Change the Language of SQL Server System Message to check box and select the desired language from the drop down list Create a New Data Source to SQL Server 6 25 Chapter 6 Using a Database 13 Click Finish A message window appears on the screen ODBC Microsoft SQL Server Setup 14 Click the Test Data Source button to make sure that the appropriate database was selected The message Test completed successfully appears SQL Server ODBC Data Source Test 15 Click OK to confirm The selected database is added to the System DSN list 16 Click OK to exit the ODBC 6 26 17 18 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II When registering the database in the ODBC from within the MGC Manager application a confirmation message appears Select Yes to refresh the list of the databases available to the operator Select No to refresh the database list manually In that case the database will not be available to the user until the list is refreshed manually If you have selected Yes the system attempts to open all the databases registered in the ODB
323. nable Operator Assistance on Failure lt Back Cancel Help 11 Fill in the appropriate parameters For a detailed description of these parameters see Chapter 2 IVR Properties Operator Assistance Messages on page 2 40 12 Complete the definition of the Entry Queue Service as described in Chapter 2 Defining a New Entry Queue Message Service on page 2 53 3 26 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II IVR Service with Access to the External Database Application This component is necessary only for conferences that require password verification with an external database application In this case an external database application is queried by the MCU to verify whether a participant is allowed to access the conference The MGC WebCommander Server may be used as an external database application designed to communicate with the MCU and perform queries in Users tables participants Access to an external database application is configured at the conference level in the IVR Service To define access to the External Database application 1 Connect to the MGC unit MCU 2 Click the plus icon next to the MCU icon to expand its tree and then double click the MCU Configuration icon or click the plus icon next to it to display the MCU Configuration options to On Going Conferences 0 On Going Gateway Sessions O re Participants Queue 0 H Reservations 0 H a Meeting Room
324. narios the Entry Queue is configured to enable Ad Hoc conferencing with the conference parameters defined in a Profile assigned to it The Entry Queue Service assigned to the Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue is configured to prompt for the conference Numeric ID and if required access the External Database application for authentication Conference access authentication can be part of the Ad Hoc conferencing flow where the participants must be authorized before they can enter the conference or independent of Ad Hoc conferencing where the participant does not need to be authorized in order to enter the conference This second mode is usually used for an organization s internal Ad Hoc conferencing When Ad Hoc conferencing for conference creation is the first stage in the flow the Entry Queue is configured to Ad Hoc conferencing with the conference parameters defined in a Profile assigned to it The Entry Queue Service assigned to the Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue is usually configured to access the External Database application for conference creation authentication In the external database application you must define all users with rights to start a new conference using Ad Hoc conferencing For each user defined in the database you enter the conference Numeric ID Conference Entry Password and Chairperson Password when applicable billing code Conference general information corresponding to the User Defined 1 field in the Profile properties u
325. nces 5 13 An Example of Defining a Star Cascading Conference 5 15 An Example of Defining a Multi Hierarchy Cascading CONPELEN CES seeistecee oestene abescgn ces eta erR aa EEEE T R REE E 5 18 Managing a Cascading Conference esrsrisesrsrcrciorresrrirsisuresee 5 20 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Monitoring Participants in a Cascading Conference 5 21 H2743 Chor COntrol cise scasscesscavsasscesscaasevssenssecsstussps EA AE 5 23 Withdrawing the Chair Token during a Conference 5 26 Using a Database icicaccewn ices ee teow nies i eaees 6 1 Database Configuration ccccccesessccesseeeeseceseeesseeceeeenesenseeensseeneneees 6 3 Registering the Access Database in ODBC Data Sources 6 4 SQL Server Configuration and Registration Optional 6 11 Restoring the SQL Database o eee eeceeceesceeseeeneeeseeseeeneeenneeaes 6 11 Registering the SQL Database in ODBC Data Sources 6 19 Database Manager siessenek aiae rea e 6 28 Logging into the Database Manager eeeceecceceeeceeeeeeneeeees 6 28 Upgrading from a Previous Version e ccecseceeeceeeeeeeeeees 6 31 Displaying the Database Tables cceeesceesseeseeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeseeeneeaes 6 34 The Database Manager Toolbar cececesceeeceeeeeeeeeeneeees 6 35 DoS taults is sess ecss yess steatervestecsesst vert eis vesiytees ives ade aeons Gee 6 37 Defining User Defined Defaults 0
326. nces Without password Without password None None None None None WebOffice Reservation Templates V Read V write Participant Templates V Read IV White View MCU Conferences Enter without passwore 7 Close This dialog box lists all the currently defined users It also displays their current Read and Write permissions to the Reservation and Participant templates assigned to this group RW indicates that the user may view Read and add delete or modify Write templates R indicates that the user may only view Read templates None indicates that the user has no access rights to this group To set or modify the access rights of a user to the group 1 2 Click the user name Click the Conference Templates Read and Write check boxes to enable disable the user to view read and or add write conference templates to the group Click the Write check box to automatically check the Read check box Click the Participant Templates Read and Write check boxes to enable disable the user to view read and or add write Participant templates to 6 67 Chapter 6 Using a Database the group Click the Write check box to automatically check the Read check box Leaving the check boxes cleared means that the user has no access to the Reservation and Participant templates assigned to this group it will appear as None in the list In the View MCU Conferences list click o
327. nces the Content graphics is sent and received in the same resolution In an IP ISDN Gateway session when both endpoints support 4CIF the MCU declares 4CIF capabilities e 4ACIF is available in cascading conferences However both conferences must have the same properties and require selection of the H 263 Video Protocol The cascading link then inherits the properties of both conferences e Participants can be moved between conferences with different resolutions from CIF to 4CIF or 4CIF to CIF The MCU automatically adjusts the resolution to match the new conference and or participant settings 4CIF Global Setting at the MCU Level 4CIF is enabled in the MCU in the system cfg file VIDEO PLUS FLAGS section SysConfig system cfg 172 22 138 103 loj x EA joe p Section VIDEO PLUS FLAGS Item Value OK VIDEO_PLUS_YES_NO YES cop SINGLE LINE_RATE_THRESHOLD YES Cancel GLE_ENABLE_QCIF NO ENABLE CLICK_AND_VIEW_SPLASH YES ENABLE GYIDEGCOMMANDER YES p __AdD gt PARTY RAME_ALWa s_ON NO ae NAME TE acir THRESHOLD 512 Sb ssis ltem REMOVE Section Edit value Make sysenc file CP_4CIF YES This flag enables or disables 4CIF at the MCU level YES default enables 4CIF and NO disables it e 4CIF_THRESHOLD 512 This flag defines the minimum conference line rate for transmitting 4CIF from the conference to the endpoints 512 Kbp
328. nd the Group icon where the Reservation template is stored The list of Reservation templates assigned to the group is displayed 4 Double click the icon of the Reservation template whose participants you want to list or click the plus icon next to the Reservation Template icon A list of participants is displayed P Reservations in AccordDB loj x Root n See ae Office Reservation Pfeil Office Reservation bs Herman bs Jean bs Marvin Ra Ron te Steve a Sue Polycom 8 26 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Adding Participants to an Existing Reservation Template Reservation templates can contain two types of participants linked participants and embedded participants Linked participants are only applicable to database Reservation templates When adding a Linked participant a pointer to the Participant template is added to the reservation without copying its data into the reservation When modifying the properties of a Linked participant in one reservation or template its properties are also modified in all the reservations to which the participant is linked and in the Participant template if the changes were made in the reservation Participants who are embedded in a reservation do not appear as an entry in the Participant database and cannot be viewed in the Participants in Database window They can only be viewed as part of th
329. ne of the following options No The user will not be able to view the reservations Meeting Rooms and On Going Conferences assigned to other users of the same group even if the View All options are enabled in the Permissions assigned to this user Enter with Password The user will be able to view Reservations Meeting Rooms and On Going Conferences scheduled by other users assigned to this group if the appropriate password is entered upon their selection Enter without Password The user will be able to view all Reservations Meeting Rooms and On Going Conferences scheduled by other users assigned to this group without any restrictions Click the Close button to finish the access rights definition and exit this dialog box Defining a New Label Labels are used to sort Reservation or Participant templates Labeling enables the remote user to filter conferences or Participant templates when accessing the database to schedule or monitor conferences To define a new Label 1 Inthe Browser area right click the Label icon Click Add New Label to DB in the pop up menu bx Add New Label to dB 2 6 68 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Label Properties dialog box opens Nae SCS 3 Inthe Name box type the label name Sorting of the conferences or parties may be done according to this name 4 Choose OK to confirm and add the new Label to the database Viewing the Labels List In the Brows
330. nected Single Participant 3 Link Out D gt connected 7087996 Bet Dia out i OK 128 128 o Audio Video Link Ea conference s 1 Connected Single Participant LinkOut 2 D Connected 7087998 ga Dia out Qi OK 128 128 o Audio Video Link Ready O r a 5 17 Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences 5 18 An Example of Defining a Multi Hierarchy Cascading Conference m Dial up a al up m ii 7087998 Fi ve 7087998 i pi NT IDV a gui ime E ats a MCU B lo ra MCU C MCU A Master Conference ConferenceA Dial up Participant Dial in Link 7087999 Connection Type Dial in Link In Dial in Number 7087996 Link In 2 Dial in Number 70879998 fl Jiii Conference Properties Settings tab nr Cascade Master p il ili face fies ey Slave Conference ConferenceB Participant Dial out Link Connection Type Dial out Dial out Number 7087996 Conference Properties Settings tab Cascade Slave Master Name Link Out MCU C Master Slave Conference ConferenceC Participant Dial in Link Slave Conference ConferenceD Connection Type Dial in Participant Dia eut Link Link In from conf D Dial in Number Connection Type Dial out MCU D 7087999 Dial out Number 7087999 Participant Dial out Link Conference Properties Settings tab Connection Type Dial out Cascade Slave Dial out Number 7087998 Master Name Link Out to Conf C Conference Properties Settings tab Cascade Slave Master Name
331. nected 172 22 193 67 be Diakout i Ready I Participants of an Attended Wait conference that are waiting for operator assistance are listed both in their Home conference and in the Participants Queue Participants of a Welcome No Wait conference who are in the Greeting stage are only listed in the Home conference Icons used to indicate the Participant Status Specific icons are used to identify the participant status in a Greet and Guide conference as follows Table 4 2 Greet and Guide Participant Status Ce The participant was moved to the Operator conference the Attended stage and is being assisted by the operator The participant is in the Greeting stage and has been placed in the Participants Queue 4 20 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 4 2 Greet and Guide Participant Status Continued a When there is a problem with the participant connection while in the Greeting stage an exclamation point appears next to the participant icon The participant is connected to the MCU and is waiting in the Participants Queue for the operator s assistance When a fault occurs while the participant is in the Participants Queue an exclamation point appears next to the participant icon The participant is on hold not taking part in any conference When placed on hold the participant hears background music Once connected to the conference the standard icons see the MGC Manager User s Guide Vo
332. nference You can create different Entry Queue Services for different languages and personalized voice messages To set up a new Entry Queue Message Service 1 Connect to the MGC Unit MCU 2 Expand the MCU tree and then expand the MCU Configuration tree 3 Right click the VR Services icon and then click New Entry Queue Service mt Product Management Minor i ga MCU Configuration ys Cards ae Connections New Entry Queue Service E paste as Ctrl P Paste Gerl y Messages Status Properties ia amm Hy ap Operators zax Gateway Configuration T Profiles og Recording Links H HF 2 53 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services The Entry Queue Message Service dialog box opens x Entry Queue Service Name Demo EQ Language for IVR ENGLISH hd Extemal Server None mi Number of User Input Retries 3 Timeout for User Input 5 sec DTMF Delimiter Back Next gt Cancel Help This dialog box enables you to define the general parameters of the Entry Queue Service 4 Fill in the following parameters Table 2 12 Entry Queue Global Parameters ae Entry Queue Mandatory Enter the name of the Entry Queue Service Name Service Language for Select the language in which the Audio Messages and IVR prompts will be heard The languages are defined in the IVR Properties dialog box see To define the IVR Properties on page 2 17
333. nference ID dialog box opens Conference Id E xj Name Messagefe Request Conference Id CNFIDROS ACA Join failure Message Join failure Message gt Add Message File cot Hoe The following messages and prompts may be played to request the conference Numeric ID Table 3 3 Conference Password parameters a eae Request Select the audio file that prompts the participant for Conference ID the conference Numeric ID Join Failure Select the audio file that requests the participant to Message re enter the conference Numeric ID when failing to enter the correct conference Numeric ID 3 25 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication 9 To assign the audio file to the message type click the appropriate table entry The message type appears at the bottom of the table and the drop down list displays the names of the audio files stored in the MGC unit s memory want to add new audio files click Add Message File to download the appropriate audio file to the MGC units memory For the downloading procedure see step 8 on page page 2 29 If the files were not downloaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you 10 Click Next The Operator Assistance dialog box opens operator Assistance xi IV Enable Operator Assistance Operator Assistance Indication Message OPERHELPAC x Add Message File Disconnection Message GOODBYE ACA 7 Add Message File IV E
334. not indicated in the endpoint s video windows VIN2 mode MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Chair Control option is enabled in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box Default Conference Properties Product Management x General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Pet Conf Recording General Settings I Restricted 7 Line Rate 384 kbps Msg Service Type None 5 1 0ut E Msg Service Name E E An I Eneyption I SiencelT IM VX 1000 PORS Chair Controt F n None os Master Name T120 Rate None X I Auto Termination FECC LSD Rate None X Before FistJoin 5 Min After Last Quit f1 a Min Media Settings Audio Alg Auto 5 Dual Stream Mode None gt lt lt Basic I RolCal ProMotion pwe o FZ Enty Tone Roll Call announcement Adee ad poe M EndTimeAletTone 5 Min ee Exit Tone Roll Call announcement Bo Fone atte E Frame Rate Auto z Talk Hold Time 15 24 Sec Quality Auto Audio Mix Depth 2 H Stes Amn Emea r Ammer Cancel None is selected to disable the Chair Control option Auto enables the Chair Control option To enable the Chair Control select Auto from the drop down list When the Chair Control option is enabled any participant with an H 243 compliant terminal can request the control token during the conference The following operations cannot be performed during an
335. ns that the equipment meets telecommunication network protective operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document s The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company causes to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table of Contents Advanced Conference Settings 000 eeeeeee 1 1 Dual Stream Modes cesceeseesceeseeeseeeseeeneeeceeeeeseeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 1 2 H 239 People Content ccccccescessees
336. nspecified Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Disconnect Cause The disconnection cause as follows 0 Unknown 1 Participant hung up 2 Disconnected by the operator 3 Not in use 4 The MCU cannot establish the appropriate H 243 connection with the participant 5 Resources deficiency 6 Password failure 7 Bonding failure 8 No net connection 9 Net port s deficiency 10 MUX port deficiency 11 Audio port deficiency 12 Video port deficiency 13 Data port deficiency 255 Other Q931 Disconnect If the disconnection cause is No Net Connection or Cause Party Hang Up then this field indicates the Q931 disconnection cause A 35 Appendix A CDR File Fields A 36 Table A 20 Event Fields for Event 2007 Participant Disconnected Continue 1 xe ca The number of times that the synchronization of the MCU MUX unit was lost The number of times that the synchronization of the participant MUX was lost The number of times that the synchronization of the MCU Video unit was lost The number of times that the synchronization of the participant Video was lost The slot number of the MUX card handling the participant call Local Sync Lost Counter Remote Sync Lost Counter Local Video Sync Lost Counter Remote Video Sync Lost Counter Mux Board Number Mux Unit Number Audio Codec Board Number Audiocodec Unit Number Audio B
337. nt Phone Number field to the number of the MCU running the second conference Define at least one participant for each slave conference Click the Settings tab to define the conference technical parameters The Conference Properties Settings dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Product Management xi General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Cont Recording rM General Settings J Restricted Line Rate 2B x Msg Service Type None x Video Rate In Out J Msg Service Name J Conference On Port J Encryption F Silence 17 I TX 1000 lt lt Basic eee I Conference Lock poles None TO Mute Meet Me parties Cascade None X F Start F OnHold Master Name JiNone I Terminate el erable inate 7120 Rate None J Auto Termination FECC LSD Rate None 7 Before Fist Join 5 Min After Last Quit M E Min m Media Settings Audio Alg 16 Siren G729 X Dual Stream Mode None X lt lt Basic F Roll Call Pro Motion auto IV Entry Tone Roll Call announcement Nien Protocol jwe o l IV End Time Alert Tone 5 if Min IV Exit Tone Roll Call announcement oroma auto z Frame Rate Auto 7 Talk Hold Time fis 2 Sec Quality Auto z Audio Mix Depth P stes Anen E Amer I Anne cres Select Master from the Cascade field Help Apply Set
338. nt database To modify the properties of a participant 1 Open the Participant Template file or the Participants in Database window 8 61 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 8 62 Right click the icon of the participant to modify and then click Properties or double click the participant s name oi H 0 Root gt Office Reservation Name Phone 1P Connection Type Channels aggregation _ 4 Henry P B erry Dial in Auto Auto Ba J R eye New Participant Auto Auto ra Melissa Ra Melis COPY AS Auto Auto iy polycom Debo Ba polyc Copy Ctrl C 2 Yes Q Q Cut Ctrl X ta Sarah amp 4 Sarat paste ctrl Auto Auto Gy Tanya a Tany Delete Del Auto Auto E Polycom Dial Out Ctrl a Line Rates F E weboffice H weboffice_v2 The Participant Properties dialog box opens Change the settings in the Participant Properties dialog box as required For more information see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties Click OK to complete the participant definition and exit the Participant Properties dialog box An asterisk appears in the title bar of the Participant Template file or Participants in Database window to indicate that changes have been made Click Save on the Template menu when the Participant template is stored in a Participant Template file or click Save Database on the Database menu w
339. nt is disconnected from the MCU If the correct conference password is entered the participant is prompted to enter the chairperson identifier fno identifier is entered the participant is connected to the conference as a standard participant If the chair person identifier is entered the participant is prompted to enter the chairperson password When the participant enters the chairperson password or his her personal password it is sent to the external database application for validation Ifthe password is incorrect and the Operator s Assistance option is enabled the participant is moved to the Participants Queue for assistance If there is no active Operator conference running on the system the participant is disconnected from the MCU If there is a match the participant is granted the right to join the conference In addition the external database application sends to the MCU the following parameters Participant name visual name Whether or not the participant is the conference chairperson MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Whether or not the participant state is VIP Participant Information such as the participant email These fields correspond to the User Defined 1 2 3 and 4 fields in the participant Properties dialog box External Database Can initiate new conf Chairperson Password Chairperson On Going Conference identifyer key Numeric ID
340. ntitled to work with according to your database Login Name and Password DataBase Directory Options Window Save Database Refresh Database Fg Filter Login Open D B R m Template AccordDB Open D B Participant Template Logout amp Clear Login Record Load Defaults From DB gt Manage databases Database ODBC The window of the selected database opens Reservations in database window I lax E Root l i Office Reservation te Polycom Office Reservation 5 weboffice Polycom E weboffice_v2 WebOffice S ATM alpha 1 weboffice_v2 H CP conf pam alpha 1 2B Auto Transcoding No H E 67221 alpha 21 e conf 512kbps Auto Continuous Presence No H A H 323 conf alpha 17 ozz alpha 21 384kbps 24 G722 1 5ir Video Switching No S H323 cnf alpha 22 EE conf alpha 17 128kbps 16 G728 Siren Video Switching No H S H323 Lecture Mode fEabrses cnfalpha22 384kbps 56 G722 G711 Video Switching No E3 i Lecture Show alpha 1 ib H328 Lecture Mode 384kbps Auto Continuous Presence No Participants in database window amp Participants in AccordDB E Root E gt office Reservation te i ta Henry Ba Henry Dial in Auto Auto Bs Joe Ba Joe Dialin Auto Auto Melissa ie Metisse Dialin Auto Auto Ba polycom Debo Ee polycom Debo 29501111 Dial out 2 Yes Ba Sarah Ee Sarah Dialin Auto Auto Bs Tanya ES Tanya Dialin Auto A
341. nts 15 24 H 323 Call Setup SIP Call Setup on page A 46 H 323 Clear CDR event code 16 Indication The clear indication termination of the call of an H 323 participant For a description of the fields see Table A 30 Event Fields for Events 16 25 H 323 Clear Indication SIP Clear Indication on page A 47 H 323 Participant CDR event code 17 Connected The connection of an H 323 participant For a description of the fields see Table A 31 Event Fields for Events 17 23 H 323 Participant Connected SIP Participant Connected on page A 47 New Undefined CDR event code 18 Participant A new undefined participant was added to the conference For a description of the fields see Table A 32 Event Fields for Event 18 New Undefined Participant on page A 49 Unrecognized Event CDR event code 19 An unknown event occurred This event has no fields Participant Add CDR event code 20 Billing Code A billing code was entered by a participant using DTMF codes For a description of the fields see Table A 33 Event Fields for Event 20 Participant Add Billing Code on page A 53 A 11 Appendix A CDR File Fields Table A 3 CDR Event Types Continued RE a ee Set Participant CDR event code 21 Visual Name An operator assigned a new name to a participant For a description of the fields see Table A 34 Event Fields for Event 21 Set Participant Visual Name on page A 54 DTMF Code Fail
342. nty Tone Re Mere pm Video Protocol Auto g F End Time Alert Torie Jo ET x Fe a Exit Tone Roll Call announcement Video Formak es Frame Rate Auto 7 Talk Hold Time 15 4 Sec Quality Auto z Audo Mix Depth b 4 Sites ME Annex M Amere M Annex In the Media Settings pane in the Dual Stream Mode list select People and Content VO Default Conference Properties Product Management x General Settings Patticipants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Cont Recording Complete the conference definition as for any standard Video Switching conference and click OK Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings DuoVideo A Tandberg DuoVideo capable endpoint accommodates two calls one for the participant conference and the second for a demo presentation on a second monitor The DuoVideo feature therefore requires two simultaneous ISDN H 320 dial in calls to operate two parallel conferences on the MCU These two conferences are independent and unrelated to each other the system does does not indicate otherwise The first conference operates as a standard conference in a Video Switching Transcoding or Continuous Presence mode The second conference is also standard but has distinct attributes it is a Video Switching or a Transcoding conference that operates in a DuoVideo mode Assigning a speaker for the first conference has no influence on who is to be the speaker of the second DuoVideo conference T
343. number of the MCU running the Master conference in the Participant Phone Number field In Star cascading if more than two conferences are defined and they are set as Auto cascading a multi hierarchy configuration may be established at the end of the cascading negotiations between the three MCUs running the conferences If the multi hierarchy MIH flag in the CHAIR FECC section of the system cfg file is set to NO the conference will not start as scheduled H 239 People Content in Cascading Conferences H 239 People Content is available only in a Star Cascading topology with Video Switching cascaded conferences In this mode one conference must be defined as the Master conference that all the other conferences slave link to it Start by defining the Master conference with links for all the slave conferences and then define each of the slave conferences adding the appropriate link to the Master conference PEOPLE PLUS CONTENT section of the system cfg is set to YES e H 239 can only be implemented when the H239 flag in the e All the conferences in the Star Cascading topology must have the same settings for the conference line rate audio algorithm video parameters video protocol video format video frame rate annexes and ProMotion and other conferencing features such as Encryption e Only two cascade options Master and Slave are available for H 320 H 239 P C cascade There is no Auto Cascade mode e IVR is support
344. o connect to the conference Retry Password A participant who enters an incorrect password is requested to type it again Request Digit Requests the participant to enter the digit required to connect to the conference Conference Chairperson Identifier Requests the participant to enter Chairperson Request the chairperson identifier key required to identify them as the conference chairperson Request Chairperson When the participant has been Password identified as the conference chairperson requests the participant to enter the chairperson password Chairperson When the participant enters an Password Failure incorrect chairperson password Message requests the participant to type it again General Messages played when participants must be notified of system related events for example notification that a conference is locked 2 20 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 2 2 IVR Message Types by Message Category Continued Message ae Category Message Type Description Operator Operator Assistance The message is played when the Assistance Indication Message participant is waiting for the operator s assistance Disconnection Informs that the participant is Message being disconnected from the conference Roll Call Roll call related messages such as the message prompting participants to enter their name and the message played when a participant joins the conference SilencelT SilencelT Menu Playe
345. o change an embedded participant to a linked participant Lr Alice Copy As Copy Ctrl C Cut Ctrl X Delete Del Dial Out Ctrl 4 Line Rates Link participant Properties Click Unlink participant to embed the participant in the Reservation template and break the link to the Participant template stored in the Participant database The system displays the definition to which the participant can toggle either Link participant or Unlink participant depending on the current definition of the participant 8 63 Chapter 8 Templates Handling The participant icon changes according to the selected option Linked participant icons 2 Audio Only et 2 Audio and Video BA Embedded participant icons Q Audio Only b Q Audio and Video b Deleting Participants from a Participant Template file or Participant Database If a participant definition in a Participant Template file or Participant database is no longer needed delete the participant to save disk space To restore a deleted participant you have to redefine his her parameters To delete a Participant template 1 Open the Participant Template file or the Participants in Database window 8 64 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 2 Right click the icon of the participant to delete and then click Delete Participants in AccordDB lol x E E Root Name Phone 1P Connection Type Channels aggregation _ gt of
346. o display the User Defined fields in the Conference Properties General dialog box If you clear this check box all three User Defined fields will be hidden Select this check box to display the User Defined fields in the Participant Properties Identification dialog box If you clear this check box all four User Defined fields will be hidden User Defined 1 2 and 3 Enter the text to be displayed as the title of the User Defined fields in the Conference Properties General dialog box using up to 25 characters These titles replace the default titles User Defined 1 etc If left blank the default titles are displayed Note The titles of the User Defined fields appear only in the MGC Manager application In the WebCommander application only the default titles are shown User Defined 1 2 3 and 4 Enter the text to be displayed as the title of the User Defined fields in the Participant Properties Identification dialog box using up to 25 characters These titles replace the default titles User Defined 1 etc If left blank the default titles are displayed Note The titles of the User Defined fields appear only in the MGC Manager application In the WebCommander application only the default titles are shown 6 39 Chapter 6 Using a Database 7 Click OK to confirm and store the new User Defined Defaults set Defining Conference Defaults To define a conference default 1 Expand the Database Manager wind
347. o force the participant to connect using this frame rate For a detailed description of the frame rates values see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 1 Chapter 4 Defining Advanced Media Settings MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 3 4 Entry Queue for Ad Hoc Conferencing using a Profile Continued CESO ae Video Protocol Annexes Select the video compression protocol for the Entry Queue according to the target conference settings Auto select this option to let the system automatically select the appropriate compression method for connecting the participant to the target conference H261 the video compression standard mandatory to all codecs H263 Acompression standard that provides improved video quality at a line rate lower than 384 Kbps This standard is not supported by all endpoints If H 263 is selected in Video Switching conferences all the participants must be connected using this protocol Participants whose endpoint does not support H 263 are connected as secondary H264 a video compression standard that improves video quality at a line rate lower than 384 Kbps H 264 is supported with the following Continuous Presence options Conference on Port COP Personal Layout and Click amp View H 264 is supported in the People channel in the same way as in a standard VSW conference The Content channel only uses H 263 Annexes are additions to the Video Format when using H 263 Video Protocol
348. o the conference using the IVR Software module The IVR software module enables the Operator to perform the following operations using the MGC Manager application or via the Web browser using the MGC WebCommander application e Individual and personal guidance of participants to the conferences e Monitor all participants currently waiting in the Entry Queue conference IVR queue and Participants Queue regardless of their conference association e Perform various operations to assist participants while in the Entry Queue IVR queue Participants Queue or during the conference e Conduct voting sessions during an On Going Conference e Control Question amp Answer sessions during an On Going Conference 2 7 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services The IVR software module enables participants and the conference chairperson to perform various operations from their endpoints using DTMF codes Table 2 1 lists these actions and the default operation permissions codes only if an IVR Service is assigned to the conference For a list of default DTMF codes see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Chapter 6 These operations can be performed from the participant s endpoint using DTMF Table 2 1 DTMF Enabled Actions and Permissions Request personal assistance Play the help menu Adjust the participant s broadcasting and listening Everyone volume Change the participant s status to Chairperson Lock or unlock a conferen
349. of time the conference was scheduled to last Actual Start Time The actual time that the conference started according to GMT time Actual Duration The actual conference duration Reserved Start The time the conference was scheduled to start Time according to GMT time MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 1 Conference Summary Record Fields Continued i ae Status File Name GMT Offset Sign GMT Offset File Marked The conference status code as follows 1 The conference is an On Going Conference 2 The conference was terminated by an operator 3 The conference ended at the scheduled end time 4 The conference ended automatically when all the participants disconnected from the conference 252 The conference never started since the scheduled end time was surpassed at startup 253 The conference could not become an On Going Conference due to a problem 254 The conference was ended by an MCU reset 255 An unknown error occurred The name of the conference log file Indicates whether the difference in the time zone is plus or minus as follows 0 Minus 1 Plus The difference in time zone between your site and Greenwich mean time Indicates if the file has been retrieved and archived as follows 0 No 1 Yes A 3 Appendix A CDR File Fields Event Records The event records that is all records in the unformatted file except the first record contain standard fie
350. og box opens x Enable Video Services IV Click amp View Video Welcome Slide ALPS ACV gt Add Slide lt Back Cancel Help Select the Enable Video Services check box to define a video IVR Service and to enable the Click amp View application Alternatively if no video services are part of this IVR Service click Next to skip the definition of the Video Services For a detailed description of Click amp View see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 11 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 30 Define the following parameters Table 2 10 IVR Properties Video Services Click amp View Select this option to enable endpoints to run the Click amp View application Note For operation Click amp View requires the Audio and Video cards and endpoints to be DTMF enabled Video Welcome The Video Welcome Slide appears when an endpoint Slide connects to a conference Select the video slide file to be displayed when the participant connects to the conference Select None if no Video slide is to be displayed If the video slide file was not downloaded to the MCU prior to the IVR Service definition click the Add Slide button The nstall File dialog box opens The downloading process is similar to the downloading of audio files see step 8 on page 2 29 Note Slides can be viewed only if the ENABLE_IP_SLIDE flag has been set to YES in the system cfg file SIP participants cannot view the slides
351. og box opens Install File Sales 172 22 131 11 x Install Browse Proceed e Click the Browse button to open the Select Source File dialog box and select the audio or video file in MGC format aca or acv and then click Open The name of the file appears in the nstall field in the Install File dialog box Click Yes to proceed with file downloading to the MCU s hard disk The Done dialog box opens Click OK The system returns to the AV Message Service dialog box Click OK to save the new Message Service MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II A system message is displayed indicating that the MCU must be reset to be able to use the new AV Message Service The reset is necessary in order to download the video slide and the audio messages from the MCU s control unit to the MUX card s memory the video slide and to download the audio message to the Message extension on the Standard Audio card the audio messages xl A You must reset the MCU Alpha 12 before the new settings will take effect 10 Click OK to confirm The new AV Message Service is added to the AV Message Services list 11 Reset the MCU LY Before you reset the MCU ensure that no one else is using the MCU Chapter 4 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences Listing the AV Message Services 4 10 To view the list of AV Message Services defined in the system 1 2 Connect to the
352. on number assigned to the participant by the MCU Table A 45 Event Fields for Event 3108 Operator Move Participant to Conference Continue 2 Fc aa eS Participant Name The name of the participant Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Participant Called The telephone number used by the MCU for dial out Number Table A 46 Event Fields for Events 110 111 Operator On Hold Participant Operator Back to Conference Participant ices Et ee Operator Name The name of the operator moving the participant back to the conference or putting the participant on hold Participant Name The name of the participant being moved or put on hold Participant ID The identification number as assigned by the MCU of the participant being moved or put on hold MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 47 Attended Participant Information Fields eee aU Operator Indicates whether the participant is an operator as Participant follows 0 No 1 Yes Ordinary Relevant only if Operator Participant no Participant State The participant status as follows 1 Welcome queue without waiting for the operator 2 Welcome queue and waiting for the operator 3 Participant on hold 4 Attended by operator 255 None of the above Attending Relevant only if Operator Participant yes Indicates whether the operator is participating in an Operator conference as follows 0 No 1
353. onference Conference Name Slave1 Participant InFrom MasterConference Participant OutTo MasterConference Connection Type Dial in Connection Type Dial out Alias Name Slave1 name of the conference Alias Name 1719MasterConference making the call from MCU B Network Service Prefix and the name Network Service Prefix 1719 of the Master conference on MCU A Figure 1 10 Enhanced Cascading using H 323 Links 1 53 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings To define the H 323 Enhanced Cascading links The Participants Properties Identification dialog boxes show how to define the participants used as links in each of the Enhanced Cascading conferences described in Figure 1 10 Properties n R E LT x Identification Advanced Identification Advanced Name Name InFromSlaveConference OutT oMasterConference Connection Type Interface Type Connection Type Interface Type Dian z H323 z Diatout z JH323 z Participant IP Signaling Port Participant IP Signaling Port 0O 0 fo 0 1720 0 0 0 0 1720 Alias Name Alias Type Alias Name Alias Type Slavel H323 ID hd 1719MasterConference H323 1D bl Extension Identifier String Extension Identifier String User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Volume 5 Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Volume 5
354. onferences Audio card The Audio card stores the audio messages that are part of the Entry Queue and IVR Services These messages are played while the participants wait in an IVR queue or in an Entry Queue The Audio card also enables the usage of DTMF codes Music IO card An I O card attached to the rear of the Audiot module at the MCU s rear panel is used to play back music or recorded messages from an external device such as a tape or a CD player The music is played when e The conference is placed on hold e The participant is placed on hold e The participant is waiting in the Participants Queue for the operator s assistance This card is optional in the MGC 50 MGC 100 but is embedded in the MGC 25 MUX MUX card Audio only The video slides are downloaded and stored in the memory of the MUX or MUX card Up to four slides can be stored in the MUX or MUX card memory Video card This card is required to use the Click amp View application from the participants video endpoints For a detailed description of the Click amp View application see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 11 2 15 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Defining the IVR Module Properties 2 16 The audio messages and prompts played to participants can be recorded in different languages You can create IVR Message Services and Entry Queue Services for different languages and assign them to different conferences
355. only if and when a participant requests the Far End Camera Control by clicking on the pan tilt and zoom buttons in the camera s application As long as the participant keeps using the pan tilt and zoom buttons he retains the data token holder Once these buttons are no longer used the data token is returned to the MCU and can be passed to another participant while the LSD channel remains open If the token is not returned to the MCU when the participant is no longer controlling the far end camera the token can be withdrawn by the MCU 1 17 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings 1 18 When a participant requests the data token while another participant possesses it the request is rejected by the MCU When a participant is moved from an FECC LSD enabled conference to an FECC LSD disabled conference the MCU automatically closes the FECC LSD channel When a participant is moved from an FECC LSD disabled conference to an FECC LSD enabled conference the MCU automatically opens the FECC LSD channel for that participant To view FECC LSD conference properties and control the data token The FECC LSD token holder can control a video camera at a remote site During an On Going Conference when the FECC LSD option is enabled you can view the name of the participant holding the FECC LSD token You can withdraw the FECC LSD token from the participant and return it to the MCU whenever required This is usually done when problems occur whil
356. ons in AccordDB 0 x oe Paion heme Phone LIP Pieri Office Reservation Start Immediatly New Participant Copy As Default Attending Print Template Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl Paste As Ctrl P Delete Del Properties The Participant Properties dialog box opens 5 Define the parameters in the Participant Properties dialog box For more information see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties You can add either an embedded participant in which case the participant is not saved separately in the database or a linked participant in which case a Participant template is created 6 When you have completed the participant definition click OK The Participant Properties dialog box closes The participant is added to the template An asterisk appears in the title of the window containing the Reservation template to indicate changes have been made 7 On the Database menu click Save Database or click the Save button on the toolbar The participant is added to the Reservation template The asterisk is removed from the Reservations in Databases window title bar If the list of participants is not currently displayed click the plus next to the conference template name to display the participants 8 29 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 8 30 To add a new participant to an existing Reservation template directly in the Reserva
357. operator The operator adds the second participant interactively during an Attended or Welcome conference Define the operator as a new participant or if already defined in a Participant Template file or in the Participant database add the operator to the conference as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties If the Operator conference template is defined in the Reservation template file you can only select a participant from a Participant Template file If the Operator is defined in the database you can only select a participant from the Participant database MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 11 The conference can be set to Dial Out Manually when checked This means that the operator will have to manually connect to the conference to run it 12 Click OK The name of the new Operator Reservation template accompanied by an icon is added to the Template Group Root E Office Reservation H dep Office Reservation E3 Polycom td Lu a fac Particpant 4 13 Select Save Database from the Database menu Alternatively click the a Save button on the toolbar to save the new Operator template Setting an Operator Reservation Template as the Default Attending Operator Conference You can define an Operator Reservation template as the default Operator Reservation template Once the template is saved to the database the default Operator Reservatio
358. operties Identification dialog box If the Dial In phone numbers are not defined when switching to Dial n the system automatically allocates the appropriate phone numbers from the list of dialed in numbers defined in the Network Service To modify the participant Dial In Dial Out definition l Open the Reservation or Participant Template file or the Reservations or Participants in Database window Double click the Reservation template icon or click the plus icon next to the Reservation template A list of participants defined in the Reservation template appears below the Reservation template s icon Right click the icon of the participant whose dial in dial out settings you want to modify The system displays the next definition the participant can toggle to either Dial In or Dial Out depending on the current definition of the participant If the participant s current definition is Dial Out the system displays the Dial In option in the right click menu Click the Dial In or Dial Out option pa Alice Link participant Properties The participant definition changes to Dial In or Dial Out accordingly and the pop up menu displays the next toggled option 8 45 Chapter 8 Templates Handling Click Save on the Template menu when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation Template file or when the Participation template is stored in a Participant Template file Alternatively click Save Databas
359. opy As Dial in Ga J cree Dial in Cut CtrHX Paste Cry Delete Del Dial Out CtritA Line Rates Properties In the Participants in Database window right click the Group to which you want to copy the participant and then click Paste oi H 0 Root Name Channels Aggregati H Default 2 New Group G Delete Group 5 user2 E weboffice The participant is copied to the selected group in the Participant database Alternatively use the shortcut keys to perform these operations The list of shortcut keys can be found in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 3 Commands Shortcut Keys Dragging and Dropping Participant Templates 8 22 With the drag and drop method you must open two template windows To copy Participant Template files by the Drag and Drop method 1 Open the Participants in Database window and the Participant Template file from which you want to copy the Participant template In the Participants in Database window expand the Group hierarchy to locate the group to which you want to copy the Participant template MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 3 Inthe Participant Template file window click the icon of the Participant template you want to copy and drag it to the target group in the Participants in Database window Reservation or Participant templates whose names already exist in the i When problems occur during the conversion process such
360. or dial in only Method The identification method as follows 0 Password 1 Called phone number 2 Calling phone number Meet Me Method Relevant for dial in only The meet me per method as follows 1 Meet me per MCU Conference 3 Meet me per participant 4 Meet me per channel Net Interface Type The type of interface between the participant and the MCU as follows 0 ISDN 1 ATM 2 H 323 3 MPI H 243 Password The H 243 password or an empty string if there is no password A 51 Appendix A CDR File Fields Table A 32 Event Fields for Event 18 New Undefined Participant Continued a Chair Not in use Always contains the value 0 Video Protocol The video protocol used by the participant as follows 1 H 261 only 2 H 263 3 H 26L 255 Auto Audio Volume The broadcasting volume assigned to the participant The value is between 1 lowest and 10 loudest The default value of the broadcasting volume upon participant connection is 5 Each unit movement increases or decreases the volume by 3 MHz Undefined Type The undefined type 0 Default 1 Undefined participant 2 Unreserved participant Node Type The node type as follows 0 MCU 1 Terminal Bonding Phone The phone number for Bonding dial out calls Number Bonding is a communication protocol that aggregates from two up to thirty 64 Kbps B channels together to look like one large bandwidth channel Video Rate Relevant only to H 32
361. ording ended 5 Recording failed Operation Initiator This field is not currently used The default value of 0 is always returned Recording Link The name of the Recording Link Name Recording Link ID The Recording Link ID Start Recording The start recording policy as follows Policy 1 Start recording automatically as soon as the first participant connects to the conference 2 Start recording when requested by the conference chairperson via DTMF codes or the WebCommander Web site or when the operator starts recording from the MGC Manager or WebCommander applications A 55 Appendix A CDR File Fields Table A 37 Event Fields for Event 27 Recording System Link Event ae or Participant Name The name of the participant The participant represents an On Going recording or an On Going playback Participant ID The participant s identification number as assigned by the system Operation Type The type of playback or recording operation as follows 21 Start playback 22 Pause playback 23 Resume playback 24 End playback 25 Skip forwards 26 Skip backwards 27 Skip to end 28 Restart playback 51 Start recording 52 Pause recording 53 Resume recording 54 End recording Participant Type The type of participant as follows 1 On Going recording 2 On Going playback The user s PIN code Failure Indicates whether the recording or playback operation succeeded or failed as follows 0
362. ot assigned to any participant the name of the MCU appears in the Chair Control box None indicates that the Chair Control option was disabled during the conference setup Clicking on the Withdraw Chair Token button enables you to withdraw the chair token from a participant and return it to the MCU In that case the participant loses the ability to control the conference This is usually done when there are problems releasing the chair token from one participant for the use of other participants Using a Database The database includes various data tables used by the MGC Manager operators and WebCommander users who access the database via the local network or via a Web browser The database is divided into two modules Administrative Tables and User Tables Administrative Tables User Tables Labels Table MCUs Table Access via MGC pidean R Access via MGC articipants y Manager or MGC wee A Permissions Database Manager WebCommander lt Table or MGC Web Server site using the Web Reservations Users Tab Manager browser ranie Groups Table Database Figure 6 1 Database Structure Administrative Tables the configuration tables that enable the administrator and users who have the appropriate access rights to define system Defaults Permissions Users Groups and labels In addition the administrator can perform maintenance and configuration tasks relating to
363. ot be connected to the conference MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II z cat a External Database i a a Correct Password On Going Conference Peerrrrrtt tyre Password Numeric ID 1234 Can initiate new conf Conference Q Numeric ID Ei 9251222 gt Pi On Going yes H 1234 Conference da gt with this ID Pes OY 1300 z wy at Queue h ral e H rofile New Conference Karamere Numeric ID 1300 Figure 3 3 Conference Access Conference Entry Password validation with External Database Application To enable this workflow the same components as for the Ad Hoc Entry Queue level Conference initiation Numeric ID validation with an External Database application flow must be defined in the system with the following additions e The external database must hold the Conference Entry Password or the participant personal password PIN code or the participant s CLI number or Alias e The IVR Service assigned to the destination conference defined in the Profile used for the Ad Hoc Conferencing must be configured to check the external database for the Conference Entry Password for each participant connecting to the conference The IVR Service must be configured to prompt for the Conference Entry Password Conference level Conference Access Chairperson Password validation with an External Database Application An alternative validation method at the conference level is c
364. ous Presence conferences to be set up without using video card resources Encryption Enhances data security at conference and participant levels Auto Extend Conference Duration Allows the conference time to be automatically extended without operator intervention Simple Cascading Allows running separate conferences as one very large conference or conferences that run on different MCUs to run as one conference DTMF Enabled Cascading Enables use of DTMF codes in Cascaded conferences Enhanced Cascading Enables setup of links in Cascaded conferences using aliases Large Video Switching Conferences In systems that do not include Audio cards allows configuring of standard Audio cards to include 30 participants in a single Video Switching conference Auto Rate Detection Allows automatic detection of the line rate and aggregation mode of incoming ISDN calls without prior definition 1 1 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings These conference settings are described in this chapter In addition you can define H 243 Cascading conferences as described in Chapter 5 and Greet and Guide conferences as described in Chapter 4 Dual Stream Modes With Dual Streams an endpoint sends two video streams video and data Video streams are handled differently by different endpoints The MGC Manager provides the following video streaming options for different types of endpoints e Peoplet Content H 239 People Content0 fo
365. out ico a Q a q a i Figure 1 6 Monitoring Cascading Conferences with an ISDN Link 1 48 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Simple Cascading with an H 323 Link You can use an H 323 participant definition as the link between two conferences In conference A you define one participant as a link from conference B This participant is defined as a dial in H 323 participant with the IP address of the IP card in MCU B from which the call originated The IP address of the IP card is defined in the IP Network Service as was set up in MCU B In conference B you define one participant as a link to conference A This participant is defined as a dial out H 323 participant with the IP address of the IP card in MCU A RARARARED Dial out i 172 22 140 201 NVI a M MCU A MCU B IP Card 172 22 140 201 IP Card 172 22 140 174 Conference A Conference B Participant Link In Participant Link Out Connection Type Dial in Connection Type Dial out IP Address 172 22 140 174 IP Address 172 22 140 201 IP Address of the card making the call IP Address of the card receiving from MCU B conference B the call on MCU A conference A Figure 1 7 Simple Cascading using an H 323 Link 1 49 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings 1 50 To define the H 323 Link The Participant 5 Properties Identification dialog boxes show how to define the participants used as links in each of the conferences described in the
366. ow 2 Expand the Defaults tree 3 Right click the Conference Defaults icon A pop up menu appears Bee Conference Defaults 4 Click Add New Conference Defaults The Conference Properties Settings dialog box opens Conference Properties 6 40 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II In the Res Name field enter the name of the Reservation Defaults set that you are creating Define the Settings parameters The Settings Video parameters are defined in the same manner as in the Conference Properties dialog box described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining a New Video Conference If the Audio Only option is selected only the fields pertaining to Audio are shown Audio Only conference fields are described in the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 2 Defining a New On Going Audio Only Conference Click the Settings2 tab The Conference Properties Settings2 dialog box opens Conference Properties 3 x Settings Settings2 Attended None 1 takHold Time 15 H sec AV Msg Name Audio Mix Depth 3 Sites T Auto termination Lecture Type None x Before First Join 1 Min I Timer Interval E Sec After Last Quit 1 4 Min Lecturer name I7 Same Layout IT Auto Layout I Entry Queue Access Gm E Entry Queue Name Duration Rp a Hour f a Min JT Meet me per conf Min fa Parties I7 Dial Dut Manu
367. p menu g SQL Server Group SERY SOLZ U i yy int w SQL Server Registration Edit SQL Server Registration properties Delete SQL Server Registration Ne Disconnect Pause tart uw New b All Tasks View b New Window From Here Refresh Export List Properties Help The Server disconnects and an icon i appears next to the server QL Serve erprise Manage Console Window Help action view Tos e gt A 168 i NIP 8 Tree SQL Server Group 2 Items E Console Root i a JJ Microsoft SQL Servers EW SQL Server Group F3 WEB 5E MGC WEB 5 F3 WEB SERVER SQL2000 Windows NT f Windows NT Windows NT MGC WEB SERVER SQL2000 Windows NT 4 gt b Using Windows Explorer access the SQL directory on your system and copy the Data directory either to the same location a Copy of Data directory is created or to a different location 6 15 Chapter 6 Using a Database c From the Start menu run the Rebuild exe utility The Rebuild Master dialog box opens Rebuild Master F3 WEB SERVER SQL2000 E PERDAS ou eu ee O d Click the Browse button to select the Master Database that will be used to change the sort order 6 16 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Browse fo
368. page 9 11 The fields in the unformatted file are detailed in Appendix A CDR File Fields Retrieve Formatted To retrieve the conference data in formatted format and save it to a text file whose extension is cdf In the formatted file each field value appears in a separate line together with its name This data can be used to generate a summary report for the desired conferences For a sample of a formatted conference file see Figure 9 2 Formatted CDR Record on page 9 12 Chapter 9 Call Detail Record CDR Utility The Retrieve dialog box opens Retrieve EAConference Data archive sales33_c21 cdr 4122_c20 cdr Sales_Video_c11 cdr The system displays the list of conferences selected for retrieval and archiving You can change the selection and exclude conferences from this list by clearing the conference s checkbox 4 Type the path of the destination folder where the conference data file will be stored in the To box or click the Browse button to select the folder If you click the Browse button the Browse for Folder dialog box opens Select the directory to retrieve the files Desktop My Documents ly Computer 3 314 Floppy A Local Disk C 2 CD Drive D Ss Documents on accord pw O xs AccessDB on Accord Fs SW Systems Mig Ofr amp My Network Places McMs Sim 9 8 MGC Manager
369. pant icon from the Participant in Database window onto the Reservation icon in the Reservations in database window e Select the Participant templates from the database during the definition of the Reservation template in the database in the Conference Properties Participant dialog box e Copy a linked participant from another Reservation template On Going Conference or reservation to a Reservation template When adding a participant from database X to a Reservation template defined in database Y the participant will be embedded and not linked Adding an Embedded Participant To add an embedded participant to the Reservation template use one of the following methods Define the new participant during the Reservation template definition selecting New in the Conference Properties Participant dialog box without saving the participant properties to the database MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Add a participant to the Reservation template from a Participant Template file in the Conference Properties Participant dialog box Copy an embedded participant from one Reservation template to another in the database Reservations window or from one Reservation to another Drag and drop a Participant template icon from a Participant Template file onto the Reservation template icon in the Reservations in database window Defining Participants in the Database Participants can be defined during the conference definition and
370. pant templates you have added during the Reservation template definition MGC Manager User s Guide Volume Il Defining a New Participant Template Directly in the Database To define a new Participant template directly in the database l Log in to the database For a detailed procedure refer to Logging into the User Tables of the Database on page 7 3 On the Database menu select Open D B Participant Template and then select the database you want to work with The system lists all databases you are entitled to work with according to your database Login Name and Password DataBase Directory Options Window Save Database Refresh Database Fg Filter Login Open D B Reservation Template Open D B Participant Template AccordDB Logout amp Clear Login Record Load Defaults From DB Manage databases Database ODBC The Participants in Database window opens Expand the Template Groups tree and select the group to which to assign the Participant template Right click the Group icon to which to assign the Participant template A pop up menu appears e My Group Click New Participant 7 39 Chapter 7 Database Templates 7 40 The Participant Properties Identification dialog box opens Default Participant Properties es Identification Advanced Name Connection Type Interface Type Dialin ISDN 7 Participant Numbers MCU Numbers Extension Identifie
371. participant can be Embedded in reservation or Linked depending on the selected mode Assign a Participant template to the reservation participant linked The Reservation template can include linked or embedded participants 7 33 Chapter 7 Database Templates 7 34 When adding a linked participant a pointer to the Participant template is added to the reservation without copying its data to the reservation When modifying the properties of a linked participant in one reservation or in a template its properties are also modified in all the reservations to which the participant is linked and in the Participant template if changes are made in the reservation Participants who are embedded in a reservation do not appear as an entry in the Participant database list and cannot be viewed in the Participants window of the database They can only be viewed as part of the reservation in the Reservations window of the database These participants can be copied from one reservation to another The participants retain their embedded characteristics and are considered as unique participant definitions When you modify the properties of embedded participants this affects only those participants and not participant occurrences in other reservations Adding a Linked Participant Adding a linked participant to a Reservation template can be performed by using one of the following methods Drag and drop the Partici
372. participant is added to the conference The participant icon appears in the participants list in the Monitor area of the main window 6 For dial out participant connections if the conference is set to Dial out Manually you need to connect the new participant 8 42 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Modifying the Line Rate Set in the Participant Template You can modify the line rate defined for an ISDN or ATM Participant template without accessing the Participant Properties dialog box This option is available only for disconnected participants To modify the participant s Line Rate l Open the Reservation or Participant Template file or the Reservation or Participant Database In the Reservation Template file window double click the Conferences List icon In the Reservations in Database window or the Participants in Database window expand the Groups icon until you locate the desired group For a Reservation template double click the Reservation template icon or click the plus icon next to the Reservation template A list of participants defined in the Reservation template appears below the Reservation template s icon Right click the icon of the participant whose Line Rate definition you want to modify and then click the Line Rate option to display the list of available line rates 8 43 Chapter 8 Templates Handling The currently selected Line Rate appears in bold and a check mark is displayed n
373. participant that acts as the link to the Master conference in a cascading conference A 23 Appendix A CDR File Fields Table A 5 Event Fields for Event 2001 Conference Start Continue 1 Continued eS eee Number Of Undefined Parties Unlimited Reservation Flag Auto Add Time Before First Join Time After Last Quit Conference Lock Flag Max Parties In Conference Relevant only if the Meet Me Per Conference and Auto Add options are enabled Retrieves the number of undefined participants for which the system reserved resources in a Meet Me Per Conference conference Additional participants may join the conference without prior reservation until all the resources are utilized Relevant only if the Meet Me Per Conference option is enabled Indicates whether the Auto Add option is enabled or disabled as follows 0 The Auto Add option is disabled 1 The Auto Add option is enabled Relevant only if the Auto Terminate option is enabled Indicates the number of minutes that should pass from when the conference has started without any participant connection to the conference before the conference is considered as idle and is automatically terminated by the MCU Relevant only if the Auto Terminate option is enabled Indicates the number of minutes that should pass after the last participant has disconnected from the conference before the conference is considered as idle and is automatically terminat
374. participants are connected to the conference as standard undefined participants Number of User Enter the number of times the participant will be able to Input Retries respond to each menu prompt before being disconnected from the IVR system or being moved to the participant s queue for the operator s assistance The default value is 3 You can define up to 5 retries Timeout for User Enter the duration in seconds that the system will wait Input for the participant s input before announcing an input error The default value is 5 seconds DTMF Delimiter The interaction between the caller and the system is done via touch tone signals DTMF codes Enter the key that will be used to indicate a DTMF command sent by the participant or the conference chairperson Possible keys are the pound key or star 5 Click Next 2 26 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Welcome Message dialog box opens x I Enable Welcome Messages General Welcome Message IWELCMPNS AC Add Message File Enable Conference Welcome Message CONFCONN ACA Add Message File coc __ Hee 6 Select the Enable Welcome Message check box to define the system behavior when the participant enters the conference IVR queue play a general Welcome message play aconference specific message let the participant wait for the operator s assistance If the Enable Welcome Message check box is cleared the Welcom
375. password defined here overwrites the conference entry password defined in the Ad Hoc Profile Enter the chairperson password the participant must use to connect to the conference as chairperson or to view the conference properties from the WebCommander Web site This password is assigned to the conference scheduled or started from the New Meeting window or from the MGC Personal Scheduler In Ad Hoc conferencing when the MCU is configured to use the WebCommander Server Manager as the External database application for authentication the chairperson password defined here overwrites the chairperson password defined in the Ad Hoc Profile MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 6 6 Creation amp Authentication parameters Continued ee Ad Hoc Conferences Conference Information In Ad Hoc Conferencing the Numeric ID is used for authentication purposes When a participant connects to an Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue that is configured to access the WebCommander as the external database application the Numeric ID is used to verify whether the participant is authorized to start a new On Going Conference If the Numeric ID exists in the WebCommander database a new conference is started and this Numeric ID is assigned to the conference The Participant who has started the On Going Conference is automatically created and added to the conference If the Numeric ID does not exist in the WebCommander database the participant is
376. perties Product Management xj General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Cont Recording r General Settings Tl Restricted F Line Rate 2B x Msg Service Type None Video Rate In Out Msg Service Name es F Conference Gn Port T Encryption I Silence IT F vTx 1000 Base I Conference Loc Chair Control None z Alisa eres Cascade Noe IF Start Cc jec erson Master Name None v I Terminate wits 7120 Rate None v JT Auto Termination FECC LSD Rate None z Before FrstJon 5 Min AfterLastQut M E Min m Media Settings Audio Alg 16 Siren G728 Dual Stream Mode f lt lt Basic F Roll Call Pro Motion jw d IV Entry Tone Roll Call announcement Ries Prciacot h IV End Time Alet Tone 5 Min i CI v M Exit Tone Roll Call announcement perona BE Frame Rate zo pic sec v Talk Hold Time 15 2 Sec Quality Auto z Audio Mix Depth 3 Sites Q AnnexN 7 AnnexP J Annex F 3 Inthe Dual Stream Mode list click Visual Concert PC When you select Visual Concert PC the Annex check boxes N P and F are enabled in the Media Settings Advanced pane 4 Optional To select the Annexes Ifonly the Basic parameters are displayed click the Advanced button Select the type of Annex to use with Visual Concert PC 5 Complete the conference definition and click OK MGC Manager User
377. plate you need to open the Reservation Template file where the Reservation template is stored To open a Reservation Template file 1 On the Template menu click Open or click the Open button Ee on the toolbar The Open dialog box appears 2 Select Reservation File from the Files of type drop down list CE x Lookin MyTemplates CK EB E friendly blend of tmpltes tlt ResTemplates video audio and operator confs tlt E ResTemplatesFile2 tlt E ResTemplatesFile2A tlt E ResTemplatesFile3 tlt i ResTemplatesFile4 tlt ResTemplatesFileS tlt E Standard New Reservatior Fienme oo Files of type Reservation Files tlt x Cancel j has Participant Files usr All Files 3 Use the standard Windows techniques to select the folder containing the Reservation template file MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Use the standard Windows techniques to select the Reservation template file Click Open The Reservation Template file window opens Double click the Conferences List icon or click the plus icon next to the Conference List icon The list of Reservation templates defined in the Reservation Template file is displayed o xi a fea Me Conferences List a 4 Polycom Audio Conference ag Polycom Operator Conference H da Polycom Video Conference 8 17 Chapter 8 Templates Handling Converting MGC Templates
378. port To 5 File Date C Printer ClipBoard 4 February 2004 E Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri StartingTime 25 26 27 28 29 30 3 1 2 3 5 3 55 PM E 8 9 10 1 12 15 16 17 18 19 a 2 23 24 2 2 Prae 2912 3 4 5 6 2 00 E Cancel OK 4 Define the following parameters Table 8 1 Print template parameters Oper Name The name of the operator printing the template information Or if you are using the printed data for scheduling reservations you can enter the name of the operator who should schedule the conference Report To Select the printing destination File The template information is saved to a text file Printer The template information is sent to the default printer selected in Windows ClipBoard The template information is sent to the clipboard The data can then be imported to an external application Date Use the arrows to select the month and year the conference should be set to start Click to select the day on which the conference is scheduled to start Starting Time Set the time at which the conference is to begin Enter the scheduled conference duration 8 58 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 5 Click OK If File is selected the Save As dialog box opens letting you save the text file to the desired folder Save in QJ My Documents z e KE ER File name Polycom Save as type Text File txt 7 Cancel Select the destination folder The system a
379. ption check box Entry Queue Properties Product Management x r Entry Queue Settings Name Entry Queue Service Se Numeric ID l I Cascade F vTx 1000 r Target Conference Settings I AdHoc Audio Alg Auto F Profile Y Video Format uto m Target Conferences T Audio Only Frame Rate auto X TIP Only Video Protocol Auto X I Annex N T Annex P F Annex F Video Switching N Line Rate 2B x Tl Restricted Transcoding Continuous Presence E Dial in Number 1 Diakin Number 2 Enabling Encryption at the Participant Level You can select the encryption mode for each of the defined participants Encryption options are affected by the settings of the participant level flag in the system cfg file Undefined participants are connected with the Participant Encryption option set to Auto inheriting the Conference Entry Queue encryption setting 1 34 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II To enable encryption at the participant level In the Participant Properties Advanced dialog box in the Encryption list select one of the following options Auto On or Off I x Identification Advanced Aggregation Number of Channels Video Protocol h s Recording Dial up hd Restrict Only V AGC For Standard Video Cards only Not required for Video Service Name Sub Service Name Node Type
380. r Conf Recording p General Settings I Restricted Line Rate 2B Msg Service Type Msg Service Name Ht Le lt Basic Chair Control None z Cascade None M GhHold Master Name None 7 e After C FE Enable Invite 7120 Rate None ad IT Auto Termination FECC LSD Rate None ka Before First Join 5 E Min After Last Quit M H Min p Media Settings Audio Alg 16 Siren G728 Dual Stream Mode None X lt lt Basic I Roll Call Pro Mation Jato st Entyy Tone Roll Call announcement Video Protocol Jato o YS End Time Alet Tone 5 H Min Video Fi Auto v FZ Exit Tone Roll Call announcement Eate 2 Frame Rate Auto x Talk Hold Time 15 Sec Quality Auto z Audio Mix Depth 3 4 Stes ArmexN IM Annex I Annexe Define the Restricted Line Rate T120 Audio Alg Video Protocol Video Format Talk Hold Time and Audio Mix Depth fields as for standard conferences For a detailed description of these fields see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Conference Settings In the Msg Service Type field select Welcome No Wait for a Welcome conference or Attended Wait for an Attended conference In the Msg Service Name field select from the drop down list the name of the AV Message Service one of the four Message Services you have previously defined to be assigned to the conference If the Msg Service Name field is lef
381. r Folder dialog box opens Browse for Folder e Select the Copy of Data folder according to its path that you created in step b of this procedure and then click OK The name of the folder appears in the Source Directory containing Data Files box Rebuild Master F3 WEB SERVER SQL2000 Ei C Program Files Microsoft SOL Server MSSQL SQL2000 Cc_ E pre a tele _Bebud cence f Click the Settings button to select the appropriate sort order 6 17 Chapter 6 Using a Database The Collation Settings widow opens Collation Settings AE Coll N Latint_General g Select the following parameters Collation designator Latin1_General Check the following check boxes Case sensitive Width sensitive and Kana sensitive h Click OK i Inthe Rebuild Master dialog box click Rebuild At the end of the process the Rebuild Master dialog box closes 6 18 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Reconnect the SQL Server by right clicking the SQL Server icon in the System Tray bottom right corner and then clicking Start from the pop up menu sar si F Bm lew SQL Server Registration Edit SQL Server Registration properties Delete SQL Server Registration Group Connect Stop New gt All Tasks View New Window from Here Refresh Export List Properties Help j Repeat steps 1 to 12 in the SQL Server Configura
382. r String Meet me per Bonding Phone Number Party bd User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 Broadcasting Yolume 5 Listening Yolume 5 oo Haw neon 0 ft oe co o Define the participant Name Select the network Interface Type that will be used by the participant If you select H323 or SIP as the Interface Type the Identification and Advanced fields change The Identification tab fields for ISDN ATM MPI H 323 and SIP Interface Types are described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties The Identification tab fields for the T1 CAS Interface Type are described in the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 2 Defining Participant Properties Click the Advanced tab to define additional parameters This step is optional as the default settings can apply to most participants and will not require changing MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Participant Properties Advanced dialog box opens Properties n Identification Advanced Aggregation Number of Channels Jauo Video Protocol Jato I Recording Encryption Jato xl T Auto Detect I Restrict Only I AGC J Enhanced Video For Standard Video Cards only Not required for Video Service Name Sub Service Name Node Type Num type Terminal hd Taken from service hd 9 Define the Advanced parameters Th
383. r most types of Polycom endpoints e People and Content V0 for PictureTel endpoints e Duo Video for Tandberg endpoints e Polycom Visual Concert PC FX for Polycom ViewStation PC FX endpoints H 239 People Content H 239 and People Content are very similar in function but differ in the type of signalling used for each protocol People Content is the Polycom proprietary protocol while H 239 is the industry standard When an endpoint can support both H 239 and People Content protocols H 239 is selected as the preferred communications protocol This feature provides the endpoint with the ability to send two alternating video streams people and content The People stream is based on the principle that in the conference I see you and you see me while the Content stream implies we both see the same content that is we use the same data stream The minimum line rate required for an H 239 Peoplet Content conference is 128 Kbps In an On Going Conference when the Content channel opens the required bit rate is taken from the video channel bit rate and may affect the quality of the transmitted video The bit rate allocated to the Content channel depends on the conference type and the conference line rate where the minimum is 64 Kbps and it increases in multiples of 64 Kbps Bit rate allocation is dynamic and when the Content channel closes the video bit rate is restored to its maximum MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II
384. r to the upgrade To upgrade the Database Manager from a previous version MGC Manager Version 7 5 can be used only when a hardware key dongle is installed on the MCU Before installing this software version and downloading the MCU software version you must install the dongle on the MCU For more information please contact Polycom support 1 Follow the directions for upgrading the Database Manager in the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 2 MGC Unit Software Installation 6 31 Chapter 6 Using a Database 6 32 Log in to the Database Manager as described in the previous procedure If this is the first time you are logging in to the application since it was upgraded a popup window is displayed IT i x A There are databases that are not updated with the new MGC database structure Do you want to update them now es me Select Yes to automatically update the database recommended or No to leave the database unchanged If you select No new entries to the database will not be saved when using the new Database Manager application version If you selected Yes the UpdateDB dialog box is displayed informing you which databases require updating ioixi The following dB s are not updated with the new accord dB Please choose the dB s that you want to Update AccordDB Sys DSN C Program Files MGC Manager ver 4 0 Database AccordAccess mdb If the list contains more than one database
385. rator moved a participant to a conference Operator attended a participant Operator put a participant on hold Operator back to conference participant For a full list of the conference events logged in the CDR file see Appendix A CDR File Fields The MGC Manager ignores events that it does not recognize written in a higher version than its current version To enable compatibility between versions new fields in existing events are added as a separate event a new entry without affecting the events existing in previous versions This allows users with lower versions to open CDR files that were retrieved in higher versions MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Viewing Retrieving and Archiving Conference Information You can use one of the two following methods to start the CDR utility and display the list of conference records e Opening the CDR utility from the Start menu e Opening the CDR utility through the MGC Manager right click menu To open the CDR utility from the Start menu 1 From the Start menu select Programs MGC Manager Ver 7 5 and then click CDR Programs an Accessories Y EEE EREE E AucVidConvert KA gt Microsoft Office Tools gt f i Settings Polycom WebOffice gt CDR hip Internet Explorer 3 Database Manager a Search gt os ki Microsoft Outlook T P Term Help and Support S MGC Manager ver 7 5 MGC Manager ver 7 5 hl d J Run z s P D UNInstal
386. rce forcing Audio Unit ID The unit number on the Audio card handling the participant audio channel or 65535 if there is no audio resource forcing Video Board ID The slot number of the Video card handling the participant video channel or 65535 if there is no video resource forcing Video Unit ID The unit number on the Video card handling the participant video channel or 65535 if there is no video resource forcing Data Board ID The slot number of the Data card handling the participant data channel or 65535 if there is no data resource forcing Data Unit ID The unit number on the Data card handling the participant data channel or 65535 if there is no data resource forcing Table A 10 AV Message Information Fields nr i Attended Welcome The Greet and Guide conference type as follows 0 None no Greet amp Guide 1 Welcome No Wait 2 Attended Wait 3 IVR AV Message Relevant only if the Greet and Guide conference type is Service Name not None The name of the AV Message Service assigned to the Greet and Guide conference A 27 Appendix A CDR File Fields Table A 11 Lecture Mode Information Fields ae Lecture Mode Indicates the type of Lecture Mode as follows 0 Lecture Mode is disabled 1 Lecture Mode is enabled 2 Lecture Show 3 Presentation Mode Lecturer Name The name of the participant selected as the conference Time Interval The time interval between participants when automati
387. rences icon The list of On Going Conferences is displayed L Product Management Normal Ea mcu Configuration E On Going Conferences 2 aa ACCORD 5 asdf On Going Gateway Sessions 0 re Participants Queue 0 Reservations 0 LEE H F 3 Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories 7 Double click or click the plus icon next to the conference whose participants you want to list 4 19 Chapter 4 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences The list of participants is displayed MGC Manager VERSION 7 5 0 17 File Edit View Template DataBase Directory Options Window Help ra Te Mee ee We ede a 0 eC ca cf cen gt r ATAA Connection Network PhonelIP_ Connection Audio D gt connected 172 22 133 39 Bed oiatout qi AD connected 172 22 132 112 Bed vat out qi z 3 Duke DO Polycom oe Nadine Polycom H ip Beservations 2 4 amp Meeting Rooms Name Status Connection Network Phone IP Connection Type Audio _ video gig accoro Prod Mgmt ID 3794 0 Connected Empty Donna D Disconnected _172 22 132 146 Be Dial out qil 2 Connected z f Duke DO a Wait AD Connected 172 22 133 39 BD Wat AD connected 172 22 192 112 Be Dial out qi be Dial out qi Idg dd g 3 Diana e No Wait D Connected 172 22 132 146 Be Dial out qi osh E Nowat O Con
388. res The Login Name field is filled with the last name entered so you do not have to retype it each time you log in The first time you log in or MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II whenever the registry is empty the login you used to enter Windows will be automatically referenced when accessing the database If required type your Login Name 3 Enter your password in the Password field and then click OK The Database Manager window opens displaying the database icon gi DatabaseManager ersion k aigixi File Edit view Options Help m AccordDB Name Selected Default H E svt4 6 Private amp Global Upgrading from a Previous Version When upgrading from a previous version of the Database Manager the old database is saved during the installation procedure If there are discrepancies in the number of fields between the old and the new database the system queries whether to update the database to the new format The system automatically saves the network cards circuit ID assignments during the upgrade process and restores Reservations after the software upgrade However it is recommended that you document the order of the network cards and their circuit ID assignments as well as back up the reservations using the Reservation Backup utility prior to the MCU upgrade For more details regarding this utility see the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 5 Reservations Backup and Restore prio
389. retrieved text file cdr and select the file to be formatted You may select several files to be formatted using the standard Windows techniques 5 Click Open If the retrieved formatted version of the conference record already exists the following message is displayed File Polycom_c132 cdf exists do you wantto overwrite Yes All No All No Cancel Select Yes to overwrite the existing file or No to cancel the formatting for the file and continue the formatting of the remaining files Select Cancel to cancel the operation At the end of the formatting process a message is displayed MGC Manager CDR xj e Jl Finish Offline Formating Ee 6 Click OK 9 10 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Viewing the Archived Files and Generating Reports The archived files cdr and cdf are text files that can be viewed using any text editor such as Notepad File Edit View Favorites Tools Help OQ 4 2 J Search F gt rotders 19 S EX Address c Conference Data archive Folders x Name Date Modified a y Brand Meeting _570195_ 28 Nov 04 12 16 6KB H BE E Budget e 05 Sep 05 10 0 BKB 8 Int l Sales _c127 cdr 08 Feb 04 5 31 9KB Conference Data archive D sales444_c10 cdf 11 Dec 05 1 17 7 KB CrashRepart Sales_Video_c11 cdr 11 Dec 05 12 32 6 KB Debbie Documents and Settings a NVIDIA m
390. ric ID routing mode For more details about Ad Hoc conferencing see Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication Audio and Video Conversion Tools The MGC Manager includes tools that allow you to convert the audio and video files into a format recognizable by the Polycom MCU and to send the converted files to the MCU for storage in the Audio card s memory This step is required in order to use the audio files with the IVR Message Service and the Entry Queue Service 2 13 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services 2 14 The conversion process must be performed prior to the definition of the IVR Properties and the IVR Message Service The conversion process is the same as for AV Message Services used in Greet and Guide conferences MGC Manager is shipped with default audio files in English and Spanish in wav and MGC internal format aca that can be used with the existing default IVR and Entry Queue Services installed with the MCU software These default audio files can also be used to create new IVR and Entry Queue Services The conversion of wav files is required when you record your own set of voice prompts and messages The Audio and Video conversion tools are described in the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 8 Audio and Video Conversion Tools MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II IVR Hardware Requirements The following hardware is required to set up and manage IVR enabled c
391. ridge Board Number Audio Bridge Unit Number Video Board Number Video Unit Number T 120 Board Number T 120 Unit Number The number of the unit on the MUX card handling the participant call The slot number of the Audio card handling the participant call The number of the unit on the Audio card handling the participant call The slot number of the Audio card on which the audio bridge handling the participant call is installed The number of the unit on the Audio card acting as the Audio Bridge The slot number of the Video card handling the participant call The number of the unit on the Video card handling the participant call The slot number of the Data card handling the participant call The number of the unit on the Data card handling the participant call MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 20 Event Fields for Event 2007 Participant Disconnected Continue 1 Continued S ee T 120 Mcs Board The slot number of the Data card containing the T 120 Number bridge handling the participant call H 323 Board The slot number of the H 323 card handling the Number participant call H323 Unit Number The number of the unit on the H 323 card handling the participant call T 120 Mcs Unit The number of the unit on theT 120 bridge handling the Number participant call Table A 21 Event Fields for Event 8 Remote Communication Mode P oo ee Participant Name The name of the participant
392. rn to the ODBC Data Source Administrator System DSN dialog box 11 Click OK to confirm and exit the ODBC settings 12 If you are registering the database in the ODBC from within the MGC Manager application an update window appears Select Yes to refresh the list of the databases available to the operator Select No to refresh the database list manually In that case the database will not be available to the user until the list is refreshed manually If you select Yes the system attempts to open all the databases registered in the ODBC If these Databases are protected by a Name and Password a Login dialog box is displayed Since the MGC database is not password protected select Cancel in all the Login dialog boxes that are displayed by the system 13 Ifyou register the database from the ODBC Control Panel you must refresh the database list manually in the MGC Manager application by selecting Database ODBC and then Refresh the Database List from the Database menu The system attempts to open all the databases registered in the ODBC If these Databases are protected by a Name and Password a Login dialog box is displayed Select Cancel in all the Login dialog boxes that are displayed by the system 6 10 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II SQL Server Configuration and Registration Optional This step is required only if you have an SQL Server installed in your configuration Otherwise skip this step Restoring
393. rnatively click the Save button on the toolbar Copying an On Going Conference or a Conference Reservation to a Reservation Template File or Reservation Database Another method for creating a Reservation template is to copy an On Going Conference or a Reservation to a Reservation Template file or Reservation database This is useful when the same conference is being used repeatedly 8 52 In the MGC Manager Main window in the Browser area expand the On Going Conferences or Reservations tree to list the On Going Conferences or Reservations 2 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Right click the icon of the conference or reservation to copy and then click Copy Conf a Greet amp Guide Attended Wait A Monitor Monitor Filter New Participant F Terminate Del Refresh Video Copy Conf Ctrl C q a rly Paste Participant As Ctrl P Lock Conference Print Reservation Data Video Force Drag amp Drop Properties Open the target Reservation Template file or Reservations in Database window In the target Reservation Template file window right click the Conferences List icon In Reservations in Database window expand the Groups list until you locate the destination group and right click the Group icon Click Paste f Polycom New Res Template New Res Operator Template Print All New Group Delete Group The conference is copie
394. rom a Participant template file from an LDAP compatible directory if one is configured or you can define a new participant Participants that are assigned to the conference from the database are linked participants 9 To display the list of participants stored in the database click the From Database button 7 15 Chapter 7 Database Templates 7 16 The Open Parties in Database dialog box opens xi Database Name AccordDB gt Filter Name M Labe I None z Group 7 S y a Ifmore than one database is configured in your system select the appropriate database from the Database Name list b Filter the list of participants by clicking the Name and or Label check boxes and then entering the appropriate character string in the Name field and or selecting the appropriate label from the drop down list c The Template Group option is enabled by default displaying the highest Template Group in the Groups hierarchy to which the logged in user has access rights You can select another group from the Template Groups hierarchy from the drop down list Only Template Groups to which you have access rights are listed in the Group drop down list d Click OK A list of all the participants in the filtered category is displayed in the Pre Defined Participants list and the name of the participant s Group is displayed in the Pre Defined Participants File box When assigning participants from a database other than t
395. roperties Participants dialog box Adding a Participant from a Participant Template file or Participant database You can add a participant defined in a Participant Template file or Participant database to a Reservation template There are several methods of doing this To add a participant from a Participant Template file or Participant database using the Conference Properties dialog box l 4 Open the Reservations in Database window or the Reservation Template file window In the Reservation database expand the Groups tree until you locate the group in which the Reservation template to which you wish to add a participant is stored Double click the Group icon to list its Reservation templates Alternatively in the Reservation Template file window expand the Conference List icon to list the Reservation templates Right click the desired Reservation template icon and then click Properties ca weboffice_v1 7 Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Default Attending Print Template Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl Paste As Ctrl P Delete Del Properties 4 The Conference Properties dialog box appears Click the Participants tab in the Conference Properties dialog box 8 31 Chapter 8 Templates Handling The Conference Properties Participants dialog box appears Default Conference Properties The name of the current Participant Template file or
396. roperties E Identification Advanced Aggregation Number of Channels Auto X Auto X Video Protocol Auto v Recording None z I Restict Oniy Z AGC I Enhanced Video For Standard Video Cards only Not required for Video Service Name Sub Service Name Node Type Num type Terminal Taken from service ba IV Save Participant OK Cancel Apply When the Auto Detect option is selected the Number of Channels Video Protocol and Aggregation fields are disabled as these parameters are derived from the endpoint s capabilities at connection time and according to the conference settings The line rate that is defined for a conference is also the maximun line rate in which the participant can connect to that conference Dial in Auto Detect When the participant dials in to the MCU each channel is detected by the MCU and the system tries to connect the participant using the Bonding protocol If the connection that uses Bonding is successful the negotiation with the endpoint communicates the number of additional channels to be connected The participant s connection continues using the Bonding connection procedure If the Bonding connection fails the MCU tries to connect the endpoint using the H 221 standard If this attempt fails as well the connection with the endpoint is terminated If the capabilities exchange is 1 60 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II succes
397. rticipant currently holding the Holder FECC LSD token None indicates that the FECC LSD channel is closed 1 19 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings Table 1 2 FECC LSD Options for an On Going Conference Continued FECC LSD Rate The current data transmission rate Off Indicates that the LSD FECC channel is closed 6 4 Indicates that the LSD FECC channel is open and the rate is 6 4 Kbps 4 8 Indicates the rate of the LSD FECC channel that is open in an encrypted conference Note When the LSD FECC option is set to Dynamic the FECC LSD Rate field displays Off or the rate Withdraw FECC Click this button to withdraw the LSD token from LSD Token the current holder and return it to the MCU 3 Click the Withdraw FECC LSD Token button to withdraw the FECC LSD token from the current endpoint holder and release it to the MCU for assignment to other endpoints 4 Click OK 1 20 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Using 4CIF Video Resolution High Quality 4CIF video resolution is available in Continuous Presence conferences running at 512 Kbps or higher line rates In this mode the endpoints transmit CIF or QCIF and receive 4CIF images from the MCU In full screen layout 1x1 endpoints that can send 4CIF images will send 4CIF to the MCU when they are the speakers In Continuous Presence conferences you can select the quality of the display depending on the video transmission Sharpness Optimi
398. rvation Template file or Reservation database and expand the Reservation templates to locate the template to which you wish to copy the participant 8 39 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 8 40 Right click the icon of the target Reservation template icon and then click Paste or Paste As to copy the participant under a different name sa weboffice_v1 7 Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Default Attending Print Template Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl Paste As Ctri P Delete Del Properties The participant is added to the target Reservation template The participant icon appears in the Reservation template s participants list An asterisk appears in the title bar in the Reservation Template file window or the Reservations in Database window to indicate that changes have been made Click Save from the Template menu when the Reservation template is stored in a Reservation Template file or click Save Database from the Database menu when the Reservation template is stored in a database to save the changes Alternatively click the Save button on the toolbar The asterisk is removed from the title of the window containing the Reservation template MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Copying a Participant from a Reservation Template to an On Going Conference You can add participants to an On Going conference by copying their properties from a Reservation template
399. rvations Database You can copy an individual Reservation template into the Reservation database using the Copy and Paste commands The Reservation template is copied from the Reservation Template file window to the Reservations in Database window 8 19 Chapter 8 Templates Handling Dragging and dropping is unavailable for Reservation templates Reservation or Participant templates whose names already exist in the When problems occur during the conversion process such as converting fs database an error message is displayed To copy a Reservation template from the Reservation Template file to the Reservations in Database window 1 Open the Reservation Template file from which you want to copy the Reservation template 2 Log in to the database and open the Reservations in Database window 3 Inthe Reservations Template file window right click the icon of the Reservation template to copy and click Copy E ResTemplatesFile2 tlt 5 x B Conferences List R i 4 Audio Conference a ag Operator Conference ia Video Conference i Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Default Attending Print Template Properties 8 20 4 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II In the Reservations in Database window right click the Group to which you want to copy the Reservation template and then click Paste 10 x E Root Name LineRate Audioslg Video Se Meetme _
400. s Party Properties x Settings1 Settings Name Interface Type Connection ISDN x Dial in 7 Participant Phone MCU Numbers Participant Bonding Meet me per J z User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 User Identifier String sent to Recording system eee Volume 5 Listening Yolume 5 Owner S53 I vip Cancel In the Name field enter the name of the Participant Defaults set Define the Settings parameters The Settings parameters are defined in the same manner as in the Participant Properties dialog box described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties The Owner field displays the name of the user to whom the default set is assigned This field is disabled for users without permission to modify write database tables User with Administrator rights who can read and write database tables can assign the defaults set to any registered user The Owner name can be used for filtering 6 43 Chapter 6 Using a Database 5 Click the Settings 2 tab The Party Properties Settings2 dialog box opens Party Properties 6 Define the Settings2 parameters The Settings2 parameters are defined in the same manner as in the Participant Properties dialog box described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties 7 Click OK to
401. s Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Cont Recording r General Settings Msg Service Type None Msg Service Name v IT Siencelt M vTx 1000 Rana I Conference Lock Chair Control None af T Mute Cascade None z Star F Conferences icryption Master Name None ad 7120 Rate None X IT Auto Termination FECC LSD Rate None z Before First Join Min After Last Quit 1 Min m Media Settings Audio Alg Auto kd Dual Stream Mode None r lt lt Basic F Rall Call Pro Motion None 7 IV Entry Tone Roll Call announcement Video Piotocok H261 F IV End Time Alert Tone 5 Min Exit Tone Roll Call announcement Koroma EE Frame Rate E Talk Hold Time fs Seo uait Auto 7 Audio Mix Depth BS Sites TO Annex 7 Annex P M Annex F The conference default Line Rate is set to 384 Kbps This is the line rate of the conference broadcasted to the conference participants The Video Rate In Out box displays the video rate per incoming video channel per participant and the total video rate of the outgoing video channel broadcasted to all participants The video rate per participant is calculated as follows Conference Bitrate audio bandwidth 4 For example if the conference Video Bitrate is set to 384 Kbps and the audio algorithm is set to 64 Kbps the video rate per participant is 384 64
402. s Entry Queues amp SIP Factories 6 3 Right click the IVR Services icon and then click New IVR Service fF Product Management Normal H Ba MCU Configuration H ik Cards ae Connections EEO RIVR Msg Services AV Messag amp Gery Mew IVR Service amp Network Services ed a amp Operators Messages Status de j 3 Gateway Config Hegre histo rial Profiles oe Recording Links oa H ev TOTEN Paste As Gtr FP AGG 3 27 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication 3 28 The JVR Global dialog box opens IVR Service Name Language for IVR ENGLISH X Extemal Server Authentication Number of User Input Retries Timeout for User Input DTMF Delimiter This dialog box enables you to define the general parameters of the IVR Service In the External Server drop down list select one of the following options Never to disable this option Upon Request to verify the Chairperson password with an external database application The validation process occurs only when the participant enters the Chairperson Identifier key pound or star All other participants are connected to the conference as standard undefined participants Always to verify the Conference Entry password or the participant s personal password with an external database application The verification process occurs for all participants attempting to jo
403. s 3 19 Defining the Conferencing Components to Implement Ad Hoc COnMSLENCIN E A T S A T E T E 3 20 MCU Configuration to Access the External Database APPliCatiOn sess ecerees cheesy tvadeigeasteshed iste ts a G 3 20 Entry Queue Service with Access to the External Database 3 22 IVR Service with Access to the External Database Application 3 27 PLOT GS EPEA IE AE A AT I E A 3 29 Defining Profiles cccccccceseceeseeeeseeeseeesseeeeeseeseeenseeesneees 3 29 Listing Profiles ccs drieen ch navecdd ba ae 3 31 Sine Prone ennie EAE A 3 32 Adding a Recording Port to a Profile cece eeeeseeeneeeeeees 3 32 Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue ccceccccsceesseeeeseeenseesseeenseeensees 3 33 SIP Factories nccite a E Re 3 41 Table of Contents Creating SIP Factories cccccecccsscesssecseneeeeeeeseeseseeeseeeeeesseees 3 41 Connecting to the SIP Factory ccccecscsseesssecesceeseeesteeseneeesaes 3 42 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences 4 1 Greet and Guide Conferences 0 00 ceeceesecesecseceeeeeseeeseceneceeeceeeeeeeaeeees 4 2 Operator Conferences cccecssccsescesseceeeeeeeceeseeseeeessseeseeeensneeees 4 3 Greet and Guide Stages cscccsscecssecstecusscceseseesstsststvesntessccsueseersieeses 4 3 AV Message Services J tcivicics tcsiistnc ti nat tee a S 4 4 Greet and Guide Hardware 0 ccccccccesseeeseeceseeeneeceseeesseesseeensneeees 4 4 Greet and Guide Tools ccceccccessccseseeeeseeeeeeeeeessee
404. s Review rollcall aca Roll Call Exit from v Add Message File Coot eee The Roll Call feature of the VR Message Service is used to record the participants names for playback when the participants join and leave a conference Participants connecting to the conference are asked to record their name In addition the chairperson can request the Roll Call of all connected participants 25 To enable the Roll Call feature select the Enable Roll Call check box 2 40 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II 26 To assign the audio file to the message type click the appropriate table entry The Message Type appears at the bottom of the table and the drop down list displays the names of the audio files stored in the MGC unit memory If the Roll Call option is enabled all its message types must be assigned the appropriate audio files 27 Select the appropriate audio file want to add new audio files click Add Message File to download the appropriate audio file to the MGC unit s memory For the downloading procedure see step 8 on page 2 29 If the files were not downloaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you Table 2 9 Roll Call Voice Messages Roca Description Message Roll Call Record Requests participants to state their name for recording when they connect to the conference Note The recording is automatically terminated after two seconds Roll Call Verify Verification messa
405. s are sorted and stored in groups according to their duration There are five duration categories 2 second 4 second 8 second 16 second and 32 second groups The messages are sorted in the Audio card of the MCU The number of messages that can be downloaded to the Audio card for each of these groups is listed in Table 2 14 Table 2 14 Default Number Of Messages for Each Duration Category Message Duration Category Number of Voice Messages in Group 2 second duration 360 4 second duration 438 You can view the number of audio files that are currently stored on the Audio card and the status of the downloading process if you check the status during the download process To view the status of the audio messages 1 Connect to the MGC unit MCU 2 Expand the MCU tree and then expand the MCU Configuration tree 3 Right click the VR Msg Services icon and then click Messages Status S RIVR M New IVR Service New Entry Queue Service Paste 4s Ctrl P sg Services Paste Gerl y Messages Status Properties 2 61 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services The IVR Messages Status dialog box opens listing the VR messages audio files that are currently stored on the Audio card sorted according to their duration The list also displays the file s name and its download status The Messages Occupancy pane shows The maximum number of audio messages for each category that can be stored on
406. s connecting directly to an VR enabled conference are allowed in to the conference once they have entered the appropriate conference entry password and or chairperson password If the Entry Queue or the VR enabled conference is set to Attended mode the Entry Queue Service or the IVR Service is configured to On Hold for Operator Assistance the participants are moved to the Participants Queue where they wait for the operator to connect them to the conference Attended Participants are moved to the Operator conference After a short conversation with the participant the operator moves the participant to the appropriate conference Home conference or places the participant on hold On Hold Participants are placed on hold While waiting for the operator s assistance they hear background music and for video IVR a video slide is displayed Participants waiting in the Entry Queue are also placed on hold and moved to the Participants Queue when they enter the wrong Numeric ID or the wrong password While on hold they wait for the operator to connect them to the conference 2 3 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services gy Lg Operator assistance must be enabled in the Entry Queue or the IVR Service and an Operator conference must be running on the same MCU e Conferencing The participants are connected to the On Going Conference and they can request operator assistance or perform various operations via DTMF codes
407. s follows 1 H 261 2 H 263 3 H 26L 4 H 264 255 Auto Indicates whether the Meet Me Per Conference option is enabled or disabled 0 The Meet Me Per Conference option is disabled 1 The Meet Me Per Conference option is enabled and dial in participants join the conference by dialing the dial in number MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 5 Event Fields for Event 2001 Conference Start Continue 1 Continued ee aa Number of The number of Network Services assigned to the Network Services conference The value can be between 0 to 30 Network Service Relevant only if the Meet Me Per Conference option is Phone Numbers enabled For each Network Service assigned to the conference there will be 3 or 4 fields as follows The name of the Network Service The number of phone numbers defined for the Network Service Possible values are 1 or 2 The first phone number defined for the Network Service The second phone number defined for the Network Service Applicable only if a second phone number is defined Conference The password assigned to the conference Password An empty password means that no password was assigned to the conference Chair Mode Indicates whether or not chair control is enabled as follows 0 Chair control is disabled 255 Chair control is enabled Cascade Mode The cascading mode as follows 0 None 1 Master 2 Slave 255 Auto Master Name The name of the
408. s is indicated by an icon in the Encryption column in the Status pane and the Status column in the Monitor pane tia For more information on monitoring the MCU features and capacities related to encryption see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Monitoring Conferences 1 37 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings 1 38 An encrypted participant who is unable to join a conference is disconnected from the conference The disconnection cause is displayed in the Participant Properties Disconnection Cause tab where the Security Failure indication is selected and the Cause box identifies the encryption related situation Nadine Properties MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Extending the Conference Duration The conference duration can be automatically extended without operator intervention When the Auto Extend option is enabled for a conference the conference predefined end time is continually postponed as long as participants are connected and MCU resources are available When the Auto Extend option is enabled for a conference x minutes before the end of the conference where x is the number of minutes defined for End of Conference Alert parameter in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box the system checks if at least one participant is connected to the conference If a single participant is still connected the system automatically extends the conference by y minutes
409. s is the recommended threshold MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Enabling 4CIF in a Continuous Presence Conference In CP conferences when you select the H 263 video protocol you can select the quality of video transmitted from the conference to the endpoints The Quality option is used if the endpoints are capable of receiving 4CIF The Quality option is available when the line rate is 512 Kbps or above To enable 4CIF Conferences 4CIF and the Quality option are enabled in the Conference Properties Settings dialog box 1 Ifrequired in the Media Settings area click the Advanced button 2 Inthe Video Protocol list select H 263 3 Inthe Quality list select one of the following options Auto Select this option to allow the system to select Motion or Sharpness based on the endpoint s capability Motion Select this option to optimize the video display for motion Sharpness Select this option to optimize the video display for details Default Conference Properties Product Management 4 xj General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Cont Recording r General Settings J Restricted A Line Rate 2B X Msg Service Type None x Video Rate In Out Msg Service Name I Conference On Port T Encryption F Silence 17 F vTx 1000 lt lt Basic r I Conference Lock Chair Control Nore TT Mute Mee
410. s made to the database tables Select this option before exiting the database or before refreshing it to prevent losing changes To save changes to the database e On the Database menu click Save Database DataBase Directory Options Window Save Database Refresh Database F9 Filter Login Open D B Reservation Template Open D B Participant Template Logout amp Clear Login Record Load Defaults From DB Manage databases Database ODBC Alternatively click the Save button E on the toolbar 7 42 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Opening Additional User Tables You can open the Participant and Reservation User Tables and display them concurrently Once you have opened one User Table using the logging in process you can then open the other without having to perform the login again This only applies if you have access rights to both databases To open additional User Tables 1 On the Database menu select Open D B Reservation Template or Open D B Participant Template and then select the database you want to work with The system lists all databases you are entitled to work with according to your database Login Name and Password DataBase Directory Options Window Save Database Refresh Database Filter Login Open D B Reservation Template AccordDB Open D B Participant Template Logout amp Clear Login Record Load Defaults From DB Manage databases
411. s to Users The Add Default to Users dialog box opens listing all users currently defined in the database Add Default to Users xj ACCORD Administrator admin Administrator oper Operator POLYCOM Administrator user Moderator _juser2 Moderator Without Initiating WebOffice Administrator Select All Cancel 3 Select the check boxes of all users to which you want to assign the Defaults set To select all users click the Select All button 4 Click OK 6 49 Chapter 6 Using a Database gy To designate a database as the Private or Global default database Only the administrator can assign a database as the Private or Global default database 1 Inthe Browser area right click the icon of the database to be designated as the Private or Global default database A pop up menu appears E ERE et As Private Default et As Global Default Remove dB connection 2 Click Set As Private Default to designate this database as the source for the Private Default set or click Set As Global Default to designate this database as the source for the Global Default set A check mark next to the selected option indicates which option is active To define the database as both the Private and Global default database select both options repeating steps and 2 Defining Permissions 6 50 gy Permissions define the access rights to various functions of the MG
412. s will not be able to connect to the target conference 3 37 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication 3 38 Table 3 4 Entry Queue for Ad Hoc Conferencing using a Profile Continued ici NAS ee Target Conference Settings Audio Alg Video Format Select the audio algorithm for the Entry Queue If target conferences are Audio Only conferences select G 711 If IP Only you have an additional option G 723 G 729 If set to Auto the system tries to connect the participants using the best possible audio algorithm selecting it in the following order G 728 G 722 G 711 Select the Video format for the Entry Queue according to the target conference settings The Video Format options are enabled only when defining a Video Switching Entry Queue and when the video protocol is H 261 or H 263 Select Auto to let the system select the appropriate video format according to the participant properties Select video format to force the participant to connect using one of these frame resolutions For a detailed description of the video format options see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 1 Chapter 4 Defining Advanced Media Settings Select the Frame Rate for the Entry Queue according to the target conference settings This option is enabled only for Video Switching conferences set to H 261 or H 263 Select Auto to let the system select the appropriate frame rate Select one of the frame rates t
413. seceseeeeeneeseseseaeeeeseeeseeenes 1 2 People and Content VO cceccccecssesssceeseesseeseecessesereeeeteeeneenaes 1 5 TUG VIGO aiaiai AAO AAAA 1 6 Polycom Visual Concert PC rescseeesncciinerseiniisemie 1 8 Polycom Visual Concert FX cccccccecssceseeesceceeneeeseeseseeenseeensees 1 11 Far End Camera Control FECC and Low Speed Data LSD 1 14 Viewing the FECC LSD Conference Properties 0 0 0 1 17 Using 4CIF Video Resolution ccccccccssccseseeecseeeseeeeseeesseeeseeeseneenes 1 21 ACIF Guidelines acssecssecsastastassiadecsacaaacaendasscndecsessessaucdanteaierte 1 21 ACIF Global Setting at the MCU Level eee eeeereees 1 22 Enabling 4CIF in a Continuous Presence Conference 1 23 Software Continuous Presence Settings 200 eceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 25 Defining Software CP Conferences ccccccccceesseeeeeeteeeeteeenees 1 26 Monitoring Software CP Conference Participants 1 29 Media Encryption ccesceeseeseceseceeceeeeeseeeseceaeeaeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeneeeaees 1 30 Enabling Encryption at the MCU Level ee eeceeeereeeeeeeeeees 1 31 Enabling Encryption at the Conference Level 0 0 cece eeeeeeee 1 32 Enabling Encryption for Entry Queues eee eeeeseeseeseeeneeeeee 1 33 Enabling Encryption at the Participant Level eeeeeeeeeee 1 34 Monitoring the Encryption Status 0 ccecseesseeeseeeeneees 1 37 Extending the Conference Duration cccccccc
414. ser s PIN code and his her VIP status The same user definitions can be used for conference access authentication that is to determine who can join the conference as a participant and who as a chairperson 3 3 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication Ad Hoc conferencing is available in two modes e Ad Hoc Conferencing without Authentication Any participant can dial into an Entry Queue and initiate a new conference if the conference does not exist This mode is usually used for the organization s internal Ad Hoc conferencing e Ad Hoc conferencing with external database authentication In this mode the participant s right to start a new conference and the participant s right to join an On Going conference are validated against a database The authentication mechanism is available in two levels Entry Queue and conference enabling various scenarios depending on the system configuration The Entry Queue level authentication is only applicable to Ad Hoc Conferencing and determines the user s right to initiate a conference with a specific Numeric ID The conference level authentication determines the participant s authorization to join a conference and can be part of the Ad Hoc conferencing flow or used independently of Ad Hoc conferencing for pre defined conferences The following scenarios describe Entry Queue and conference level authentication Entry Queue level gt Conference initi
415. servation Template 7 Reservation Template 8 Root Group 3 Reservation Template 9 Reservation Template 10 Figure 7 2 Database Organization in Template Groups Chapter 7 Database Templates The access rights of users to the Participants and Reservation Template Groups are defined by the administrator during the configuration stage Access rights determine the user s ability to view modify or create templates in a specific Template Group Template Groups enhance the system security by enabling the system administrator to limit the user access to specific Template Groups This feature is important when the database is accessed from remote sites and over the Internet The Template Groups are defined in the MGC Database Manager in the administrative segment of the database To view modify or define the Reservation and the Participant templates stored in the database you must first log in to the database To log in to the database and list the Reservation or Participant templates 1 On the Database menu click Login DataBase Directory Options Window Open 3 Reservation Template Open D B Participant Template b Logout amp Clear Login Record Load Defaults From DB Manage databases Database ODBC gt The Database Login dialog box opens x Login Name J Password I Create Login Record Cancel The Login Name field displays the login name that was previously used The fir
416. sful the endpoint is connected according to the conference line rate communicated by the MCU during the capabilities exchange and using the standard H 221 aggregation procedure Dial out Auto Detect When a dial out participant connects to the conference the system exchanges capabilities with the endpoint and attempts to connect the participant using Bonding If Bonding is unavailable the participant is connected in H 221 Once the aggregation method is determined the MCU attempts to connect the participant at the Line Rate defined for the conference If this fails it connects the participant using a lower line rate e When Bonding fails and H 221 is selected problems may occur when connecting the participant if the operator entered only one dial number and the participant s line rate is higher than 2B 128 Kbps e HO is not automatically detected Monitoring You can view the endpoint s connection parameters in the Monitor and Status panes of the MGC Manager window For more details see the MGC Manger User s Guide Volume I Chapter 5 1 61 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings 1 62 IVR and Entry Queue Services Interactive Voice Response IVR is an application that allows participants to communicate with the conferencing system over the telephone or via their endpoint s input device such as a remote control VR automates the connection to the conference process and enables the participant to perform vario
417. ssages Message Type Message Text FileName Welcome Welcome to VoicePlus WELCMPNS ACA Conferencing Connecting to You are now being connected to CONFCONN ACA conference your conference Conference Please enter the conference CONFPASS ACA password request password Press the pound key when complete Conference Invalid conference password CONFRTRY ACA password failure Please try again Disconnection Msg You are now being disconnected GOODBYE ACA from the conference Goodbye Operator Please wait The conference OPERHELP ACA Assistance operator will assist you momentarily NID Conference Please enter your conference ID CNFIDRQS ACA ID request Press the pound key when complete NID Conference Invalid conference ID Please try CNFIDFL ACA ID failure again Leader For conference Chairperson ENTRYOPT ACA Chairperson Services Press the Pound Key All identifier request other participants please wait Leader Please enter the Conference LEDRPASS ACA Chairperson Chairperson Password Press the password request pound key when complete Leader Invalid chairperson password LEDRRTRY ACA Chairperson Please try again password failure 2 65 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Table 2 15 Default IVR Messages Continued Message Type Message Text FileName Personal code Please enter your personal code PINRQST ACA request Press the pound key when complete
418. sseececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 61 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Printing VR DTMEF Codes 00 eccceceesceeseceseeeseeseceseceneceaeeneeeaeeeaeeenees 2 63 Default IVR Prompts and Messages cesceesceeseeseceneceseeeneeeneeenees 2 65 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication 6k ba kb hice Nee ERE EOE wOT RET taise wai 3 1 Requirements for Ad Hoc Conferencing ee eeeeceeeceeeeeeseeeeeeneeeees 3 2 Ad Hoc Conferencing and Conference Access Authentication DCOM O E N A E I E E E E E 3 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing without External Database Authentication 00 eceeeesecesecesceseceseceseceaecneceaeceaeeeaecseceaeceaeeeaeeeees 3 5 Entry Queue level Conference initiation Numeric ID validation with an External Database application cceee 3 7 Conference level Conference Access Conference Password validation with an External Database Application ee 3 9 Conference level Conference Access Chairperson Password validation with an External Database Application 06 3 11 Initiating and Connecting to Ad Hoc Conferences eee 3 14 Additional Participant Definitions for Ad Hoc Conferencing 0 0 eeeeceeeccessceeeeseeeseeeseceeceaeeeaeeeseeeseeaeeeeeeeeraes 3 14 Ad Hoc Auto Cascading oo ceccccccscesceesseeesseeeseeeseeeesssecseeeseseeesaeeenes 3 16 Defining Auto Cascading Entry Queues ceccceesseeeseeeneeeteees 3 18 Monitoring Auto Cascaded Conference Links 0 0 eter
419. ssign groups to user Grorvcom Copy Copy As Delete Propertie Assign groups to user Set As Default User The lt User Name gt Group Assignment dialog box opens listing the current Groups to which the user has access rights WebOffice Group Assignment o E Conference Participant View MCU Conferences Root WebDffice RW RW None Add Assignment Reservation Templates V Read iV write Participant Templates JY Read iV Write Delete Assignment View MCU Conferences No X The list displays the groups already assigned to the User with the access rights the user has to each of these groups You may modify the user s access rights to a specific group by clicking the group and then checking the appropriate Read and Write properties To assign additional groups to the user click the Add Assignment button 6 61 Chapter 6 Using a Database 6 62 To remove an assigned group select the group you wish to delete and then click the Delete Assignment button If you have selected to Add Assignment the Select a group to Assign to lt user gt dialog box opens Select a group to Assignto User x e UserGroups e WebDffice Reservation Templates Read Write Participant Templates Read J Write Cancel View MCU Conferences No h Click the group to assign to the user If needed click the plus icon to expand the
420. ssigns the Reservation template name as the default file name However you can define another file name The file can be saved only in text format Click Save to create the text file If Printer is selected the Print dialog box opens Select the required printer and then click OK The conference data is printed using the printer s current settings If Clipboard is selected the conference template data is copied to the clipboard so you can paste it to a text processing application To view a printed sample of conference parameters refer to the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume 1 Chapter 6 Printing Conference Data 8 59 Chapter 8 Templates Handling Adding a Participant from an On Going Conference ora Reservation to a Participant Template file or Participant database 8 60 In the MGC Manager Main window in the Browser area expand the On Going Conferences or Reservations tree to list the On Going Conferences or Reservations Double click the On Going Conference icon or the Reservation icon or click the plus icon next the respective icon to list its assigned participants Right click the icon of the participant to copy to the Participant Template file or Participant database and then click Copy Participant Disconnect Participant Ctrl T Move Pa ENS gt Copy Particip Ctrl C Delete Del Exclusive Speaker Q amp A Management gt Mute Audio Ctrl M Mute Video Block Audio Turn
421. ssigns the chair token to the endpoint requesting it When another participant holds the chair token the MCU rejects the request The chairperson may release the chair token to let the MCU assign control to another endpoint Once the chair token is free the endpoint may request it again if no other endpoint has requested it The chair control token may be withdrawn by the MCU In that case the chair operations are stopped immediately In a cascading conference when a participant connected to a conference run by an MCU defined as Slave requests the chair token from the MCU the slave MCU checks first if the chair token is assigned to another participant in its slave conference If another participant is holding the token the request for the chair token is rejected If no other participant in the conference run by the slave MCU holds the token the request is transferred to the Master MCU which checks if the chair token is free If the token is not assigned to any other participant in any conference belonging to the cascading conference the chair token is assigned to the participant If the chair token is assigned to another participant the master MCU sends a reject message to the slave MCU which in turn sends the message to the participant 5 23 Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences 5 24 In H 320 Master Slave cascading conferences only the 6 4 fixed rate option is available for FECC LSD In that conference when a request for the data toke
422. st time you log in or whenever the registry is empty the login used to log in to Windows will be automatically referenced when accessing the database 2 Ifrequired type your Login Name MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The following default login names and passwords are defined in the database Table 7 1 Database Passwords Tee eee Pon user2 123 Moderator Monitoring only Part1 Participant These users differ in the functions they are allowed to perform applies mainly to the Database Manager and the WebCommander applications the Template Groups to which they are assigned and the information they can access For a description of the default permissions see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Chapter 6 Logging into the Database Manager Enter your password in the Password field and select the Create Login Record checkbox if you want the Login process to be automated The Create Login Record option allows you to define your login Name and Password for the session The name and password you enter here become the defaults for the session You will not be asked to enter them each time you connect to an MCU 4 Click OK The Database Login dialog box closes On the Database menu select Open D B Reservation Template or Open D B Participant Template and then select the database you want 7 5 Chapter 7 Database Templates 7 6 6 to work with The system lists all databases you are e
423. system to route participants to their conferences according to the conference Numeric ID or password depending on the MCU configuration an Entry Queue Service must be assigned to the Entry Queue Assigning is done during the Entry Queue definition in the Entry Queue Properties dialog box To assign the Entry Queue Service to an Entry Queue In the Entry Queue Properties dialog box in the Entry Queue Service list select the Entry Queue Service or leave this box empty to use the default Entry Queue Service if one is defined Entry Queue Properties Product Management E r Entry Queue Settings Name Entry Queue Service Numeric ID I Cascade F vTx 1000 r Target Conference Settings I AdHoc Audio Alg Auto X Profile x Video Format uto m Target Conferences Boa Frame Rate uto v I IP Only Video Protocol auto z J Encryption I Annex N I Annex P T Annex F Video Switching N Line Rate 2B M I Restricted Transcoding Continuous Presence E Dialin Number 1 Diakin Number 2 Cancel default VR Message Service but not both If an IVR Service is selected as You can set either a defined IVR Service or a defined Entry Queue Service as the ey default you must assign the Entry Queue Service here 2 60 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Viewing the Audio Messages Status The audio files for the messages and voice prompt
424. t xi General Settings Participants Video Sources Resource Force Meet Me Per Conf Recording Name Slave 1 Conf Entry Password l Duration l 2 00 Web Chairperson Password l Billing l Numeric ID l MCU Product Management User Defined 1 o I Entry Queue Access User Defined 2 V Meet Me Per Conf User Defined 3 rs Conference Type Media r Supported Network Video Session Standard C Audio CIP Video Switching Meeting Room Video Audio IP ISDN Transcoding ATM MPI C Operator Continuous Presence Classic 7 Remarks Update Remark Remarks History Cancel Apply Help 3 Type the Slave conference name in the Name field Fill in the rest of the General tab fields as described in the MGC User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Conference General Parameters 4 Click the Participants tab to add participants to the Slave Conference 5 10 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Participant Properties Identification dialog box opens Identification Advanced Name Slave Conference 1 Connection Type Interface Type Dial out z H323 Ed Participant IP Signaling Port 172 22 133 67 i720 Alias Name Alias Type H323 ID x Extension Identifier String User Detined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Defined 4 Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Yolume 5 1 Gb ou 1 J Audio Only I IP I
425. t Me part Cascade Nore Fs a Fi anHod Master Name None v I Teri i zits JT Enable Invite 7120 Rate None x I Auto Termination FECC LSD Rate None x Before FistJon 5 Min AfterLastQut fT H Min r Media Settings Audio Alg Auto pd Dual Stream Mode None x lt lt Basic F Roll Cal FZ Entry Tone Roll Call announcement ee pees H2S Ls I End Time Alert Tone 5 Min Exit Tone Roll Call announcement Talk Hold Time Audio Mix Depth 1 23 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings the conference to Quad Views or if you select Sharpness in the Quality field it is recommended to set the Video Protocol to H 263 and not Auto which is the default setting e Connecting endpoints using H 264 and H 263 4CIF in the same conference may reduce the conference video frame rate In conferences where 4CIF is used by endpoints it is recommended to set the Video Protocol to H 263 and the Quality to Sharpness e When defining the properties of a Continuous Presence conference if you set For more information on Advanced Media settings see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Advanced Media Settings 1 24 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Software Continuous Presence Settings Software Continuous Presence Software CP is a software solution for IP Only conferences that resembles the Continuous Presence feature in terms of functionality without using video card resources
426. t Visual Concert FX the Annex check boxes N P and F are enabled in the Media Settings Advanced pane Optional To select the Annexes Ifonly the Basic parameters are displayed click the Advanced button Select the type of Annex to use with Visual Concert FX Complete the conference definition and click OK 1 13 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings Far End Camera Control FECC and Low Speed Data LSD Certain video cameras and their software applications allow conference participants to control far end remote cameras The Far End Camera Control protocol H 281 is used to control the video camera remotely with ISDN and IP endpoints With H 323 endpoints Annex Q or RV mode Radvision proprietary method is used for H 281 commands messages requesting control over the far end camera from the MCU Control of the remote endpoints is accomplished by the means of data tokens In a conference with IP and ISDN participants the MCU simulates the use of data tokens with H 323 endpoints to work in a similar way as with ISDN endpoints To obtain control over a far end camera FECC a participant requests the data token from the MCU by clicking one of the arrow keys or one of the zoom keys in the endpoint s software application Upon this request the MCU opens the LSD Low Speed Data channel of all the conference participants and allocates the data token to the requesting participant This allows the participant to transfer co
427. t blank the system uses the video slide and audio messages of the default Message Service For details on how to set a Message Service as default see Setting an AV Message Service as the Default Service on page 4 11 Click the Participants tab The Conference Properties Participants dialog box opens 10 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Select the conference participants from the Database or User Template file or define new participants as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties Ifrequired set the Meet Me Per Conference parameters as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 7 Defining a Meet Me Conference Click OK to complete the definition The conference is added to the On Going Conference Reservation or Template list Chapter 4 AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences Managing Greet and Guide Conferences 4 18 Participants in Greet and Guide conferences can be in one of four stages Greeting Attended On Hold and Conferencing Attended Greet and Guide conferences are managed and monitored like standard Attended conferences using IVR Services The operator controls all stages of the Attended conferences For more information regarding Attended conferences see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 8 In a Welcome No Wait conference the participant is automatically moved from the
428. t of the Entry Queue Service Touch tone signals DTMF codes are the user input to voice prompts The Entry 2 5 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Queue Service is a subset of the IVR Service and behaves in the same way The target conference must have the same properties as the Entry Queue therefore several Entry Queues can be created to accommodate different conference settings However a Video Entry Queue can be used also for audio only conferences and you do not need to define a separate Entry Queue for Audio Only conferences The Entry Queue enables you to use a limited number of dial in numbers for all the conferences and to use toll free numbers for conferences which are charged to the meeting organizers An IVR Service can also be assigned to the conferences accessed from the Entry Queue MCU Conference1 Numeric ID 1234 Password 34567 Conference Password 34567 71356 ISDN PSTN i VL Endpoint Qi IVR oP Queue Service ba Numeric ID 1222 SDN FENN IP Network Service P Prefix 925 Conference2 Numeric ID 1300 Password 71356 Figure 2 2 Dial in Connection via Entry Queue In the example in Figure 2 2 one dial in number is allocated to an Entry Queue and a different password is assigned to each conference The dial in number the conference Numeric ID and passwords are communicated to the conference participants When calling the dial in number the participants
429. ted directly to other conferences that are not connected directly to each other The conferences can run on the same MCU which is usually used when running a very large conference whose number of participants exceeds the maximum number of participants allowed in one conference or on different MCUs Conference A Participant link Conference B Slave Master is ae a a EEEE yo eat Participant link 4 eee poo C Conference D l Conference C Slave Slave l l l l a l BLA l Lage 1 SS l l I Zee E l Se Figure 5 1 Star Cascading A participant who dials from one MCU to another establishes the link between the conferences The same participant is defined in the Master conference and the Slave conference In one conference the participant connection type is defined as dial in and the dial in number is the number of the MCU where the participant is defined MCU A In the other conference the participant connection type is defined as dial out and the dial out number is the number of the first MCU A different participant is defined in the Master conference for each cascading link In the example MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II shown above Conference B which is the Master conference has five participants two endpoints and three connections to slave conferences Each of the slave conferences
430. ter Please re enter the new password NEWCNFRM ACA new password Press the pound key when complete General New The new password is invalid NEWINVLD ACA password invalid General The password has been NEWOK ACA Successful successfully changed password change General The conference is now locked LOCKED ACA Conference locked General The conference is now unlocked UNLOCKED ACA Conference is unlocked General The conference you are trying to CUFLOCKD ACA Destination join is locked conference is locked General Billing Please enter the Billing code Press BILLINGAACA code request the pound key when complete during On Going Conference General Self mute You are now muted SELFMUTE ACA indication General Self You are no longer muted MUTEEND ACA unmute indication 2 67 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services 2 68 Table 2 15 Default IVR Messages Continued Message Type Message Text FileName General Max The conference is full You cannot CNFFULL ACA number of join at this time participants exceeded General Add me Please wait and you will be QAADD ACA to Q amp A queue prompted to ask your question confirmation General Remove You have been removed from the QAREM ACA me from Q amp A Question and Answer queue queue confirmation General Next It is now your turn to speak please QAASK ACA participant
431. that apply only to the MGC Manager Users may access the database via the MGC Web Server Manager or the MGC Database Manager and perform changes in the Administrative tables These changes will apply to both applications The access to the Database Manager is password protected The remainder of this chapter describes the basics of using the database Administrative tables Logging into the Database Manager 6 28 Access to the Database Manager is password protected Depending on the Permission Type assigned to the user different options are enabled By default the following login names and passwords are defined in the MGC Database Manager application Table 6 1 Database Passwords POLYCOM POLYCOM Administrator ACCORD ACCORD Administrator admin1 123 Administrator MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table 6 1 Database Passwords These users differ in the functions they are allowed to perform and the information they can access By default five Permission types that define the access rights for each user are defined in the system Administrator Operator Moderator Moderator Monitoring only and Participant The permission types are defined in the Permissions table in the MGC Database Manager application All users can access the database and define their personal reservations participants and general application defaults All database users can create a different set of defaults to use locally or over t
432. the database itself The configuration is performed through the MGC Database Manager application Chapter 6 Using a Database User Tables The User Tables module includes the Participant and Reservation templates that are organized in Groups Users can only manage templates assigned to Groups to which they have access rights The Groups and their access rights are defined in the MGC Database Manager module or directly in the Reservations or Participants in Database windows The User Tables form the core of the MGC Manager application MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Database Configuration You are required to configure your network prior to proceeding with the Database configuration Reservation and Participant parameters may be stored in template files or in databases The template files are the MGC Manager proprietary tool to organize data Therefore data cannot be easily transferred from external databases to the template files Using Microsoft Access or SQL databases to organize data allows the data to be easily used and shared by external applications As with templates the Reservation and Participant database may be installed on the LAN server or on the local computer running the MGC Manager Internet users Access the MGC WebCom mander site via Internet Browser MGC Manager Application i Ii MGC Manager l LA Application Hosts the h MGC Web Server I SRU MGC Web Server Manager application
433. the dial out participant e Connect the dial out participant MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Monitoring Monitoring of cascading conferences with an H 323 link is done in the same way as with an ISDN link Figure 1 8 shows information for each of the two linked conferences using an H 323 link MGC Manager VERSION 7 5 0 17 iii Financial Management Normal E MCU Configuration ma it Jan 26 2004 14 26 45 Jan 26 2004 16 26 45 728 2 3199 On EAB coerce 8 Link In IP Me On Going Gateway Sessions 0 B Participants Queue 0 H E Reservations 36 FH B meeting Rooms L Marketing Management Normal H MCU Configuration H a On Going Conferences 1 an Conference B 8 Link Out IP Media M Ea conference A Financial Management ID 728 2 Connected ukna De Connected 172 22 140 174 BFS vialin qi Ht ox 3 Mike D gt Connected 172 22 133 67 B Dial out i T ox Ea conference B Marketing Management ID 564 2 Connected 3 Link Out IP O Connected 172 22 140 201 ge Dial out co Zt ok Mary WD Connected 172 22 131 78 e Dial out T oK Figure 1 8 Monitoring Cascading Conferences with an H 323 Link Defining H 323 Cascading Conference Participants The conference name is automatically added to an outgoing H 323 call as an H 323 ID in the call setup message The message H 323 ID is t
434. the participants assigned to a Reservation template expand the Groups tree to locate the Template Group in which the Reservation template is stored To list participants in the Reservation Template l 2 3 E A Root H E Polycom Group H w User B User Group 2 H International TW p 3 H ob wee Overseas ae Duke Knoop ps Frank bB Michelle s bo Nadine a Default Audio s Default _Video fob sw CP seb Video Switch i weboffice_al ah weboffice_v1 Phone IP Open the Reservations in Database window Connectio D Reservations in AccordDB Channels Aggregation Ga Nadine see 1172 22 13 79320 1172 22 13 1172 22 13 Dial out Dial out Dial out Dial in Auto Click the plus icon next to the Groups icon to expand the Groups tree Repeat this procedure on all the Root Group and sub groups until you locate the required Reservation template Double click the plus icon next to the desired Reservation template icon This displays the participants below the Reservation template and also in the Status area of the window 7 21 Chapter 7 Database Templates The following icons are used to indicate the participant type st indicates a Linked participant 2 LO indicates an Embedded participant For more information refer to the section Adding Participants to a Reservation Template on page 7 33 To copy the participant properties from a Dat
435. the permissions to modify the database tables can define private default sets for their exclusive use Labels used to define labels The labels may be assigned to conferences and participants mainly for sorting purposes Only users with the permission to configure the database may manage the Labels table Permissions used to define the access rights to various modules of the MGC WebCommander and the MGC Database Manager applications and perform various tasks Only users with the permission to configure the database may define or modify Permissions Users enables the definition of the MGC WebCommander and the MGC Web Database Manager users Users are assigned the appropriate permissions that define their access rights to the system functions In addition it enables you to assign access rights to the various groups defined in the Groups table Only users with the permission to configure the database can manage the Users table Groups enables the definition of groups to which users are assigned The Conference templates and Participant templates are also assigned to a group and can be viewed modified deleted or used to start a conference only by users who have access rights to that group The Groups enhance the system security giving users access only to data that they are allowed to view The Database Manager Toolbar The following buttons appear in the Database Manager toolbar Eee Gee Copies the selected record from a
436. the video session type is video switching and the video format is CIF The CIF picture frame rate as follows 22 30 pictures per second 23 15 pictures per second 24 10 pictures per second 25 7 5 pictures per second 255 Auto Relevant only if the video session type is video switching and the Video Format is QCIF The QCIF picture frame rate as follows 22 30 pictures per second 23 15 pictures per second 24 10 pictures per second 25 7 5 pictures per second 255 Auto A 19 Appendix A CDR File Fields Table A 4 Event Fields for Event 1 Conference Start Continued a es LSD Rate The LSD rate as follows The values are identical to those in the H221 table 1 300 bps 2 1200 bps 3 4800 bps 4 6400 bps 5 8000 bps 6 9600 bps 7 14 4 kbps 8 16 kbps 9 24 kbps 10 32 kbps 11 40 kbps 12 48 kbps 13 56 kbps 14 62 4 kbps 15 64 kbps 31 Variable LSD 255 Opened dynamically HSD Rate The HSD rate as follows The values are identical to those in the H221 table Note The MCU does not currently support HSD 1 variable HSD 17 64 kbps 18 128 kbps 19 192 kbps 20 256 kbps 21 320 kbps 22 384 kbps 23 512 kbps 24 768 kbps 25 1152 kbps 26 1536 kbps 255 Opened dynamically A 20 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 4 Event Fields for Event 1 Conference Start Continued ee ee Se T120 Bit Rate The T120 bit rate as
437. ting the Cascading field to Auto means that the conference status as Master or Slave will be defined later once the connection with the second conference is established The definition of Master and Slave is made according to the Cascading definition of the second conference or according to the status negotiated between the two MCUs In that case MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II the conference is set as a Slave if the link from the second conference identifies itself as Master by sending a special message 13 Complete the conference definition H 323 ID in the call setup message The message H 323 ID is then defined as LS The conference name is automatically added to an outgoing H 323 call as an an H 323 alias that matches all incoming parties to the conference To define a Slave Conference 1 Connect to an MCU and expand its tree H Product Management Normal H B MCU Configuration k On Going Conferences 0 On Going Gateway Sessions 0 d Participants Queue 0 H Reservations 0 a Meeting Rooms Entry Queues amp SIP Factories 6 2 Right click the On Going Conferences icon and then click New Conference H Ta On Going Confer s 1 New Operator Conference Print All Paste Cirie Cirip Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences The Conference Properties General dialog box opens Default Conference Properties Product Managemen
438. tion Template file 1 Open the Reservation Template file as described in Opening a Reservation Template File on page 8 16 In the Reservation Template file window double click the Conferences List icon or click the icon next to the Conference List icon to expand the list of Reservation templates Right click the icon of the desired Reservation template and then click New Participant ResTemplatesFile2 tlt Oo x a Conferences List pS A 3 Audio Conference zg Operator Conference Start lew Participant Copy As Default Attending Print Template Cut Copy Paste Paste As Delete Properties The Participant Properties dialog box opens Define the Participant Properties as described in the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties Complete the participant definition and click OK The participant is added to the Reservation template List the participants in the Reservation template to view the new participant On the Template menu click Save or click the Save button on the toolbar The participant is added to the Reservation template The participant s name appears in the Reservation template s list of participants The gy MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II asterisk is removed from the title bar of the Reservations Template file window You can also define a new participant from the Reservations P
439. tion is installed with an embedded Defaults set If no Defaults set is defined as the Global Defaults set the embedded Defaults set is active A Defaults set may be set as a Private or a Global Defaults set A Global Defaults set is a default set that applies to all the database users A Private Defaults set applies only to users to whom it is specifically allocated as the private Defaults set and will be used instead of the Global Defaults set Only one Defaults set may be defined as the Private Defaults set Selecting another Defaults set as the Private Defaults Set automatically cancels the current Private Set One set may be defined as both a Global and a Private Defaults set The selection of the Global and Private Defaults set is done separately for each Defaults category If more than one database is installed the system loads the Private defaults from the database designated as Private and the Global Defaults from the database designated as Global Therefore you must define the database from which you want to load the Private Defaults set as Private and the database from which you want to load the Global default set as Global You may define the same database as both Global and Private In that case the Global Defaults set and the Private Defaults set will be taken from the same database Using the right click pop up menu you can also delete a new Defaults set or change the Defaults set parameters 6 47 Chapter 6 Using a Data
440. tion procedure Make sure that the appropriate path is selected in the Restore database General dialog box Registering the SQL Database in ODBC Data Sources The SQL database provided with the MGC Manager Server must be registered in the ODBC Data Source to enable its use by both the SQL and MGC WebCommander applications 6 19 Chapter 6 Using a Database 6 20 To register the SQL Database in ODBC 1 On the Start menu click Control Panel __ My Documents L My Recent Documents 2 My Pictures 3p My Music SI my computer My Network Places ED cess and De e Connect To 1S Printers and Faxes Help and Support eerie e nec Manager ver 7 0 aw R rovon varideo Starter Edition E vos ot OJ shut Down The Control Panel window opens ontrol Pane oj x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help O 0 B D Search E Folders S x 9 A Address e Control Panel z Adjust your computer settings for vision hearing and n lardware Installs and troubleshoots hardware Th Add or Remove Progra i Kg Administrative Tools Configure adminis D Automatic Updates deliver important upda o gt Date and Time Set the date time and time zone for your computer Pil DiskShare Configuration DiskShare Configuration SA Display Change the appearance of your desktop such as the b Folder Options Customize the displ
441. to disable the SilencelT option and then return to the conference unmuted The default voice message is To disable noise detection and return to the conference press four Optional Indicates which DTMF code to enter to return to the conference and remain muted The default voice message is To return to the conference muted press two 2 45 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Table 2 11 IVR Properties SilencelT Options and Messages Continued SilencelT Message Description Unmute Reminder Indicates which DTMF code to enter to unmute the participant s line once they return to the conference muted This message is played once as a reminder when the participant has selected to return to the conference muted The default voice message is To unmute your line at any time press pound six Note This message is enabled and mandatory when the Return to the Conference Muted check box is selected Participant s Line Informs all participants that the line of participant X Detected as Noisy has been detected as noisy and has been muted The default voice message is participant s name has been automatically muted due to a noisy line Note This option is available only if the Roll Call option on the Roll Call tab is enabled in the same IVR Message Service 34 Click Next The DTMF Codes dialog box opens xl Request Private Assistance Everyone Request Assistance for
442. to enter the conference password in order to connect to the conference Conference Chairperson Requests participants to identify themselves as the conference chairperson and enter the chairperson password General Played when participants must be notified of system related events for example notification that a conference is locked Operator Assistance Played when the participant requests or is entitled to the operator s assistance Roll Call Messages related to Roll Call such as the message requesting that participants state their name for recording SilencelT Played when the SilenceIT options are enabled in the definition of the IVR Service that is used for this conference Conference ID Requests the participant chairperson to use the required conference ID to connect to the conference In the Message Type list select the message type for which the downloaded message is to be played 2 19 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services Table 2 2 lists the Message Types for each category for which files can be downloaded Table 2 2 IVR Message Types by Message Category Message Sete Category Message Type Description Welcome General Welcome The first message played when Message Message the participant connects to the MCU conference Entry Queue Conference Welcome Played when the participant Message enters the conference Conference Request Password Requests the participant to enter Password the password required t
443. ty z User Defined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 User Detined 4 Broadcasting Volume 5 Listening Volume 5 ino Geant eae Po Dae o Gone o T Audio Only T vip JT Participant linked Cancel Help c Ineach field the system displays the default values as defined in the Participant Defaults set currently loaded in the database For more details regarding the Default sets refer to Chapter 6 Managing the Defaults Sets on page 6 47 7 17 Chapter 7 Database Templates d Define the participant Name Interface Type and all required Identification parameters For a detailed description of the Identification parameters for the ISDN ATM MPI H 323 and SIP interface types see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Defining Participant Properties For a detailed description of the Identification parameters for T1 CAS interface types see the MGC Manager User s Guide VoicePlus Edition Chapter 2 Defining Participant Properties e To save the participant to the database and define it as a linked participant select the Participant Linked check box at the bottom left corner of the dialog box If this check box is cleared the participant will be an embedded participant f Click the Advanced tab and define the required parameters For a detailed description of the Advanced parameters for the ISDN ATM MPI H 323 and SIP interface types see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 4
444. ups tree until you locate the group to which to add the Reservation template In the Groups Browser area right click the Group icon and then click New Res Operator Template olycom New Res Template New Res Operator Template Print amp ll Paste Ctrl V Paste As Ctrl P New Group Delete Group The Conference Properties General dialog box opens Default Conference Properties General Scheduler Settings Participants MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Name Default Conterence Duration 2 00 Billing gt Meet Me Per Cont Conference Type p Media Standard C Audio Meeting Room Video Audio Operator Conf Entry Password Web Chairperson Password Numeric ID User Detined 1 User Defined 2 User Defined 3 r A Network Video Sessi JP Video IF ISDN ATM MPI Remarks Remarks History Update Remark x 4 Type the conference name This name is used to identify the template It is recommended to use the operator name as the conference name The conference is automatically set to a Transcoding conference supporting all available network connections These parameters cannot be modified in an Operator conference When starting an On Going Operator conference from this template the template name is automatically replaced with the operator s login name 5 Define the remaining parameters
445. ure CDR event code 22 An error occurred when a participant input a DTMF code For a description of the fields see Table A 35 Event Fields for Event 22 DTMF Code Failure on page A 54 SIP Participant CDR event code 23 Connected The connection of a SIP participant For a description of the fields see Table A 31 Event Fields for Events 17 23 H 323 Participant Connected SIP Participant Connected on page A 47 SIP Call Setup CDR event code 24 The call setup of a SIP participant For a description of the fields see Table A 29 Event Fields for Events 15 24 H 323 Call Setup SIP Call Setup on page A 46 SIP Clear Indication CDR event code 25 The clear indication termination of the call of a SIP participant For a description of the fields see Table A 30 Event Fields for Events 16 25 H 323 Clear Indication SIP Clear Indication on page A 47 Recording Link CDR event code 26 Event A recording event such as recording started or resumed For a description of the fields see Table A 36 Event Fields for Event 26 Recording Link Event on page A 55 A 12 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Table A 3 CDR Event Types Continued ES al Recording System CDR event code 27 Link Event A recording system playback or recording event Note This event type is only applicable to Conference Recorders For a description of the fields see Table A 37 Event Fields for Event 27 R
446. us operations during the On Going Conference By combining the input of the caller with the menu driven scripts participants can call the conference dial in number and use a touch tone telephone or the endpoint s remote control to interact with the conferencing system The IVR system requires the installation of the Audio card in the MCU The Video card is required for the Click amp View application This chapter describes the following features and terms e What is an IVR Service and how it is used to access a conference IVR hardware describes the hardware required to run an VR enabled conference e IVR Stages describes the various participant statuses during a conference using the IVR system The operations that can be performed during an On Going Conference to which an IVR Service is assigned an IVR enabled conference e Roll Call describes the Roll Call module of the IVR system e SilencelIT describes the SilenceIT feature used to automatically detect and mute noisy lines e Audio and Video Conversion Tools briefly describes the tools required to convert audio wav and video raw file into the MGC internal format aca and acv These tools are detailed in the MGC Administrator s Guide Chapter 8 Audio and Video Conversion Tools 2 1 Chapter 2 IVR and Entry Queue Services This chapter also provides step by step instructions for the following procedures Defining the genera
447. ut where the participant is indicated by the blue box The names of the participants as viewed by this participant 1 29 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings Media Encryption 1 30 Q Encryption is available at the conference and participant levels based on AES 128 Media Encryption and DH 1024 Key Exchange standards Encryption is supported in all types of video conferences and IP Only Audio Only conferences Audio Only PSTN and ISDN participants cannot be encrypted ISDN and IP encrypted participants require more resources than non encrypted participants Media Encryption guidelines Endpoints must support both AES 128 encryption and DH 1024 key exchange standards which are compliant with H 233 H 234 H 320 and H 235 H 323 to encrypt and to join an encrypted conference The encryption mode of the endpoints is not automatically recognized therefore the encryption mode must be set for the conference or the participants when defined e Encrypted conferences with ISDN participants require the installation of a MUX card Encrypted conferences with IP participants require the installation of an IP card e Encryption is enabled at the MCU level and can be applied at the conference level or participant level e Video Switching conferences can include only participants whose encryption setting is identical to the conference setting An encrypted participant cannot join a non encrypted conferen
448. uto H O Polycom Q weboffice weboffice_v2 When the list of Reservation or Participant templates is very long click Filter from the Database menu MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II The Filter Database Reservations or Filter Database Parties dialog box opens Filter Database Reservations x Filter Name T Label T None Reservation Start Time From O fonos z Unti J fio1 04 54 Cancel 7 Select one or more of the following filters and specify values for them Name The name of the template Wild cards can also be used Label The label assigned to the template during its definition The labels are defined in the Database Manager Reservation Start Time This option is enabled only for Reservations and Requested Meetings It enables you to filter reservations according to the start date and time set during the reservation definition either in the WebCommander application or in the MGC Manager By default the current date and time is displayed 8 Click OK The filtered list of Reservation or Participant templates is displayed The Template Groups hierarchy is defined in the Database Manager The administrator can add or delete Template Groups and sub Template Groups in the hierarchical tree Users can depending on their access rights add or delete Template Groups directly from the Reservations or Participants in database windows For example if users
449. ve the changes Alternatively for all types click the Save button on the toolbar Copying Reservation Templates from one File or Database to another It is possible to copy a Reservation template from one Reservation Template file or Reservation database to another You do this by using the Copy and Paste functions The conference Template is copied from the source Reservation Template file or Reservation database and pasted into the target Reservation Template file or Reservation database To copy a conference template from one file or database to another 1 Open the source Reservation Template file or Reservations in Database window 2 Inthe source Reservation Template file window expand the Conferences List icon to list the Reservation templates In the source Reservations in Database window expand the Groups tree to locate the Reservation template to be copied 3 Right click the icon of the Reservation template to copy and then click Copy AB dee weboffice_v1 Start Immediately Start New Participant Copy As Default Attending Print Template Paste rl Paste As Ctrl P Delete Del Properties The conference definition is copied to the clipboard 8 47 Chapter 8 Templates Handling 8 48 Open the target Reservation Template file or Reservations in Database window In the target Reservations in Database window expand the Groups tree to locate the group to which the Reserv
450. ved from the Entry Queue to the conference LinkTo ConferenceType Master Slave _ Link Number 01 99 For example the dial in link from a slave conference may have the visual name LinkToMaster_ 01 3 19 Chapter 3 Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication Defining the Conferencing Components to Implement Ad Hoc Conferencing This section describes the procedures for configuring the conferencing components necessary to implement Ad Hoc Conferencing MCU Configuration to Access the External Database Application 3 20 When the MCU is working with an external database application access to the external database must be configured in the system cfg file To set the external database flags in the system configuration file In the MGC Manager application right click on the MCU icon A pop 1 up menu appears Click the MCU Utils option and then click Edit system cfg The SysConfig dialog box opens SysConfig system cfg 172 22 188 40 E ee joe Section H320 AUDIO H263 CHAIR FECC FREE SERVICES CUSTOMER PERMISSIONS DELAYS GREET AND GUIDE IVR PLUS FLAGS VIDEO PLUS FLAGS PEOPLE PLUS CONTENT 71 CAS PARAMETERS NET8_PARAMETERS ENCRYPTION H264 RESOURCE_REPORT_LOGGE MUX P AGS IP AUDIO a Item Value o x Edit value Set value Make sysenc file In the Section pane double click the EXTERNAL DB option The
451. ved to another conference their encryption settings and the MUX IP resources are evaluated to determine if the move is permitted If not the move fails and the participants remain in their original conference e In Video Switching conferences the encryption setting of the moved ISDN participant must be identical to the destination conference s encryption setting IP participants can move from encrypted to non encrypted conferences and from non encrypted to encrypted conferences e When the Participant Level flag is set to YES participants can move between conferences that have different encryption settings for example From an encrypted conference to a non encrypted conference or another encrypted conference 1 36 MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II From a non encrypted conference to an encrypted conference or another non encrypted conference e When the Participant Level flag is set to NO the participant s encryption setting must match the conference encryption setting to be moved to the other conference For example encrypted participants can move only from an encrypted conference to another encrypted conference These guidelines apply to both connected and disconnected standby participants Monitoring the Encryption Status The conference encryption status is indicated by an icon in the Encryption column in the Status pane and the Status column in the Monitor pane ie The participant encryption statu
452. where the y value is defined in the EXTENSION_TIME INTERVAL FLAG in the AUTO_EXTENSION section of the confer cfg file After an additional interval of x minutes the system checks the connection status of the participants again If no participant is connected to the conference the system terminates the conference immediately If at least one participant is connected the system again extends the conference by additional y minutes This process continues up to x minutes before the maximum extended time defined in the confer cfg is reached At that point the End Of Conference Alert audio tone is played and the conference status icon changes The conference ends when the maximum extension time is reached conference definition During an On Going Conference the End Of Conference Alert settings cannot be accessed or altered The End Of Conference Alert feature can only be activated during the For example in the confer cfg the extension time is set to 6 minutes and the maximum extension time is set to 30 minutes and you set the End Of Conference Alert time to 5 minutes If the conference duration is set to 2 hours after 1 hour and 55 minutes the system checks whether a participant is still connected to the conference and if sufficient resources are allocated to extend the conference If yes the system extends the conference by 6 minutes new duration is set to 2 06 which is the extension time set in the confer
453. x Cancel Apply Help In the Cascade field select Master when defining the master conference Slave when defining the slave conference If Slave is selected in the Master Name field select the name of the participant used as a link to the Master conference Complete the conference definition MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II An Example of Defining a Star Cascading Conference aoe Dial up Dial up pa 7087996 fl po 7087998 Up gui __ IMI ne RAL AT MCU B MCU A MCU C MCU A Master Conference ConferenceA Participant Dial in Link Connection Type Dial in Link In Dial in Number 7087996 Link In 2 Dial in Number 7087998 Conference Properties Settings tab Cascade Master MCU B Slave Conference ConferenceB Participant Dial out Link Connection Type Dial out Dial out Number 7087996 Conference Properties Settings tab Cascade Slave Master Name Link Out Figure 5 3 Star Cascading Flow MCU C Slave Conference ConferenceC Participant Dial out Link Connection Type Dial out Dial out Number 7087998 Conference Properties Settings tab Cascade Slave Master Name Link out2 Illustrated is the Participant Identification Properties as they should appear for the Dial in and Dial out links Check Participant Properties Advanced to find out the Service Name of the Network Service being used 5 15 Chapter 5 H 243 Conferences
454. zed for details The video picture does not change frequently but it includes details that you want to display in higher resolution For example when displaying still images presentations or capturing people Motion Optimized for motion The video pictures change frequently and display movement for example a sporting event where the camera is moved around people moving around etc ACIF Guidelines 4CIF is enabled with the H 263 Video Protocol only The Video card is required ACIF is available in Continuous Presence Classic and Quad Views modes ACIF is transmitted from the MCU to the endpoints when all the following conditions are met ACIF is enabled at the MCU level in the system cfg file The conference line rate is equal or higher than the 4CIF threshold set in the system cfg file The endpoint can receive 4CIF The 4CIF Quality is set to Sharpness The layout is suitable for 4CIF as follows e Classic 2x1 1x2 2x2 3x3 e Quad Views 4x4 ACIF is available in Conference on Port COP conferences in both CP Classic and CP Quad View modes Depending on the conference line rate and video layout the video output resolution is automatically set to 4CIF 1 21 Chapter 1 Advanced Conference Settings 1 22 or CIF resolution based on the endpoint s capabilities If one of the endpoints in the conference cannot receive 4CIF CIF is used instead In H 239 People Content confere

MGC 7.5 User Guide vol. 2_Advanced Features - Support

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents